ascribe.languagelogic.netascribe.languagelogic.net/Help/Printed_Documentation... · Web...
Embed Size (px)
Transcript of ascribe.languagelogic.netascribe.languagelogic.net/Help/Printed_Documentation... · Web...
Table of ContentsAbout This Reference Manual..................................................................................................1
Who Should Use This Manual?..............................................................................................2
Contact Language Logic.......................................................................................................3
Third-Party Web Sites...........................................................................................................3
Feedback on Documentation...............................................................................................3
Introduction to Ascribe™.........................................................................................................3
What is Coding?...................................................................................................................3
What is Ascribe™?...............................................................................................................4
Access..................................................................................................................................4
Ascribe™ Architecture..........................................................................................................5
Data Security....................................................................................................................5
Additional Backup Provisions............................................................................................5
Security from Loss of Service............................................................................................6
Security from Server Intrusion..........................................................................................6
Security from Website Intrusion........................................................................................6
Security in Data Transit....................................................................................................7
Multi-Lingual, Unicode Compliant Application...................................................................7
What's New..........................................................................................................................7
Maintenance Schedule.........................................................................................................8
Daily Maintenance Operations..........................................................................................8
Weekly Maintenance Operations.......................................................................................9
Monthly Maintenance Operations......................................................................................9
Legal Agreements................................................................................................................9
Get Started............................................................................................................................10
Configure Your Internet Browser........................................................................................10
Version of Microsoft Internet Explorer.............................................................................10
AscribeClient.com Component........................................................................................10
Use Secure Communication............................................................................................10
i
PrintDoc01 020813
Configure Ascribe™ as a Trusted Site.............................................................................11
Security Setting for Trusted Sites....................................................................................11
Additional Configuration for IE 7.....................................................................................12
Set Your Language Preference........................................................................................12
Low Resolution Monitors.................................................................................................12
IE 8 Accelerator Icon.......................................................................................................13
Configure Word for Spell-Check in Ascribe™......................................................................13
Word Version 10.2..........................................................................................................13
Word Version 9.0 (Word 2000)........................................................................................14
FTP Setup...........................................................................................................................15
Log In.................................................................................................................................15
Home Page and Main Menu................................................................................................16
Navigation (Popup Menus).................................................................................................16
Application Help.................................................................................................................16
Customization Features.....................................................................................................17
Set User Options.............................................................................................................17
Choose Columns.............................................................................................................18
Change Column Widths...................................................................................................18
Resize Windows..............................................................................................................19
Language Support...........................................................................................................19
Open Sessions....................................................................................................................19
Downloads.........................................................................................................................19
Log Off...............................................................................................................................19
Study..................................................................................................................................... 20
Studies Page......................................................................................................................20
Filter Options..................................................................................................................20
Columns on the Studies Page.........................................................................................20
Studies Page Right-Click Menu........................................................................................22
Assign a Coder to a Study..................................................................................................23
Assigned To Dialog Box from the Studies Page...............................................................23
ii
Table of Contents
More Notes on Assigning Users by Question Types.........................................................24
How to Make Changes.....................................................................................................25
Create a Study...................................................................................................................25
Add a Study....................................................................................................................25
General Tab (Study)........................................................................................................25
Data Tab (Output Data Formats).....................................................................................27
Date Tab.........................................................................................................................28
Copy Study.........................................................................................................................29
Save a Study......................................................................................................................30
Save Study Options.........................................................................................................30
Job Submitted Page.........................................................................................................31
Restore a Study..................................................................................................................32
Restore Types.................................................................................................................32
Restore Shared Codebooks.............................................................................................33
How to Restore a Study..................................................................................................34
Merge Study.......................................................................................................................35
How to Merge a Study.....................................................................................................36
Restore and Merge via the FTP Site................................................................................37
Study Questions Page........................................................................................................38
Add and Edit Questions for a Study....................................................................................41
Question Types...............................................................................................................43
Question Components.....................................................................................................44
General Tab (Question)...................................................................................................44
Tasks Tab........................................................................................................................45
Coding Tab......................................................................................................................46
Data Tab.........................................................................................................................50
Related Questions..............................................................................................................52
Delete a Study and/or Components...................................................................................52
Delete a Study................................................................................................................53
Delete Questions.............................................................................................................53
iii
PrintDoc01 020813
Delete Loaded Verbatims................................................................................................53
Delete Coded Responses................................................................................................54
Codebooks............................................................................................................................55
Codebook Components (Codes and Nets)..........................................................................55
Presentation in Ascribe™...................................................................................................55
Create and Manage Codebooks..........................................................................................56
Review Responses and Edit the Codebook Right-Click Menus............................................57
Edit the Codebook Window................................................................................................58
Codebook Editor.................................................................................................................59
Left Pane Features..........................................................................................................59
Codebook Editing Tool Menu Bar....................................................................................62
Codebook Display...........................................................................................................66
Concurrent Edits.............................................................................................................66
Right-Click Menus...........................................................................................................66
Navigation Keystrokes....................................................................................................69
Set Color Dialog..............................................................................................................69
Copy Text Dialog.............................................................................................................70
Paste Text Dialog............................................................................................................70
Change Case Dialog........................................................................................................71
Renumber the Codebook...................................................................................................71
Renumber with Edit the Codebook or Review Responses...............................................71
Renumber with Codebook Editor.....................................................................................72
Sort Codes.........................................................................................................................74
Define Codebook Properties...............................................................................................75
Edit the Properties of a Code..............................................................................................76
Add Codes..........................................................................................................................77
Spell Check........................................................................................................................78
Regular Expressions...........................................................................................................80
Code in the Coder Window with Expressions..................................................................80
Simple Regular Expressions............................................................................................80
iv
Table of Contents
Match Words...................................................................................................................81
Verbatim Text Normalization..........................................................................................82
Match Phrases.................................................................................................................83
Match Negative Phrases..................................................................................................84
Match Commonly Misspelled Words................................................................................84
Match Multiple Cases......................................................................................................84
Advanced Use of Regular Expressions............................................................................84
Check Expressions for a Specific Codebook....................................................................86
Copy and Paste Codebooks from Excel® or Word..............................................................87
Delete Codes......................................................................................................................89
Move Codes........................................................................................................................89
Share and Copy Codebooks...............................................................................................91
Difference Between Copy and Share...............................................................................92
Copy/Share Manager.......................................................................................................92
How to Unshare Questions..............................................................................................96
Unshare Questions with the Copy/Share Manager..........................................................96
Copy/Share From Dialog.................................................................................................96
Copy/Share To Dialog......................................................................................................97
Rules for Copy and Share Codebooks with Edit the Codebook........................................98
Copy and Share Codebooks with Edit the Codebook.......................................................99
Copy and Share Codebooks to Multiple Questions with Edit the Codebook...................100
Find Where a Code Has Been Applied in Shared Codebooks.........................................101
Unshare Codebooks with Edit the Codebook.................................................................101
Account Codebooks..........................................................................................................102
Verbatims............................................................................................................................105
Studies in Progress...........................................................................................................105
Columns on the Studies in Progress Page.....................................................................106
Studies in Progress Right-Click Menu............................................................................107
Questions in Progress.......................................................................................................107
Fields on the Questions in Progress Page......................................................................108
v
PrintDoc01 020813
Questions in Progress Right-Click Menu........................................................................109
Code Verbatims in the Coder Window..............................................................................110
The Coder Window Defined...........................................................................................110
Question Pane...............................................................................................................110
Verbatim Pane..............................................................................................................110
Codebook Pane (Coder Window)...................................................................................111
Notes Pane....................................................................................................................112
Selected Codes Pane.....................................................................................................112
Related Responses Pane...............................................................................................113
Summary Pane..............................................................................................................113
How to Code in the Coder Window................................................................................113
Right-Click Menu...........................................................................................................114
Code Verbatims in the Review Responses Window..........................................................121
The Review Responses Window Defined.......................................................................122
Response Pane..............................................................................................................122
Codebook Pane.............................................................................................................122
Button Pane..................................................................................................................124
Select Responses and Apply Codes in Review Responses.............................................125
Right-Click Menu in the Response Pane........................................................................126
See Who Applied a Code to a Response........................................................................128
See the Question ID When You Use Shared Codebooks................................................129
See How Many Responses You Have Left to Code in a Question...................................129
View Options.................................................................................................................130
Swap One Code for Another..........................................................................................133
Create a New Code from a Combination of Codes.........................................................135
Code Verbatims in the Phrase Analyzer Window..............................................................135
The Phrase Analyzer Window Defined...........................................................................136
The Parsed Responses Pane.........................................................................................136
Right-Click Menu in the Parsed Responses Pane...........................................................137
How to Parse Responses...............................................................................................138
vi
Table of Contents
The Options Pane..........................................................................................................140
The Codebook Pane......................................................................................................141
The Phrase Analyzer Coding Process.............................................................................142
Multi-Media Coding..........................................................................................................144
Transcribe IVR and Image Files.....................................................................................145
Audio Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................................................................146
Edit Verbatims.................................................................................................................146
Edit Respondent and Edit Responses............................................................................146
Edit Respondent Window..............................................................................................147
Edit Responses Window................................................................................................151
Translate/Transcribe Verbatims.......................................................................................156
Questions to Transcribe/Translate................................................................................156
Considerations for Translation Using Ascribe™.............................................................157
Translate/Transcribe Window........................................................................................157
Translate/Transcribe Settings.......................................................................................158
Controls in the Banner Bar............................................................................................158
Controls in the Source Pane..........................................................................................159
Controls in the Translation Pane...................................................................................159
Audio Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................................................................161
Counts of Responses.....................................................................................................161
Apply to Duplicates.......................................................................................................161
Add or Edit a Translation...............................................................................................162
Auto Translate..............................................................................................................162
Filter - Set a Response Filter............................................................................................163
Filter Dialog..................................................................................................................163
How to Tell if a Filter is Set...........................................................................................164
Client Access to Data..........................................................................................................166
Client Reports..................................................................................................................166
Coding Overview Report...............................................................................................166
Study Summary Report.................................................................................................167
vii
PrintDoc01 020813
Question Summary Report............................................................................................169
Card Layout Report.......................................................................................................172
Study Report.................................................................................................................173
Study Quality Report.....................................................................................................176
View Codes by Coder Report.........................................................................................179
Respondents Report......................................................................................................180
Cost Accounting...............................................................................................................183
Fee Schedule................................................................................................................183
Transaction Reports......................................................................................................184
Account Statement.......................................................................................................186
Time Accounting..............................................................................................................187
How Ascribe™ Tracks Time...........................................................................................187
Session, Logon, and Tracked Hours..............................................................................188
Count of Responses Coded in Time Tracking Records...................................................189
Use Time Accounting for Job Cost Calculations.............................................................189
Time Accounting Reports..............................................................................................189
Production Bands Report..............................................................................................202
Ascribe Presentations™.......................................................................................................207
Base and Professional Editions.........................................................................................207
Ascribe Presentations Main Page.....................................................................................208
Cross-Tabs.......................................................................................................................209
Questions Tab...............................................................................................................209
Codes Tab.....................................................................................................................212
Words Tab.....................................................................................................................214
Graphs Tab...................................................................................................................218
Options Tab...................................................................................................................220
Filters Tab.....................................................................................................................223
Results Page.................................................................................................................224
Multi-Media Files...........................................................................................................225
Create Bar, Line, or Pie Charts.........................................................................................226
viii
Table of Contents
Bar Chart Examples......................................................................................................229
Line Chart Examples.....................................................................................................230
Pie Chart Example.........................................................................................................231
Co-Occurrence Maps........................................................................................................232
Correlation Matrices.........................................................................................................236
Co-Occurrence Maps and Correlation Matrices Across Questions.....................................238
Proportional Code Font Views..........................................................................................239
Multidimensional Scalings................................................................................................241
Clusters............................................................................................................................243
Multiple Charts.................................................................................................................245
Word Clouds.....................................................................................................................245
Questions Tab...............................................................................................................246
Words Tab.....................................................................................................................247
Options Tab...................................................................................................................247
Filters Tab.....................................................................................................................249
Results Page.................................................................................................................249
Concept Clouds................................................................................................................251
Questions Tab...............................................................................................................252
Options Tab...................................................................................................................252
Filters Tab.....................................................................................................................254
Results Page.................................................................................................................254
Cross-Tab (Legacy)..........................................................................................................255
Select Cross-Tab Questions...........................................................................................256
Fill the Cross-Tab Table with Data.................................................................................257
Expand and Collapse Rows...........................................................................................257
Drill Down to View Responses.......................................................................................258
Filter the Cross-Tab View..............................................................................................258
Save and Export Charts....................................................................................................258
Drill Down Tools...............................................................................................................260
Ascribe Inspector™.............................................................................................................263
ix
PrintDoc01 020813
How to use Inspector.......................................................................................................263
Inspector Privilege...........................................................................................................263
Inspection Ownership.......................................................................................................263
Inspector/Inspections Page..............................................................................................263
Inspections Page Layout...............................................................................................264
Inspections Page Right-Click Menu................................................................................264
Create an Inspection from a Study Question....................................................................265
Create an Inspection from Scratch...................................................................................266
Load Data to an Inspection..............................................................................................267
Inspection Page................................................................................................................267
General Information Section............................................................................................269
Reset Processors...........................................................................................................270
Search..............................................................................................................................271
Search Criteria..............................................................................................................271
Advanced Search Options.............................................................................................272
Search Options..............................................................................................................273
Code This Search..........................................................................................................274
Prior Coded Searches....................................................................................................276
Curate..............................................................................................................................277
Right-Click Menu...........................................................................................................277
Edit Individual Response...............................................................................................278
Options for Curate.........................................................................................................278
Search and Replace......................................................................................................278
Update All.....................................................................................................................280
Remove.........................................................................................................................280
Sentiment Ratings............................................................................................................281
List View for Ratings.....................................................................................................282
Chart View for Ratings..................................................................................................284
Sentiment Topics.............................................................................................................285
List View for Topics.......................................................................................................287
x
Table of Contents
Chart View for Topics....................................................................................................290
Chart Options................................................................................................................291
Group............................................................................................................................292
Export...........................................................................................................................293
Adding and Analyzing Additional Data for Sentiment....................................................294
Concepts..........................................................................................................................294
List View for Concepts...................................................................................................295
Chart View for Concepts...............................................................................................298
Adding and Analyzing Additional Data for Concepts.....................................................298
Entities.............................................................................................................................299
List View for Entities.....................................................................................................299
Accelerator.......................................................................................................................300
Create an Accelerator from an Inspection.....................................................................300
Edit Accelerator Training Examples..............................................................................301
Set Filters.........................................................................................................................303
Filtering Within a Filter Variable....................................................................................306
Filtering With Multiple Filter Variables...........................................................................306
Save to Ascribe or Export to Excel While Filtering.........................................................306
Variables Page.................................................................................................................307
Page Layout..................................................................................................................307
Add a New Variable.......................................................................................................308
Label the Data in a Variable..........................................................................................308
Insert or Remove Labels...............................................................................................308
Create an Account Codebook........................................................................................308
Navigate to Review Responses.....................................................................................309
Remove a Variable........................................................................................................309
Variable Properties........................................................................................................309
Return to Inspector/Inspections....................................................................................309
Data Management...............................................................................................................309
How to Load Data.............................................................................................................309
xi
PrintDoc01 020813
Load Tab Delimited Data..............................................................................................309
Load Excel® Files.........................................................................................................310
Load File Types.............................................................................................................311
Define Your Own Load File Types..................................................................................314
Load Study Setup Information.......................................................................................318
Load Data to a Study....................................................................................................319
View and Delete Loaded Data.......................................................................................320
Loads by Date...............................................................................................................321
Load Details..................................................................................................................321
Loads by Job..................................................................................................................322
Load Voice Recordings..................................................................................................323
Load Image Files...........................................................................................................323
Auto FTP Setup.............................................................................................................323
Auto-Apply Codes..........................................................................................................324
Download Data.................................................................................................................329
Download Study Results...............................................................................................329
User Defined Study Results...........................................................................................331
Substitution Values for User Defined Study Results......................................................332
Download Codebooks....................................................................................................334
User Defined Codebook Formats...................................................................................335
Substitution Values for User Defined Codebook Formats..............................................336
Download Data with Scripted Output............................................................................340
Manage Jobs.....................................................................................................................356
View Detailed Information about a Job..........................................................................357
View Parameters for Scripted Output Jobs....................................................................358
Download the Results of a Job.......................................................................................358
Resume a Paused Job....................................................................................................358
Schedule Jobs...................................................................................................................359
Set Up a Daily Schedule................................................................................................361
Set Up a Weekly Schedule............................................................................................361
xii
Table of Contents
Set Up a Monthly Schedule...........................................................................................361
Repeat a Job..................................................................................................................361
Change a Schedule.......................................................................................................362
Delete a Schedule.........................................................................................................362
View the Parameters for a Scheduled Job.....................................................................362
Run a Job Now...............................................................................................................363
Ascribe™ Study Shipping.................................................................................................363
Study Shipping Features...............................................................................................364
Shipped Studies Page...................................................................................................364
Configure Study Shipping..............................................................................................365
Set Up Your FTP Site.....................................................................................................365
Maintain Your FTP Site..................................................................................................366
Use Encryption..............................................................................................................366
File Management..........................................................................................................366
Repository........................................................................................................................367
Display Studies.............................................................................................................368
Find Box........................................................................................................................368
Show Details.................................................................................................................368
Download a Study from the Repository.........................................................................370
View the Questions in the Repository...........................................................................370
Study Archive (Save and Restore) XML Specification.......................................................370
Structure.......................................................................................................................370
XML Document Outline.................................................................................................371
Tag Descriptions...........................................................................................................372
Media Types..................................................................................................................383
Write XML Documents...................................................................................................384
Parse XML Documents..................................................................................................384
Example of a Study with No Questions.........................................................................384
Example of a Study with Three Questions and Coded Responses.................................385
Accelerator Coding Model...................................................................................................391
xiii
PrintDoc01 020813
ACM Definitions................................................................................................................391
ACM Theory of Operation.................................................................................................391
Code Matching.................................................................................................................392
ACM Architecture.............................................................................................................392
VCS™ - Verbatim Coding System.....................................................................................393
How the Verbatim Coding System Works.........................................................................393
Creation of Binary Classifiers........................................................................................393
Coding Using Binary Classifiers.....................................................................................394
Lessons Learned...........................................................................................................395
Frequently Asked Questions About VCS™.....................................................................396
VCS™ Training Metrics.....................................................................................................396
Accuracy at the Individual Level (F1)............................................................................397
Estimating Accuracy.....................................................................................................398
Accuracy at the Aggregate Level ( PD).........................................................................398
Multi-Lingual Models........................................................................................................398
When to Use ACM.............................................................................................................399
Trackers........................................................................................................................399
Large One-Time Studies................................................................................................400
Codes Common to Multiple Codebooks.........................................................................400
Questions Common to Multiple Studies.........................................................................400
Multi-Lingual Projects....................................................................................................400
ACM Fees.........................................................................................................................400
How ACM Fees are Applied...........................................................................................401
ACM Transaction Reporting...........................................................................................401
ACM Process on the Web..................................................................................................402
Create and Train a Model..............................................................................................402
Use the Model for Coding..............................................................................................402
Improve a Model...........................................................................................................403
Maintain the Model.......................................................................................................403
Create a Model from a Question.......................................................................................403
xiv
Table of Contents
Accelerator Coding Models Page......................................................................................405
Right-Click Menu on the Accelerator Coding Models Page................................................406
Noise Filters.....................................................................................................................407
Constructing a Noise Filter............................................................................................408
Special Characters for a Noise Filter.............................................................................408
ACM Properties Dialog......................................................................................................409
Training Example Editor...................................................................................................411
Filter Bar.......................................................................................................................411
Training Results Section................................................................................................412
Training Examples Table...............................................................................................413
Copy Examples from Shared Questions...........................................................................415
Considerations Before Approving a Model........................................................................416
Assess the Quality of Training Results..........................................................................417
Approve a Model...........................................................................................................417
Unapprove a Model.......................................................................................................417
Training Results Page...................................................................................................418
Training Code Cleaner...................................................................................................419
Code Questions using a Model.........................................................................................420
Run an ACM Coding Job.................................................................................................420
Assess the Quality of ACM Coding.................................................................................420
Improve ACM Coding Quality............................................................................................420
Number of Training Examples per Code........................................................................420
Quality of Training Examples........................................................................................421
Conceptual Clarity of Codes..........................................................................................421
Specificity of Coding.....................................................................................................421
Extraneous Text in Responses......................................................................................421
Negative Examples.......................................................................................................421
Divide Responses into Concepts...................................................................................422
Accelerator Coding Model Page........................................................................................423
ACM Properties Table....................................................................................................423
xv
PrintDoc01 020813
Languages Table...........................................................................................................423
Coding Questions Table................................................................................................424
Right-Click Menu on the Accelerator Coding Model Page..............................................424
Right-Click Menu for the Coding Questions Table..........................................................425
Question Selection Dialog.............................................................................................426
Ascribe™ Desktop...............................................................................................................426
Install Ascribe™ Client Applications: Desktop and Crossword..........................................426
System Requirements...................................................................................................426
Installing Crossword/Desktop........................................................................................427
Common Key Usage.........................................................................................................428
Terminology.....................................................................................................................428
Log On.............................................................................................................................429
Log Off.............................................................................................................................430
Refresh............................................................................................................................430
Grid Editing......................................................................................................................431
Main Display and Navigation............................................................................................431
Main Menu....................................................................................................................431
Toolbar..........................................................................................................................432
Navigation Pane............................................................................................................433
Data Pane.....................................................................................................................435
General Navigation Concepts........................................................................................435
Options and Customization...........................................................................................439
Using the Workspace....................................................................................................444
Using 'My Folders'.........................................................................................................446
Account Codebooks in Desktop.....................................................................................448
Desktop Codebook Editor.................................................................................................448
Codebook Properties Editor...........................................................................................449
Codes Editor..................................................................................................................450
Codebook Renumber Options.......................................................................................456
Codebook Sort Options.................................................................................................457
xvi
Table of Contents
Working with Spell Check Results.................................................................................457
Paste Codes into a Codebook........................................................................................458
Text AutoCoder................................................................................................................458
Start the Text AutoCoder..............................................................................................458
Process Overview..........................................................................................................458
Multiple Responses Coding Tool.......................................................................................459
Top Toolbar...................................................................................................................460
Response Pane..............................................................................................................461
Tabbed Pane.................................................................................................................462
Set View Options...........................................................................................................465
Code with Multiple Responses Coding Tool...................................................................466
Codebook Merge/Map Tool...............................................................................................469
Merge Codebooks.........................................................................................................469
Merge Mode Toolbar Options........................................................................................469
Map Codebook Codes....................................................................................................470
Mapping Mode Toolbar Options.....................................................................................471
Working with the Match View........................................................................................472
Study Import Tool.............................................................................................................473
Top Toolbar...................................................................................................................473
Left-Side Toolbar...........................................................................................................473
Add a New Study...........................................................................................................474
Add Questions to an Existing Study..............................................................................474
Study Merge Tool.............................................................................................................474
Study Merge Tool Functions..........................................................................................475
Study Merge Tool Copy Process Description.................................................................475
Samples...........................................................................................................................476
How to Create a Sample...............................................................................................476
Create Quick Sample Dialog Box...................................................................................479
How to Use a Sample....................................................................................................479
View a List of Samples..................................................................................................480
xvii
PrintDoc01 020813
Delete a Sample............................................................................................................480
Automated Coding Model (Desktop)....................................................................................481
ACM Process on Desktop..................................................................................................481
List of Automated Coding Models.....................................................................................483
Edit ACM Dialog................................................................................................................485
Training Example Languages...........................................................................................487
Multi-Lingual Model..........................................................................................................488
Provide Training Examples...............................................................................................489
Copy Responses From a Study Question to the Model..................................................489
Load a File of Responses to a Model Using the Right-Click Menu in the Navigator........490
Import Examples Using the Training Example Editor....................................................490
Listen for Copy Using the Training Example Editor.......................................................490
Enter New Examples Using the Training Example Editor...............................................490
Desktop Training Example Editor.....................................................................................490
Quick Start....................................................................................................................490
Editor Toolbar...............................................................................................................491
Training Example Editor View Options..........................................................................492
Examples Pane..............................................................................................................493
Delete Examples...........................................................................................................494
Training Example Editor Tabbed Pane..........................................................................495
ACM Coding......................................................................................................................499
Associate the Coding Question with the Model.............................................................499
Start the Coding Job......................................................................................................499
Coding Questions Table................................................................................................499
Coding Time Options.....................................................................................................501
Review ACM Coding......................................................................................................501
Review ACM Coding Window............................................................................................501
Accept Suggested Codes..............................................................................................501
ACM Suggestion Confidence Threshold.........................................................................502
Toolbar..........................................................................................................................502
xviii
Table of Contents
Response Pane..............................................................................................................503
View Options for ACM Review Coding Window..............................................................504
Tabbed Pane for Review ACM Coding Window..............................................................505
Ascribe™ Crossword............................................................................................................506
Installing Crossword.........................................................................................................506
Crossword Logon..............................................................................................................506
Understanding a Crossword Report..................................................................................507
Dimensions...................................................................................................................507
The Crossword Table.....................................................................................................507
Crosswords Page..............................................................................................................507
Open Crossword...............................................................................................................508
New Crossword................................................................................................................508
New Crossword Wizard.....................................................................................................508
Select Study for Crossword...........................................................................................509
Select Row Question(s).................................................................................................509
Select Column Question(s)............................................................................................509
Select Hidden Question(s).............................................................................................509
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................509
Save Crossword...............................................................................................................509
Crossword Table Right-Click Menu...................................................................................510
Responses Dialog.............................................................................................................511
Filtering.........................................................................................................................511
Saving...........................................................................................................................511
Crossword Properties Dialog............................................................................................512
Show Dimensions.............................................................................................................513
Dimensions List.............................................................................................................513
Dimension View............................................................................................................514
New Dimension Wizard....................................................................................................516
Publish a Crossword.........................................................................................................516
Filter a Crossword Table...................................................................................................517
xix
PrintDoc01 020813
Graph a Crossword...........................................................................................................517
t-Tests Between Proportions............................................................................................518
Create a Co-Occurrence Map from Crossword..................................................................518
User Administration.............................................................................................................521
Privilege Levels................................................................................................................521
Associates........................................................................................................................521
Add/Edit an Associate...................................................................................................522
Delete an Associate......................................................................................................523
Company..........................................................................................................................523
Add/Edit a Company.....................................................................................................523
Delete a Company........................................................................................................523
Manage Company Contacts..........................................................................................523
Past Sessions...................................................................................................................525
Reset Passwords..............................................................................................................525
Locked Responses............................................................................................................525
Site Administration..............................................................................................................526
Translate the Ascribe™ Interface.....................................................................................526
Change Ascribe™ Text..................................................................................................526
Reload Strings...............................................................................................................528
Site Configuration............................................................................................................528
Frequently Asked Questions................................................................................................531
General Questions............................................................................................................531
Limits in Ascribe...............................................................................................................533
Coding and Codebook Questions......................................................................................533
Review Responses Questions...........................................................................................535
Translation and Transcription Questions..........................................................................535
Load and Download Data Questions.................................................................................535
Performance Questions....................................................................................................538
Error Messages....................................................................................................................539
Codebook Needs Repair......................................................................................................543
xx
Table of Contents
Security Settings.................................................................................................................547
Excel® Add-In.....................................................................................................................549
Install the Excel Add-In.....................................................................................................549
Extract the File..............................................................................................................549
Format Excel 2003........................................................................................................549
Format Excel 2007........................................................................................................550
Use the Excel Add-In for Question Setup in Ascribe.........................................................552
Excel Add-In Loading Tools..............................................................................................553
I do not have full functionality with the Excel Add-In; how do I resolve this?...................553
Word Configuration for Spell Check in Ascribe™.................................................................554
Word version 10.2: Configure Spell Check.......................................................................554
Word version 9.0 (Microsoft Word 2000): Configure Spell Check.....................................555
Multiple Language Support in Ascribe™..............................................................................556
Loading Data....................................................................................................................556
Downloading Data............................................................................................................556
Configuring Your Computer For Multiple Language Support.............................................556
Windows XP..................................................................................................................556
Windows 2000..............................................................................................................557
Other Versions of Windows...........................................................................................557
Using Internet Explorer in Multiple Languages.................................................................557
Language Selection..........................................................................................................557
Translating Your Ascribe™ Site........................................................................................557
Ascribe™ Basics..................................................................................................................558
Coder Interface (Coder Window)......................................................................................558
Review Responses...........................................................................................................559
Edit the Codebook............................................................................................................559
Phrase Analyzer...............................................................................................................560
Loading Data....................................................................................................................560
Copy and Paste Codebooks..............................................................................................561
Support Procedures.............................................................................................................561
xxi
PrintDoc01 020813
Phone Support.................................................................................................................561
Email Support..................................................................................................................561
After Hours/International Support....................................................................................562
Language Logic Staff...........................................................................................................563
Glossary Terms...................................................................................................................564
xxii
About This Reference ManualThis reference manual explains how to use the Ascribe™ verbatim management application. It is designed for all user roles and privilege levels. Additional training is available from Language Logic.
This reference manual contains the following:
Chapter Description
About This Reference Manual Describes the purpose and contents of the reference manual.
Introduction to Ascribe™ Provides an overview of Ascribe™ and how it works.Get Started Describes how to configure your Internet browser,
how to log in, how to navigate around Ascribe™, and how to customize features.
Study Describes how to create, add, edit, merge and delete studies and study questions.
Codebooks Describes how to create and manage codebooks.Verbatims Describes how to code verbatims with the Coder
Window, Review Responses, and Phrase Analyzer, and how to translate and transcribe verbatims.
Client Access to Data Describes client reports, cost accounting, and time accounting.
Ascribe Presentations™ Describes how to create cross-tabs, bar charts, line charts, pie charts, co-occurrence maps, correlation matrices, multidimensional scalings, clusters, word clouds, and concept clouds.
Ascribe Inspector™ Describes how to use Ascribe Inspector™ to explore sentiment ratings, topics, and concepts.
Data Management Describes how to load and download data, how to schedule and manage jobs, and how to use study shipping and the repository.
Ascribe™ Desktop Describes how to use Ascribe™ Desktop.Accelerator Coding Model (Web) Describes the theories behind the Accelerator Coding
Model and Verbatim Coding System and how to use ACM to train models and code verbatims.
Automated Coding Model (Desktop)
Describes the ACM features available thru Desktop such as the Training Example Editor and the Review ACM Coding window.
Ascribe™ Crossword Describes how to use Ascribe™ Crossword.User Administration Describes how to add and edit associates and
companies and how to reset passwords.Site Administration Describes how to configure and translate the site.Frequently Asked Questions Provides answers to a list of common questions about
1
Ascribe™.Error Messages Describes error messages and what they mean.Security Settings Describes how to set security settings for Ascribe™.Excel ® Add-In Describes how to install and use the Excel® Add-In to
set up questions and load data.Word Configuration for Spell Check Describes how to set up Word to use it for spell check
in Ascribe™.Ascribe™ Basics Provides a quick reference to the Coder Window,
Review Responses, Edit the Codebook, and Phrase Analyzer and describes how to load data and copy and paste codebooks.
Support Procedures Describes how to get help from the Language Logic Support Team.
Language Logic Staff Provides contact information for the Language Logic staff.
Multiple Language Support in Ascribe™
Describes how to use Ascribe™ in multiple languages.
Glossary Terms Provides definitions of commonly used terms.
Who Should Use This Manual?The following table lists the user roles available and the chapters in this manual that pertain to each.
User Role Applicable ChaptersAll Roles About This Reference Manual
Introduction to Ascribe™ Ascribe™ Housekeeping Get Started Frequently Asked Questions Security Settings Ascribe™ Basics Support Procedures Language Logic Staff
Administrator Client Access to Data User Administration
Supervisor Study Codebooks Verbatims Data Management Site Administration Error Messages Excel® Add-In
Coder Codebooks
2
Codebooks
VerbatimsClient Client Access to Data
Data ManagementEditor Site AdministrationTranscriber Verbatims
Contact Language LogicIf you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in this manual, you can contact Language Logic Customer Support: [email protected]
Third-Party Web SitesLanguage Logic is not responsible for the availability of third-party web sites mentioned in this document. Language Logic does not endorse and is not responsible or liable for any content, advertising, products, or other materials that are available on or through such sites or resources. Language Logic will not be responsible or liable for any actual or alleged damage or loss caused by or in connection with the use of or reliance on any such content, goods, or services that are available on or through such sites or resources.
Feedback on DocumentationLanguage Logic continually evaluates its documentation and looks for ways to improve it to directly benefit our global customers. We welcome your comments and suggestions.
We normally do not send personal replies to feedback reports. However, we do read each and every message. We use the information to improve our products and services. Your comments, suggestions, and ideas for improvements are very important to us. We appreciate you taking the time to send us this information. Please email your comments to [email protected].
Introduction to Ascribe™The Ascribe™ application offers advanced technology to improve your research productivity in several areas, including market research coding.
What is Coding?Open-ended coding refers to the process by which verbatim responses are assigned to categories. These categories represent the concepts that the verbatim responses are expressing. It is a common task in the survey research industry as many quantitative studies ask for verbatim responses from the people who are interviewed.
NoteQuantitative studies are those that use a scientifically chosen sample to be representative of some population; for example, it may be an entire country or it may be just people who want to buy a car.In many cases, some open-ended questions are distributed within the larger number of closed-ended questions.
Note
3
PrintDoc01 020813
Closed-ended questions ask for a response from within a list of categories (for example, rate this from 1-5.)The open-ended questions might be there to:
Clarify some of the closed-ended questions. "Why did you rate that so poorly?" Reveal information that is difficult to anticipate in a closed-ended category. "Why did
you like that advertisement?" Act as a confirmation of the closed-ended responses. Generate ideas or concepts. "What do you think the company should do to improve
their service?"Open-ended questions are used extensively in advertising and copy testing, attitudes about new products or product line extensions, concept testing, and in the development of difficult or expensive surveys to help understand the right kind of closed-ended questions to ask. Open-ended questions are used to explain, clarify, and diagnose the quantitative results of a survey. In many cases, they answer the why.
What is Ascribe™?Ascribe™ is a verbatim management application designed to boost the productivity and accuracy of your coders. Ascribe™ provides several coding environments, each of which is optimized for specific coding tasks.
Single verbatim coding - presents a single verbatim at a time. Multiple verbatim coding - designed to code multiple responses simultaneously. Verbatims of short to moderate length/common phrase coding - designed to
process verbatims efficiently with common phrases. Automatic coding of closed-ended questions - although not required, this
coding can be useful to reference related questions and filter verbatims. Automatic coding of text responses – designed to code exact matches of
previously-coded verbatims.AccessAccess to Ascribe™ is controlled by user name and password and by user roles. You must have a password to get into Ascribe™. Passwords are case sensitive, must be at least 8 characters, and expire each month. Case sensitivity considers upper-case (capital) letters and lower-case letters to be different characters. You may use any combination of letters and numbers.
Access to Ascribe™’s functions is controlled by defining each associate’s user role in the Associates table. Available levels include: Administrator, Supervisor, Coder, Client, Editor, and Transcriber.
Ascribe™ ArchitectureAscribe™ is a web application, hosted on our secure servers. This provides several advantages to you:
Global accessibility - Ascribe™ is available from any location on the Internet. No installation required - Ascribe™ requires no installation on your network. Low IT costs - Language Logic manages the Ascribe™ servers.
4
Codebooks
Multi-lingual - Ascribe™ supports any character set and is Unicode compliant.Data SecurityAscribe™ provides a comprehensive security framework and strategy. All data is protected by a system of interlocking technologies that ensure maximum protection.
Ascribe™ is built around SQL Server databases, housed on servers at Inetu, Inc (www.inetu.net) in Pennsylvania. Inetu provides 24x7 support for server and infrastructure failures. Ascribe™ provides multiple levels of security against data loss.
Active Data Stores
With a single exception, all Ascribe™ data is stored in SQL Server. That single exception is the media files which represent responses that are voice or image files.
SQL Server Data Store
The Ascribe™ application utilizes multiple, clustered instances of Microsoft SQL Server, version 2008R2. SQL Server is configured for the Full Recovery model. Each SQL Server instance executes on a dedicated server, clustered with another server in an active-passive configuration. The passive server is an exact duplicate of the active server. In the event of failure of an active database server, failover occurs automatically to the passive server. The SQL data files and active transaction logs are stored on a storage area network (SAN), connected to the clustered database server using a redundant optical fiber network.
Media File Storage
Media files are stored on a separate server, on protected (RAID) storage.
Backup Data Stores
The Ascribe™ SQL Server writes transaction log backups every 30 minutes. Full or differential backups of the active SQL Server data stores and file systems are written to secondary storage daily.
Media Files Backup
Media files are backed up daily.
Additional Backup ProvisionsIn addition to the provided levels of security against data loss, other options are available.
Repository
The Repository is a separately licensed feature. From the time the Repository is licensed to you, the Repository will save current studies in your Ascribe™ database on a nightly basis to a separate server. Each study is saved in the standard XML file format used for saving and restoring studies to Ascribe™.
Each night a backup copy is made of each study, if that study has been modified during the past 24 hours. Backup copies of the study are deleted after 30 days, except for the most recent backup. The most recent backup is retained indefinitely.
5
PrintDoc01 020813
Study Shipping
Study shipping is a standard feature of Ascribe™, available to any account. When the study shipping feature is used, Ascribe™ automatically saves each study in the Archived state to a file, and sends the file via FTP to a location designated by the client. Upon successful transfer, the study is deleted from Ascribe™. This feature allows convenient long-term storage of past work.
Security from Loss of ServiceAscribe™ provides multiple levels of security against loss of service.
Clustered Database Server
The Ascribe™ database server uses Microsoft SQL Server, running in a cluster in active-passive configuration. In the event of failure of the active database server, it will fail over automatically to a passive server. The passive server is configured identically to the active server.
Redundant Web Servers
Ascribe™ uses multiple, identically configured web servers. In the case of failure, another server will transparently be used. The web servers store no user information, so no data loss can occur from failure of a web server.
Multiple Internet Backbone Connections
Inetu uses multiple network carriers to prevent loss of service resulting from a network failure at a given carrier.
Security from Server IntrusionAscribe™ provides multiple levels of security from server intrusion.
Firewall
The Language Logic servers at Inetu are protected by dedicated Cisco firewalls.
Security from Website IntrusionThe Ascribe™ application has been carefully constructed to prevent intrusion to the website. Access to the website is possible only through the logon page, where the user must provide credentials consisting of account, username, and password. The Ascribe™ website is fully logged, and checked routinely for suspicious activity.
The most likely scenario for website intrusion is by access via stolen credentials. As the administrator for your Ascribe™ site, you must be certain to educate your staff on the importance of keeping this information safe. You should also make certain to disable unused accounts.
Ascribe™ prompts each user monthly for a new password, although Ascribe™ does not enforce complexity or historical uniqueness of the password. You should educate your staff on the importance of proper password selection and updates.
It is Language Logic policy not to provide passwords to anyone. If a password is forgotten, you as the administrator can reset the user's password.
6
Codebooks
Security in Data TransitAscribe™ provides security for your data across the web.
HTTPS Protocol
The Ascribe™ web sites are equipped with a dedicated SSL (Secure Socket Layer) accelerator. This allows your users to use the https protocol with negligible effect on server-side performance.
To use https, your users need only place "https//:" at the front of the URL used to access Ascribe™ from their browser. If you wish, Language Logic can modify your account so that all users are required to log in using https. Contact Language Logic Support if you would like this option enabled for your account.
Security of Your Data
Within the limits of their privilege level, your users can download information from the Ascribe™ web site. Once this information has left the Ascribe™ servers, Language Logic can of course do nothing to prevent unintended use. Again, you should instruct your staff about security of this information.
Ascribe™ provides a way to download a zipped XML document containing all information in a study (the study save operation). Language Logic can provide an encryption password for such files. This password does not need to be known by users of Ascribe™. We recommend that you use a strong encryption password, and that you keep knowledge of this password very secure.
Multi-Lingual, Unicode Compliant ApplicationSince Ascribe™ is a multi-lingual, Unicode compliant application, you can translate Ascribe™ to other languages. When you translate the site, you change the text displayed by Ascribe™ in menus, buttons, headers, explanatory text, and so on.
Tip:Translating the site does not translate verbatims!
What's NewThe What's New page for current and previous versions of Ascribe™ can be found when you click "What's New" under the General heading on the Home page of Ascribe™.
Maintenance ScheduleThe maintenance schedule is determined by the support team and is different for most accounts. Users can see their own Maintenance Schedule under the General heading on the Home page.
The standard schedule for maintenance operations on the Ascribe™ database server is displayed below. During maintenance operations, Ascribe™ can run slowly. You can use the information in this report to help you plan your work schedule so that you avoid the maintenance periods to the extent possible.
The report has this form:
7
PrintDoc01 020813
Last Run Run Time(Seconds) Next Run
Daily Sun 10/5/2008 1:00:05 AM 1,085 0:18 Mon 10/6/2008 1:00:00 AMWeekly Sun 10/5/2008 4:09:54 PM 3,720 1:02 Sun 10/12/2008 1:00:00
AMMonthly Sun 10/5/2008 2:20:35 PM 1 0:00 Sat 11/1/2008 2:00:00 AMThe maintenance operations run daily, weekly, and monthly. For each operation, this information is displayed:
Last run – This column shows the date and time the maintenance operation last started. It is adjusted to your local time zone. You can hover over the date to see the information in UTC (Greenwich Mean Time.)
Run time (seconds) – This column shows the number of seconds the maintenance operation took last time it ran, followed by the same information in hours:minutes. The amount of time the operation took last time is a good estimate of the time required next time.
Next run – This column shows date and time the next maintenance operation will start. It is adjusted to your local time zone. You can hover over the date to see the information in UTC (Greenwich Mean Time.)
Daily Maintenance OperationsDuring daily maintenance, you can still use Ascribe™, and you should see only minimal performance reduction.
The primary function of daily maintenance is to defragment or reorganize the database indexes. The Ascribe™ database uses indexes to improve speed. As the contents of the database change, these indexes can become "fragmented," meaning that they are not organized as efficiently as possible.
First, the maintenance program checks for fragmentation on each index. This check can take several minutes, but typically less than 15 minutes. The program next fixes any fragmented indexes. Defragmentation can take from no time (if there are no fragmented indexes,) to more than an hour (if a large index is fragmented.)
Ascribe™ is usable still during this operation. The check for the amount of fragmentation actually causes slower performance than the defragmentation procedure does.
Weekly Maintenance OperationsWeekly maintenance can affect Ascribe™’s performance severely. You should try to avoid using Ascribe™ during this maintenance.
During weekly maintenance, Ascribe™ performs these tasks: deferred data deletion, shrink database, rebuild indexes, and consistency checks.
Deferred Data DeletionTo improve performance, Ascribe™ defers the deletion of certain database records. An example is the deletion of questions from a study. If you were to delete a question with a large number of responses, it could take a long time for the database to process this request. This would slow you down, as well as any others using Ascribe™. Instead of deleting
8
Codebooks
the questions at the time you make the request, Ascribe™ marks the question for later deletion.
Deleting the data can take many minutes, and of course depends on just how much data was marked for deletion. The performance of Ascribe™ is very poor during this operation.
Shrink DatabaseAs data are deleted from the database, the size of the data files can become very large, which can adversely affect performance. During this maintenance task, the database files are reorganized to make them smaller.
Ascribe™ is usable during this maintenance operation.
Rebuild IndexesThe daily defragmentation of indexes helps keep performance at optimum levels, but a full index rebuild is required periodically. This operation does a better job than defragmentation, at the cost of rendering Ascribe™ unusable while it runs.
Ascribe™ is not usable during this maintenance operation. You do not risk data by trying to use Ascribe™ while the operation is in progress, but many operations will fail, and most will be intolerably slow.
Consistency ChecksA complete check of the database is performed to ensure the health of the database.
Ascribe™ is usable during this operation, with degraded performance.
Monthly Maintenance OperationsThe monthly maintenance does not affect performance of Ascribe™. Monthly maintenance performs the operation of usage calculation. Ascribe™ collects the transactions used for each account, and inserts this information in the statement for the account.
Legal AgreementsNavigate: General/Agreements
Ascribe™ is licensed software, subject to license agreements. These agreements are available on the website. When you log on for the first time you are asked to review and accept the agreements.
Both the End User Agreement and Ascribe™ Services Agreement can be viewed on the Ascribe™ website under the Agreements link.
The date you accepted these agreements displays on the page.
Get StartedThis chapter provides information about tasks and navigation to help you get started to successfully use Ascribe™.
Configure Your Internet BrowserBefore using Ascribe™, it is very important for you to configure your browser properly. If you do not do this, some features of Ascribe™ will not work.
9
PrintDoc01 020813
This configuration allows your browser to perform certain operations on your computer (as opposed to on the Ascribe™ web server). This allows Ascribe™ to work faster, and enables Ascribe™ to do things (like drag-and-drop operations) that would be impossible without your computer being involved.
By default, your browser will not allow such operations. This is to prevent a malicious website from doing things on your computer that you do not want. Part of the configuration is to set up the Ascribe™ website as a trusted site, meaning you trust that the Ascribe™ website to do its job without harm to your computer.
Version of Microsoft Internet ExplorerYou must be using Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later. Other browsers are not supported.
We strongly recommend that you use Internet Explorer version 7.0 or later because Microsoft is no longer supporting IE 6.0.
You can get a free update for your Internet Explorer program from the Microsoft website.
AscribeClient.com ComponentAscribe™ also uses a Language Logic component to communicate between Ascribe™ Web and Ascribe™ Desktop. This component is required for certain Ascribe™ Web menu options which redirect the user to the Desktop version. Ascribe™ Web will function perfectly well without it for all normal coding functionality. However, in order for Ascribe™ Web and Ascribe™ Desktop to communicate, this component must be installed. You can get this update from our website under General/Downloads.
Use Secure CommunicationWe recommend that you use the secure https protocol when connecting to the Ascribe™ website. You do this by using https: in the URL you enter in your browser to connect to Ascribe™. This URL has the secure protocol:
https://ascribe.languagelogic.net/Ascribe
This URL does not have the secure protocol:
http://ascribe.languagelogic.net/Ascribe
Your account may be configured to switch automatically to the secure protocol when you log on. If it is not configured this way, we still recommend that you use the secure protocol. You can tell if you are using the secure protocol by checking for a padlock icon on the status bar of your browser.
Configure Ascribe™ as a Trusted SiteLog onto Ascribe™. Check the status bar at the bottom of you browser. If you see a green check mark with the words Trusted sites next to it, Ascribe™ is already a trusted site, and you can move to the section Security Setting for Trusted Sites.
If you do not see the check box, follow these steps:
1. From the Tools menu of Internet Explorer, select Internet Options...2. Select the Security tab.
10
Codebooks
3. Highlight the Trusted Sites icon by clicking it.4. Click the Sites... button.5. Uncheck the Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone
check box.6. In the Add this Website to the zone box, type: *.languagelogic.net (the first
two characters are an asterisk and a period).7. Click the Add button.8. Check the Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone
check box.9. Click the OK button.10. From the Internet Explorer toolbar, select Tools and then Internet Options.11. Select Pop-Up Blocker and then Pop-Up Blocker Settings.12. Add *.languagelogic.net in the Address of Website to Allow box and Click Add.13. Click Close to close out of Pop-Up Blocker Settings.
Security Setting for Trusted SitesTo configure your security settings for trusted sites so that Ascribe™ will work properly, follow these steps:
1. If the Internet Options dialog box is not displayed, select Internet Options from the Tools menu of Internet Explorer.
2. Click the Security tab.3. On the Security tab, click the Custom level... button.4. Locate the heading Active X controls and plug-ins.5. Under this heading, there are several sub-headings. Set the Enable option for
each of them. Make sure that you have set Enable for all of the Active X controls and plug-ins. If you miss one, you may still have problems using Ascribe™.
6. Click OK in the Security Settings dialog box.7. Click OK In the Internet Options dialog box.
Additional Configuration for IE 7If you are using Internet Explorer 7, it is recommended that you disable the use of "Tabbed Browsing." Use of tabs in Internet Explorer may confuse Ascribe™ because cookies are being managed in two tabs.
1. If the Internet Options dialog box is not displayed, select Internet Options from the Tools menu of Internet Explorer.
2. Click the General tab.3. In the Tabs section, click the Settings button.4. Make sure the Enable Tabbed Browsing check box is unchecked. If there is a
check mark there, remove it.5. Click OK.
Set Your Language PreferenceThe Ascribe™ website can be translated into multiple languages. To translate the Ascribe™ website, see Translate the Ascribe™ Interface. If your Ascribe™ site has been translated to a given language, you can choose to view Ascribe™ in that language.
11
PrintDoc01 020813
To view Ascribe™ in a translated language, perform the following steps:
1. Click Tools and then click Internet Options in your browser menu.2. On the General tab, click the Languages... button.
a. If the language you desire is not in the list displayed, click the Add button and add the desired language.
b. Highlight the language in the list, and click the Move Up button until it is at the top of the list.
c. Click OK to close all of the dialog boxes.
2. Log off of Ascribe™ and log back on for the language change to take effect.You can verify the current language setting on the Ascribe™ Home page. It is indicated by the blue abbreviation under the Ascribe™ logo. (For example, en-us represents United States English.)
Low Resolution MonitorsIf your computer monitor is small or low resolution, it can be hard to see everything easily in this window. Here are some things you can do to help:
Show full screen - You can tell Internet Explorer to use the full screen. From the View menu, select Full Screen.
Check your display settings - You may be able to use a higher resolution setting for your monitor. From the Windows desktop, select Properties/Settings. Experiment with the Screen Resolution setting to see if you can use a higher resolution setting.
Change your text size - Internet Explorer lets you adjust the text size in the window. From the View menu, select Text Size. Try a smaller size to see more in the window.
IE 8 Accelerator IconIE 8 introduced the use of an accelerator icon - a blue arrow that appears as you navigate around the screen. If you do not want to see this arrow, you can disable it by following these steps.
1. Open Internet Explorer.2. Select Tools/Internet Options/Advanced.3. Uncheck the Display Accelerator button on selection under the Browsing
section.4. Click Apply and then OK.
Configure Word for Spell-Check in Ascribe™
12
Codebooks
Take advantage of the spelling-related functionality that Microsoft Word offers. Below are instructions for Word Version 10.2 and Word Version 9.0 (Microsoft Word 2000). If your version is not listed, use the appropriate process in Word to:
Check spelling as you type. Add words to the custom dictionary. Add abbreviations or shortcuts to be autocorrected.
TipWhen you transcribe in Ascribe™, make sure you have the Check Spelling box checked at the top of the screen.
Word Version 10.2Perform the following steps:
1. First make sure that you have Word set up to check spelling as you type:a. Launch Word.
b. Click the Tools menu.
c. Click Options.
d. Click the Spelling & Grammar tab.
e. Make sure the first option is selected (Check spelling as you type).
f. Click OK.
2. Add any desired words to your custom dictionary:a. Click the Tools menu.
b. Click Options.
c. Click the Spelling & Grammar tab.
d. Click the Custom Dictionaries button.
e. Click the dictionary in the left pane that you would like to add to (in most cases there will be just one).
f. Click the Modify button on the right.
g. Type the word you would like to add in the text box.
h. Click the Add button.
i. Click OK until you have exited out of all of the popup boxes.
2. Add any abbreviations or shortcuts you would like to auto-correct as you type:a. Click the Tools menu.
b. Click AutoCorrect Options…
c. Click the AutoCorrect tab.
13
PrintDoc01 020813
d. Type the abbreviation or shortcut you would like to use in the Replace text box.
e. Type what the abbreviation means or the long version of your shortcut in the With text box.
f. Click the Add button.
g. Click OK until you have exited out of all of the popup boxes.
Word Version 9.0 (Word 2000)Perform the following steps:
1. To add any abbreviations or shortcuts you would like to auto-correct as you type:a. Click the Tools menu.
b. Click AutoCorrect Options…
c. Click the AutoCorrect tab.
d. Type the abbreviation or shortcut you would like to use in the Replace text box.
e. Type what the abbreviation means or the long version of your shortcut in the With text box.
f. Click the Add button.
g. Click OK until you have exited out of all of the popup boxes.
2. To add any desired word(s) to your custom dictionary (so that Word and Ascribe™ will not view the word as a misspelling):
a. Click the Tools menu.
b. Click Options.
c. Click the Spelling & Grammar tab.
d. Click the Dictionaries button in the middle of the pane.
e. Click the Edit button from the next popup box. A new Word document will open.
f. Type the word or words you would like to add and then save and close the document.
g. You will have to reset the Check Spelling as You Type function. It is de-selected every time you update your custom dictionary.
h. Click the Tools menu.
i. Click Options.
j. Click the Spelling & Grammar tab.
k. Select the Check spelling as you type option.
14
Codebooks
l. Click OK until you have exited out of all of the popup boxes.
FTP SetupYour FTP site should be configured according to your own best practices. See Auto FTP Setup for suggestions intended to help prevent malicious use of your FTP site.
Log InTo sign on to Ascribe™, enter the URL below in your browser address box:
https://ascribe.languagelogic.net/ascribe
NoteRemember to use the s (https) in the address prefix so your traffic will be encrypted. Ascribe™ uses 128 bit, public key encryption from a subsidiary of Verisign called Thawte.The log-in screen displays. The account name is provided by Language Logic Support. Your systems administrator will assign you a user name (usually firstname.lastname).
The first time you sign on, your password will be password. The system will ask you to select a new password. If you forget your password or user name, your administrator can reset your password to password.
Passwords must be at least 8 characters and are case sensitive (upper/lower case matters).
After you change and confirm your new password, you will be signed off and will have to sign on again. You will be required to change your password every month. When your password expires, you will be asked to enter a new one, confirm it, and sign back on.
Home Page and Main MenuFrom the Ascribe™ Home page, you can navigate directly to the various sections of the site by clicking a link in the navigation bar at the left of the window.
The features available to you depend on the privilege level of your login account. Your administrator sets the privilege level for each user.
See Navigation for more information about how to move to various locations in Ascribe™.
Navigation (Popup Menus)
15
PrintDoc01 020813
There are two navigation popup features: popup menus and popup menus in tables.
To display a popup menu, click the right mouse button. When the popup menu appears, highlight the option you want and left-click the option. An arrow to the right of the option indicates you have additional choices on another popup menu.
The contents of the navigation menu depend on your privilege level. Your administrator can change the privilege level for any account.
You should not use the Back button on your browser to navigate around the Ascribe™ site. Because the content of the site is dynamic (it can change each time it is displayed), the Back button can show you incorrect results by displaying a page image saved by your browser.
In many cases, you can select a row in a table (by clicking it) and then perform an action on the row. To perform the action, right-click the row. Select the desired action from the popup menu displayed.
Application HelpThe help system is a feature that allows the user to obtain information about usage of the Ascribe™ software and updates. Ascribe™ Help provides the user with definitions about the different functions in Ascribe™.
The help system is context sensitive. Users can right-click and choose Help to get information about the current page/function. The help system also can be accessed from various pop-up boxes throughout the software. When Help is selected, a new browser window opens with information about the current area of Ascribe™.
NoteApplication Help opens a new browser window. It can be minimized or closed without interrupting your Ascribe™ session.To print a single page of the documentation, click the Print button in the Help screen toolbar. To more than a page, use the Help System PDF.
Customization Features
Set User OptionsOn the Ascribe™ Home page, select User Options on the General menu. This option allows users to set default behaviors for selected aspects of Ascribe™ operation.
Option ValueAscribe™ one-click page
This option determines where Ascribe™ will be redirected when a user clicks the Ascribe™ logo in the upper right hand corner of most windows. Depending on user privilege and account licenses, some or all of the following will be available in the pull down list in this section.
Home Page - Returns user to the Ascribe™ Home page Studies - Returns user to the Supervisor Studies page Last Study Questions - Returns user to the last Study Questions
page visited Coding Studies - Returns user to the Coding Studies selection
16
Codebooks
page Last Coding Questions - Returns user to the last Coding
Questions page visited Transcribe Studies - Returns user to the Transcribing Studies
selection page Last Transcribe Questions - Returns user to the last
Transcribing Questions page visited Translate Studies - Returns user to the Translating Studies
selection page Last Translate Questions - Returns user to the last Translating
Questions page visited Client Studies - - Returns user to the Client Studies page visited
Note: Users are always directed to the Home page after initial login. The selection of the re-direct options here are in effect only after the initial Home page is displayed.
Disable spell check for codebook editing
If checked, this option will disable the use of the spell checker in the codebook editor. Normally this will be selected if 1) MS Word does not exist on the user machine or 2) spell check is not desired in order to improve performance while in the codebook creation stage.
Keep filters between sessions
This option, if checked, will keep response filters between sessions of Ascribe™.
Double-click to show drop-downs
If this option is checked, most of the drop-downs displayed (such as on the Studies page) will open with a double-click instead of a single-click. It does not affect the drop-downs on the ACM Training Example Editor page.
Choose ColumnsThe Choose Columns option allows you to select which columns display. You can display as much or as little information as necessary. For instance, a coder might not want to see the date a study was created, but may be interested in seeing the start date and due date.
To choose a column to display, click the box next to the column name. The boxes without check marks will not display. Click the OK box to save your changes and exit or click Cancel to exit without saving changes.
After you change the column settings, the settings stick until you change the settings again.
Some columns are not optional. For example, the study ID on the Studies page and the question ID on the Questions page must always display. Therefore, you will not see check boxes for those fields when customizing the Studies page or Questions page.
Some boxes control the display of a group of columns. For example, the ACM check box on the Choose Columns dialog box for the Questions page hides or displays the Code Using, Approved, and Coding Job columns.
Use the following links to view which columns are available on each page:
Studies Page Questions Page Studies in Progress Page
17
PrintDoc01 020813
Questions in Progress Page Copy/Share Manager Account Codebooks Page Automated Coding Models Page Accelerator Coding Model Page Training Results Training Example Editor Inspections Page Shipped Studies Page Production Bands Report Associates
Change Column WidthsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study
Client/Studies/Right-click a studySupervisor/Studies/Questions/Right-click a question
You can change the column widths for the columns on this page. Right-click a study, and select Change Column Widths. A dialog box displays with the defaults for each column.
The widths are shown in pixels. Increase the number to make the column wider, and decrease the number to make the column more narrow.
After you change the widths, click OK to save your changes. Click cancel if you do not wish to make any changes.
Resize WindowsYou may drag the window bars to whatever height and width you want in any of the active windows; however, this resizing does not stick. When you leave the page and return, the default setting is in effect.
Language SupportThe Language Logic system interrogates Internet Explorer and displays the site in your preferred language. You may see your preferred language by accessing Tools/Internet Options/Languages on Internet Explorer’s Tools menu or by navigating to the Home page and paying attention to the blue text under the Ascribe™ icon in the top right-hand corner of the page.
Open SessionsThe Open sessions report tells you who is logged on to Ascribe™. This page is visible only to associates. Users who log on as a contact cannot view this page.
DownloadsNavigate: General/Downloads
The Downloads page contains links to files you may need to use Ascribe™. These files include components to install or documents. To download a file, click on the link.
Log OffTo log off Ascribe™ Web, use the Logoff option in the right-click menu in whatever window you are in. You should always log off from Ascribe™. If you do not log off, you may leave
18
Codebooks
responses 'locked' so that others cannot code them. For example, if you simply close your browser in the Coder Window, the response you were coding will remained locked, awaiting your codes. This action prevents others from coding this response. (To unlock a response, see Locked Responses.)
When you log off, Ascribe™ computes the amount of time you were logged on. When computing your logon time, Ascribe™ checks whether you had more than one open browser session. If you did, it calculates your logon time for the non-overlapping periods only.
You can close Ascribe™ Desktop by any of these options:
Select the Exit option from the Main Menu/File option Select the Log Off option from the Main Menu/File option Click the red "X" in the upper right corner of the Application Main window.
StudyStudies Page
Navigate: Supervisor/StudiesClient/Studies
This page shows a filtered list of all studies. Filtering is based on the settings in the filter bar at the top of the page. To change the filter, check the desired boxes in the filter bar, and click the Update button. (When you want to refresh the Studies page, use the Update button rather than the Internet Explorer refresh button. If you use the IE refresh button, you may receive an error message from IE.)
When you right-click a study, you have options to navigate to other parts of Ascribe™ or edit the study. See Studies Page Right-Click Menu for more information.
Filter OptionsThe text filter in the bar allows you to filter studies by study ID or study name. To show only studies whose ID or name starts with certain characters, enter those characters in the Filter box and click the Update button. For example, if you enter " abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or Name start with abc will be shown in the list.
To find studies whose ID or name contains certain characters, put an asterisk as the first character of the filter. For example, if you enter "* abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or name contains abc will be shown in the study list.
The Supervised by Me check box means "only display studies that are assigned to me as the supervisor." The Assigned to Me check box means "only display studies that are assigned to me as a coder (or a transcriber/translator.)" See Assign a Coder to a Study for more information.
Columns on the Studies PageThe Studies page contains these columns (you can choose the columns displayed by selecting Choose Columns from the right-click menu):
Field DescriptionCreated The date the study was created on the web server. You can not
modify this value.
19
PrintDoc01 020813
Start Date The date work is scheduled to start on the study. The start date can be set from the drop-down box on this field or from the Date Tab in the Study Edit dialog. The drop-down box contains a text box and a calendar. You can enter a date in MM/DD/YYYY format or select a date from the calendar. Press OK to save the date or press Close or Clear to exit without saving.
Due Date The date this study is expected to be completed. The due date can be set from the drop-down box on this field or from the Date Tab in the Study Edit dialog. The drop-down box contains a text box and a calendar. You can enter a date in MM/DD/YYYY format or select a date from the calendar. Press OK to save the date or press Close or Clear to exit without saving.
Study ID The unique identifier for the study. If you left-click this field, a drop-down box displays study information. You can navigate to the Question page if you click the Questions button on drop-down box toolbar.
Study Name The name of the study.Quota The quota for the study. The field is just for information and is not
used in any calculations or statistics. Edit this field on the General Tab of the Edit Studies dialog box.
Questions The number of questions in the study. The drop-down box for this field displays information about the questions.
Responses The total number of responses in the study.Responses Coded
The number of responses coded in the study.
Description A description of the study.Help On This Study
Help for this study, intended to assist coders with information about the study.
Status The study status. If you left-click this field, a drop-down box displays a list of status options. To change the status, left-click a status option. The drop-down box automatically closes when you click a status option. If you don't want to make any changes, click the Close button.
Client The company assigned as the client for this study.End Customer The company assigned as the end customer for this study.Supervisor The associate designated as the supervisor of this study. The
drop-down box displays supervisor details.Assigned To This column displays users assigned to this study. This column
has a drop-down box. Click the Edit link to display the Asssigned To dialog box where you can assign coders to the study. For more information, see Assign a Coder to a Study.
ACM Coding Questions
This column displays the number of ACM coding questions. The drop-down box displays information about the coding questions, such as question ID and codebook ID.
Layout Section
20
Codebooks
Columns Per Card/Respondent
The number of columns in each data row output.
Card Number Column
The column in which the card number starts.
Card Number Columns
The number of columns occupied by the card number.
Respondent ID Column
The column in which the respondent ID starts.
Respondent ID Columns
The number of columns occupied by the respondent ID.
NoteDrop-Down BoxesSeveral columns on this screen display drop-down boxes when left-clicked. A hand icon displays when you hover over these fields. The drop-down boxes can open with a single click or a double click. Choose the method you prefer in User Options. To close the drop-down box, click Close, left-click twice in the box, or click once anywhere on the other columns.
Studies Page Right-Click MenuNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study
Client/Studies/Right-click a studyThe right-click menu on the Studies page has the following options:
Option DescriptionQuestions Navigates to the Questions page for this study.Copy/Share Manager
Navigates to the Copy/Share Manager, where you can copy and share codebooks for the questions in this study.
Ascribe Presentations
Navigates to Ascribe Presentations, which offers tools for presenting Ascribe™ data in various graphical and tabular formats.
Reports Navigates to one of the following reports:RespondentsLoadsTransactions by User - administrator onlyCoding OverviewStudy SummaryQuestion SummaryCard LayoutStudy ReportNew CrosswordStudy Quality ReportTime by Study - administrator only, with these reports: Time by Question, Time by Activity, Time by Associate, Time by Associate,
21
PrintDoc01 020813
Question, and Activity, Time Details.Download Data Navigates to either Codebooks and Results or Scripted Output.Edit… Opens the Study Edit dialog box, where you can change the
General Tab, Data Tab, or Date Tab information.Delete… Opens a dialog box where you can confirm you want to delete the
study.Add a New Study…
Opens the Study Edit dialog box where you can enter study information on the General Tab, Data Tab, or Date Tab.
Set Quality Codes Navigates to the Set Quality Codes page.View Codes by Coder
Navigates to the Codes by Coder Report.
Load Responses / Process File
Navigates to the Load Responses / Process File page where you can load data.
File Navigates to one of the following options:Save Study pageRestore Study pageMerge Study page.
Copy Study Navigates to the Copy Study page, where you can create a copy of a study, without the need to save and restore the study.
Choose Columns Navigates to the Choose Columns dialog box, which allows you to choose the columns to be displayed on this page.
Change Column Widths
Navigates to the Change Column Widths dialog box, which allows you to choose the column widths for the columns on this page.
Assign a Coder to a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies
A question may be assigned to one or more users, signifying that these people are assigned to work on that question. These assignments serve two main purposes. First, they allow a coder to quickly determine the work to which he or she is assigned. Second, they allow you to distinguish time spent by a coder on assigned work versus unassigned work. This information is provided in the Time by Study reports.
You can assign coders to a study in three different ways. The Assigned To column on the Studies page is used for study-level assignments for users with coder privilege. When you assign a coder, you also select the question type (open, closed, other specify, etc.) The coder is assigned to all questions with that question type.
The Assigned To column on the Questions page is used to assign both users with coder privilege and users with only transcriber privilege. You can also assign coders and transcribers on the Coding Tab of the Questions Properties dialog box. With these two methods, you assign users to individual questions.
Users can quickly see the studies they are assigned to by selecting the Assigned to me check boxes at the top of the Studies page, the Studies in Progress page, or the Questions in Progress page.
22
Codebooks
NoteWhen a study is saved or archived from your site, the Assigned To information is not retained. When a study is restored, the original Assigned To information is not available and will not display.
Assigned To Dialog Box from the Studies PageFirst, make sure the Assigned To column is displayed on the Studies page. If it is not displayed, right-click a study and select Choose Columns. Click the Assigned To check box in the Choose Columns dialog. Next, click the Assigned To column for the desired study, and select the Edit link in the drop-down box. A dialog box displays.
The Assigned To dialog box has this format:
Section Description
Coder List
This list includes only users who have coder privilege. To select one coder, left-click the name. Use control-click or shift-click to select multiple users. The highlight indicates that you have selected the user or users. (If you need to assign users who have only transcriber privilege, use the Assigned To column on the Questions page.)
Assigned To
This box is initially empty. Use the ">" button to move the selected user or users from the Coder List to the Assigned To box. (The user or users that are highlighted are the ones that will move.) To remove a user or users from the Assigned To box, select the user or users by a left-click, control-click, or shift-click. Use the "<" to move a user or users from the Assigned To box to the Coder List. (The user or users that are highlighted are the ones that will move.) After you save the assignment and exit the dialog box, the Assigned To column on the Studies page displays the users who are assigned to this study. If you return to the Assigned To dialog box, the Assigned To box will display the coders assigned to the study.
Question Type
To select a question type, click the box next to it. You can select multiple question types. All of the users in the Assigned To box will assigned to whatever question types you select.
Change Questions Already Assigned
Select this box if you need to make a change to an assignment to a question type that has already been assigned and saved. (You do not select this box the first time you are making an assignment to a question type or types.) See How to Make Changes for more information.
OK / CancelClick the OK button after you assign a user or users to a question type. This action saves the assignment and closes the dialog box. Click the Cancel button if you do not want to save the assignment.
More Notes on Assigning Users by Question TypesIf you need to assign a user or users to one question type and a different user or users to another question type, you must perform these actions separately.
23
PrintDoc01 020813
For example, User A should be assigned to the open questions, and User B should be assigned to the other specify questions. Here are the steps:
Assign User A to the open questions and then click the OK button to save and exit the dialog box.
Open the Assigned To dialog box again (click the Assigned To column and select Edit from the drop-down box.) User A will display in the Assigned To box.
Move User A back to the Coder List. Move User B to the Assigned To box. Click the box next to Other Specify and click the
OK button to save and exit the dialog box. (You do not have to click the box next to Change questions already assigned in this situation. Only the open questions had been assigned, and we did not want to change the coder assigned to those questions.)
The Assigned To column on the Studies page will display both User A and User B.If you need to assign coders to individual questions, rather than by question type, use the Assigned To column on the Questions page or the Coding Tab of the Question Properties dialog.
How to Make ChangesOnce you have assigned users to question types and clicked the OK button to save the assignment, you can make changes. Return to the Assigned To dialog box. The Assigned To box displays all coders assigned to the study. You have the option to add coders to and/or delete coders from question types.
To add a coder, select the user from the Coder List and move that name to the Assigned To box. If there are any users who should not be assigned to the question type or types, move those names from the Assigned To box to the Coder List. Click the boxes next to the desired question types, and click the box next to Change questions already assigned. Only the names in the Assigned To box will be assigned to the question type or types. Click the OK button to save and exit the dialog.
If you need to make more complex changes, you may want to use the Assigned To column on the Questions page or the Coding Tab of the Question Properties dialog.
Create a StudyYou have several options to create studies in Ascribe™. You can create a completely new study with the Add Study function. You can create a study from an another study with the Restore Study function. Or, you can import files such as . qdi, . xml, . hrd, . vbs, or other input files as determined by an input script. These files contain information, usually from a questionnaire script, that defines a study’s questions, question text, output locations, etc.
Add a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click in white space/Select Add a New Study
You must have supervisor or above access to create a study. From the Studies page, select Add a New Study. The Study Edit Screen displays. Enter information on the General Tab, the Data Tab, and the Date Tab.
General Tab (Study)Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Edit
24
Codebooks
The General Tab contains general information about the study. First, enter the study ID and the study name. These fields identify the study and display in a number of lists. The other fields on the General Tab are optional and can be updated later.
If you load data via auto-FTP, make sure the study name matches the data file name (see Auto FTP Setup).
Study Status
Study status refers to the point of completion of the study. Each coding department uses study status according to their internal processes. Some use all, and some use only Coding in Progress and Archived.
Status DescriptionUnder Construction
The study is not ready to code. Use this status while you prepare a study. For example, use this status if the data or the codebooks are not ready. The study will not appear on the Studies in Progress page or Studies to Transcribe page. (Coders and transcribers will not be able to access the study). Studies restored as "New" have a default status of "Under Construction."
In Progress The study is ready to code or the coding has started. The study can be accessed from the Studies in Progress page or the Studies to Transcribe page (or any page).
On Hold The study cannot be accessed from the Studies in Progress page, the Studies to Transcribe page or the Studies to Translate page. There may be a problem or a change to the study, and all work should be stopped until the problems are resolved.
Review in Progress
Use this status while the user does a quality check of the study. For example, use when the codes are checked for accuracy or low mentions. The study can not be accessed from the Studies in Progress page, the Studies to Transcribe page, or the Studies to Translate page Also, you can use this status when you create or deliver study output.
Complete The study is complete; data is ready to be downloaded for analysis.
25
PrintDoc01 020813
Archived The study is removed from all lists of active studies. If study shipping is enabled, all archived studies are sent to your FTP site on the Saturday after the status is changed to archived. At that time, the study is deleted from Ascribe™. You can see a list of studies that have been shipped to your FTP site under Supervisor/Shipped Studies.
Other fields on the General Tab:
Field DescriptionQuota The quota for the study.Study ID The unique identifier for the study.Study Name Name of the study.Description Text to explain or identify the study.Supervisor Select the supervisor assigned to the study.Client Select the company who requested the study.End Customer Select the company who requested the study.Help on This Study Enter information about the study. You can view this information
from the Coder Window when you right-click in the codebook pane and select Question info.
Data Tab (Output Data Formats)Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Edit/Select Data Tab
Data formats are defined at the study level and govern the way that data is written out for analysis. This information can be changed or updated at anytime during the coding process.
Note:Administrators have access to set the defaults for any new study added to Ascribe™. See Site Configuration.The Data tab controls the format of the Column Binary Output Script. If you do not use this type of output, you normally do not need to change the settings on this tab (unless you
26
Codebooks
make use of these settings in a user defined scripted output.) Here are the fields on the Data tab:
Field Description
File Format
Options are: Binary: Write a binary file in 1130 binary format ASCII: Write an ASCII (text) file. If you use column binary
output, you will almost always want ASCII format. Layout
See Layout Types for more information. Options are: Punch: Write column binary data using punch format Numeric: Write column binary data using numeric format Punch Using Column Offset: Compute the column for the punch
by adding the code column to the question column Use Question Settings: Use the layout setting specified in each
question. This setting allows you to mix data formats among different questions.
Columns Per Card/Respondent
The value specifies the number of columns (in characters) in each data record written to the output file. In column binary format, these records are called cards.
Card Number Column
The value specifies the location of the card number on the card. The value 1 means the first column on the card.
Card Number Columns
The value specifies the number of columns used to write the card number on the card. The card number is left filled with 0's when written.
Respondent ID Column
The value specifies the location of the respondent ID on the card. The value 1 means the first column on the card.
Respondent ID Columns
The value specifies the number of columns used to write the respondent ID on the card. The respondent ID is left filled with 0's when written.
Date TabNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Edit/Select Date Tab
The Date tab allows you to change the start date and the due date properties of the study. Here are the fields on the Date tab:
Field DescriptionStart Date There are two ways to set dates. You can enter a date in
MM/DD/YYYY format or use the calendar. (You can also set the Start Date from the Studies page.)To set the start date, click the Start Date check box. You can enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format in the text box. Or, you can click the text box to display the calendar, and click the appropriate day on the calendar. After you select a day, the text box displays the date.To change the start date, click the text box and enter a new date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Or, you can click the text box, and click a date on the calendar.To display another the month on the calendar, click the
27
PrintDoc01 020813
backward or forward arrows next to the calendar header. Or click the calendar header to display a list of months. Click the header a second time to display a list of years.If the Start Date box is not checked, the start date will be blank in the Studies list. The start date can be changed at any time during the process of the study. Click OK after you set the start date and/or the due date.
Due Date There are two ways to set dates. You can enter a date in MM/DD/YYYY format or use the calendar. (You can also set the Due Date from the Studies Page.)To set a due date, click the Due Date check box. You can enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format in the text box. Or, you can click the text box to display the calendar, and click the appropriate day on the calendar. After you select a day, the text box displays the date.To change the due date, click the text box and enter a new date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Or, you can click the text box, and click a date on the calendar.To display another the month on the calendar, click the backward or forward arrows next to the calendar header. Or click the calendar header to display a list of months. Click the header a second time to display a list of years.If the Due Date box is not checked, the due date will be blank in the Studies list. The due date can be changed at any time during the process of the study. Click OK after you set the start date and/or the due date.
Copy StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Copy Study
You can make a copy of a study in a single operation, without the need to save and restore the study.
On the Studies page, right-click the study you want to copy, and select Copy study... from the menu. Enter a value for the ID of the new study and click the OK button. If you check the
28
Codebooks
Share codebooks with original study box, the codebooks in the new study will be shared with the original study. Otherwise copies of the codebooks in the original study will be made for the new study. The sharing relationships of codebooks within the study are maintained, regardless of the option you choose in the Share codebooks with original study box.
The copy operation applies only to the meta-data for a study. Responses are not copied.
The copy operation maintains all of the information in the original study, including the coders assigned to questions and related questions. The status of the new study will be set to Under Construction, so you must select to view studies with this status to see the newly created study.
Save a StudyThe save and restore features under Supervisor/Studies enable you to save and restore entire studies or their components to your hard drive or network.
This feature allows users to keep a "master" study or study templates in a central location and restore or merge them at anytime to have a similar study. Users generally save and restore the last version of a tracker or wave study to reduce the amount of study preparation time.
When you save studies in another location, it also means you do not have to keep many studies in the Ascribe™ database. You can save them to your network and then restore them when needed. You also can take advantage of the study shipping option which automatically saves studies marked as archived to your FTP site.
Save Study OptionsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Right-click/Select Save
After you select to save a study, this screen displays:
Select one of these options:
Option DescriptionQuestions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes Applied, Media Files
This option saves all information in the study, and in addition saves any media files for the study. If there are no media files associated with the study, this option is the same as the default Questions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes applied option.
The advantage of this option is that you can restore the study at a later time, along with the media responses. The disadvantage is that the
29
PrintDoc01 020813
created file can be very large. If you keep the original media files yourself, you
may want to save the study without the media files. The save and restore process will be faster, but it will not restore the media responses. You can restore those responses from your original load files, but this does require more work. Contact Language Logic Support for more information.
Questions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes Applied
This option saves all information in the study, but does not save media files. This option is the default, and is the one you normally want to use.
Questions, Codebooks This option does not save the responses or any codes applied to responses. If you restore a study that is saved with this option, no responses will be restored. This option can be used to store a 'template' of a study, and can be appropriate for trackers. This option creates a much smaller file.
The Job Submitted page displays after you select to save the study.
Job Submitted PageThe Job Submitted page displays after you select to save the study. You can remain on this page to wait for the completion of the job, or you can continue to do other work in Ascribe™. Your job continues to process if you leave this page or even if you log off from Ascribe™. To access the job later, navigate to General/Jobs.
When the job is finished, right-click the link and select Save Target As. A popup box displays. Choose where to save your file (Save in), what to name your file (File name) and what file type to use (Save as type).
30
Codebooks
Restore a StudyThe save and restore features under Supervisor/Studies enable you to save and restore entire studies or their components to your hard drive or network.
This feature allows users to keep a "master" study or study templates in a central location and restore or merge them at anytime to have a similar study. Users generally save and restore the last version of a tracker or wave study to decrease the amount of time spent to set up the studies.
To restore a study, you first must save the study. The restore operation returns the study to Ascribe™.
Restore TypesThere are several types of study restore operations.
Restore type DescriptionOriginal This option restores the study completely. The
intention of this restore type is to allow you to save a study, delete it from Ascribe™, and later restore it exactly as it was when you saved it.Because this restore type is intended to restore a deleted study to its original condition, it causes an error if the study is still present in Ascribe™. The study must be deleted from Ascribe™ before you can use this restore type.
Setup This restore type is available only when you send a saved study file to Ascribe™ via the loader FTP site. It creates a new study in Ascribe™ and loads all of the information from the saved study. The restore operation will fail
31
PrintDoc01 020813
if there is a study in Ascribe™ with the same study ID as the one being restored.
This restore type differs from the Original restore type only in the way Ascribe™ checks whether the study already exists. With the Original restore type, Ascribe™ checks an internal identifier for the study (the StudyGuid). If a study exists in Ascribe™ with the same StudyGuid as the study being "restored as Original," the restore operation fails.
With the Setup restore type, Ascribe™ checks the study ID (the StudyIDClient tag in the XML document). If a study exists in Ascribe™ with the same study ID as the study being restored as Setup, the restore operation fails.
Questions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes Applied
This restore type, and the next ones listed in this table, create a new study in Ascribe™. With these restore types, you must provide a study ID and a study name. The study ID you provide may be changed by Ascribe™ if a study already exists with this study ID.This restore type loads all of the information from the saved study, with these exceptions:
The study ID and study name are set to the values you provide;
The start date of the study is set to the current date;
The status of the study is set to under construction.
Questions, Codebooks, Responses
This restore type is identical to the Questions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes applied restore type, except that the codes applied are not loaded. All responses in the restored study have the coding removed.
Questions, Codebooks This restore type is identical to the Questions, Codebooks, Responses restore type, except that the responses are not loaded. This restore type is useful when you want to use a saved study as a template for a new study.
Questions This restore type is identical to the Questions, Codebooks restore type, except that codebooks are not restored. Each question is restored with an empty codebook.
Restore Shared CodebooksWhen you restore a study, shared codebooks may or may not remain shared. Codebooks that are shared within a study remain shared. Codebooks that were shared across studies do not remain shared with those studies. For example, Q1 of Study A shares a codebook with Q1 of Study B. If we save Study A and then restore it as Study C, we find that Q1 of Study C
32
Codebooks
no longer shares a codebook with Study B. The codebook is restored, but the shared connection is broken.
It is possible to restore shared connection of codebooks across studies using a merge instead of a restore.
How to Restore a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Click Restore Study
After you select to restore a study, this screen displays:
Enter the information below to restore a study.
Field DescriptionStudy File Enter the name of the file to restore, or click Browse... to
locate the file. You can use either the original zip file that was saved, or the XML file that you extracted from the zip file.Use of the original zip file is recommended because it is much smaller than the XML file and takes less time to transfer.
New Study ID This entry is available only if you have not selected the Restore as original option. Type the study ID for the new study.
New Study Name This entry is available only if you have not selected the Restore as original option. Type the study name for the new study.
Restore as Original This option uses the study ID and study name from the saved study. Use this option if you want to restore a deleted study with the same study ID and name as the saved study. The restore operation will fail if the original study has not been deleted.Prior to 01/29/2010, Ascribe™ did not restore the name of the coder who applied a code to a response. After that date, the coder name is restored. The load information is not restored in either case.
33
PrintDoc01 020813
Account codebook designations are not restored. Codebook IDs are restored if the codebook ID is unique to the site.
Restore as New Study
Questions, Codebooks, Responses, Codes Applied
This option restores all information in the saved study, creating a new study.
Questions, Codebooks, Responses
This option creates a new study, but does not include any codes applied from the saved study.
Questions, Codebooks
This option creates a new study, but does not restore the responses and codes applied from the saved study.
After you enter the information, click OK to submit the job. When it finishes, the Jobs page displays.
Merge StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Merge Study
When you merge a study, you take information from a saved study file and add it to an existing study. The merge does not create a new study. An item from the saved study file is added to the existing study if it does not already exist.
Reasons to merge a study:
Maintain codebooks across waves or trackers Automatically code text responses to help with the coding process Save time when you set up waves and trackers.
The table below lists the components of an Ascribe™ study and how they are affected by a merge operation.
Component Description
Study The study setup information (the information entered in the study edit dialog box) is never modified by a merge.
Codebook and Codes
If the study has no questions, the questions and the codebooks from the merged study are added. The codes and the nets are added. Ascribe™ creates a share between the studies.
If the study has the same question IDs as the merged study and has no codebooks, the codes are added without nets. Also, Ascribe™ does not create a share between the studies.
If the study has the same question IDs as the merged study and has codebooks, the codes may be added. Nets are not added. Ascribe™ does not create a share between the studies. If a code is added, it is added to the end of the codebook. A code will be added if:
o it is not a net
o its outputID is not blank
34
Codebooks
o there is no existing code (or net) with this outputID in the existing codebook.
Question The question is added if there is no question in the existing study with the question ID of the merged question.
Response The response is added if there is no existing response with the respondent ID of the merged response.
Codes Applied to a Response Codes applied to responses are never added in a merge operation.
Quality Codes Applied to a Response
Quality codes applied to a response are never added in a merge operation.
Question Relationship
Question relationships are never added in a merge operation. See Related Questions.
How to Merge a StudyNavigate: Studies/Right-click a study/Select Merge Study
When you merge a study, you have a master study and a target study. The master study has the information you want to add to the target study. Both the master study and the target study must exist on the Ascribe™ site. If the master study is not on the site, use the restore option to load it to the site. The target study can be a new study or an existing study.
Here are the steps to merge a study:
1. Save the master study to your computer.2. Right-click the target study and choose Merge Study. The Merge Study page
displays.3. Click the browse box to locate the master study you saved in step 1.4. Choose Questions, Codebooks, Responses or Questions, Codebooks.5. Click Ok. The job is submitted. When it is finished, the Jobs page displays to let
you know the status.
35
PrintDoc01 020813
Restore and Merge via the FTP SiteThe merge and restore facilities allow you to conveniently develop automated systems for moving studies and response data into Ascribe™ from the FTP site. You can perform a complete setup of Ascribe™ studies automatically, and load data incrementally into existing studies.
Data File FormatThe same file format is used for both the restore and merge operations. The name of the file is of no significance, other than that it must end with the extension .zip, and that the extension must not conflict with any load file types. The zip file must contain one file with the extension .XML. This file must be an XML file in the Ascribe™ study archive format. The name of the XML file is also of no significance, other than that it must end with .XML.
The study in Ascribe™ is identified by the value contained in the StudyIDClient tag of the XML document. If no study exists with this ID, a restore operation is performed. If there is an existing study with this ID, a merge operation is performed.
Study RestoreA restore operation creates a new Ascribe™ study. All of the information in the XML document is restored to the new study.
Study MergeMerge operations allow you to add information from a saved study file to an existing study. The merge operation adds new items found in the saved file, but does not affect any existing items in the study. Do not think of the merge operation as an "update" of the study, except that it adds new information. Existing items in the study are not changed, even if the same item exists in both files.
Identification of Items to MergeTo use merge effectively, you need to understand how Ascribe™ decides to add an item to the existing study. The decision is based on the identifier for each type of item. If there is an existing item in the study with the same identifier, that item is not merged. In this case, the existing item is not affected by the merge operation.
The identifiers used for each item type is listed below:
Item Tag IdentifierQuestion QuestionID Question IDCodebook CodeBookGuid CodeBookGuid
36
Codebooks
Response DRORespondent Respondent IDCodes in a codebook are added to the study only if the codebook was itself added. The codebook will be added if there is no codebook in Ascribe™ with the corresponding CodeBookGuid.
Study Questions PageNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions
The Questions page displays the questions for a study. The page has many options for working with the questions. You can get information about the questions, such as the question text and how much has been coded. Also, you can add and edit questions from this page.
The filter bar at the top of the page is used to filter the list of questions displayed, by question type and by text. The Filter text box matches questions whose ID or label starts with or contains the text. To display questions whose ID or label starts with certain characters, type the characters in the Filter box and click Update. To display questions whose ID or label contains certain characters, type an asterisk as the first character in the Filter box, followed by the characters you want to find. For example, "*like" displays those questions whose ID or label contains "like".
The Study ID and Study Name display above the question fields, on the left side of the screen.
Each question has several fields. Because there are so many fields, you can choose which ones display from the Choose Columns page. For information about other right-click menu options, see Add and Edit Questions for a Study.
When the number of questions is large (say more than 250), the performance of page refreshes is greatly improved by hiding the Shared Codebook and Shared Questions columns. These columns require a much more expensive query. If the user wants the functionality of being able to see the codebook in a drop-down without the expense of displaying these columns, he or she can instead display the Codebook ID column. This is fast to render, and provides the codebook drop-down just like the Shared Codebook column.
NoteSeveral columns on this screen display drop-down boxes when left-clicked. A hand icon displays when you hover over these fields. The drop-down boxes can open with a single click or a double click. Choose the method you prefer in User Options. To close the drop-down box, click Close, left-click twice in the box, or click once anywhere on the other columns. Here are the available fields for the Questions page:
Field DescriptionSort Order This field displays the sort order selected on the Coding Tab. You can
change the sort order in the drop-down box on this field or on the Coding Tab. In the drop-down box, you can click Next to increment the number. Click OK to save your change or Close to exit without saving.
37
PrintDoc01 020813
Question Type This field displays the type of question. You can change the question type at any time through the drop-down box on this column or if you edit the question.You can select the type of questions that display on the Questions page with the check boxes in the gray bar at the top of the page. After you make your selections, click the Update button to refresh the screen.
Question ID A short identifier for the question. Each question ID should be unique within a study. Click this field to display a drop-down box with study and question information.
Question Label A short name for the question. This label is used in the cross-tab report and in other places where a short form of the question name is required for display purposes.
Question Text The field displays the question text information from the General Tab.Assigned To The Assigned To field displays coders and transcribers assigned to
the question. To create or change assignments, left-click the field. A drop-down box displays with a list of users with coder and/or transcriber privilege. Click the box next to a user to select or unselect the user. Click the OK link to save the assignment and exit the drop-down box. Click the Cancel link to exit the drop-down without saving any changes.You can also make assignments on the Coding Tab of the Questions Properties dialog box.To assign coders by question types, use the Assigned To column on the Studies page.NOTE: When a study is saved or archived from your site, the Assigned To information is not retained. When a study is restored, the original Assigned To information is not available and will not display.
Question Help The field displays the question help information from the General Tab.
Coding Source This field displays the information from the Coding Tab. It refers to the portion of the response (verbatim, transcription or translation) coded by the coder.
Related Questions This field displays the number of related questions. A drop-down box displays the question information of the related question or questions.
Codebook SectionCodebook ID
The ID of the codebook used to code this question. A drop-down box displays codebook information.
Shared Codebook This ID of the codebook that shares this question. A drop-down box displays codebook information.
38
Codebooks
Shared Questions The number of questions (in any study) that also use this codebook. If this column is blank, no other questions use this codebook. Shared Questions Drop-Down BoxTo see what questions share this codebook, left-click the column and open the Shared Questions drop-down box. You can unshare the question with the unshare option at the top of the box.
Codebook ACM If a question is a coding question for an ACM, the name of the model displays in this field; otherwise, the field will be blank.
Codebook is Empty If the codebook contains no codes, a dot appears in this field. The field is blank if the codebook contains codes.
ACM SectionCode Using
The ID of the ACM training used to code this question. A drop-down box provides more information.
Approved If the ACM training specified for this question is approved, a check mark appears in this column.
Coding Job The status of the ACM coding job last run for this question. A drop-down box provides more information.
Responses SectionTotal
The number of responses currently loaded for this question.
Coded The number of responses that have at least one code applied.Codes Applied The number of codes that were applied to all responses.% Coded The percentage of responses that have at least one code applied.Transcriptions SectionTranscriptions
The number of responses that have a transcription. This column will display only if transcriptions are licensed for your account.
% Transcribed The percentage of responses that have a transcription.Translations SectionTranslations
The number of responses that have a translation. This column will display only if translations are licensed for your account.
% Translations The percentage of responses that have a translation.Quality Reviewed SectionResponses
The total number of responses in the question.
Reviewed The number of responses marked as quality reviewed.% Reviewed The percentage of responses marked as quality reviewed.Layout SectionCard
The card number of the question.
Column The starting column position for codes.Columns The number of columns occupied by each code.Max Codes The maximum number of codes to output for this question.
39
PrintDoc01 020813
Tasks Section
Code
A dot displays if this task is selected for this question. You can edit this field through the drop-down box. Left-click the field, and the drop-down box displays. Click the check box to select or unselect the task. You can also use the Tasks Tab on the Questions Properties dialog to edit this field.
Transcribe A dot displays if this task is selected for this question. You can edit this field through the drop-down box. Left-click the field, and the drop-down box displays. Click the check box to select or unselect the task. You can also use the Tasks Tab on the Questions Properties dialog to edit this field.
Translate A dot displays if this task is selected for this question. You can edit this field through the drop-down box. Left-click the field, and the drop-down box displays. Click the check box to select or unselect the task. You can also use the Tasks Tab on the Questions Properties dialog to edit this field.
Cross-Tabs A dot displays if this task is selected for this question. You can edit this field through the drop-down box. Left-click the field, and the drop-down box displays. Click the check box to select or unselect the task. You can also use the Tasks Tab on the Questions Properties dialog to edit this field.
Add and Edit Questions for a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click a question
Questions can be added automatically to a study through the load or import processes. See Load Data to a Study for more details.
When you right-click a question, you have options to add or edit a question or to navigate to other pages. Here are the options on the right-click menu:
Option DescriptionStudies This option displays the Studies page.Add A New Question
The option creates a new question for the study. You enter the question components in the dialog box to add the question ID, question label, etc.
Edit This option displays the dialog box where you can change any of the question components like question text and question help.
Delete Questions This option allows you to delete questions and question elements.Related Questions The option allows you to relate this question with other questions.Edit the Codebook This option displays the Edit the Codebook page.Codebook Editor (Preview)
This option displays the Codebook Editor.
Desktop - Codebook Editor
This option navigates to the Desktop Codebook Editor.
Copy/Share You have the following choices:
40
Codebooks
Copy/Share ManagerCopy/Share Codebook From...Copy/Share Codebook To...
Code This Question
The option displays the Coder Window page, which allows you to code one response at a time.
Review Responses This option displays the Review Responses page.Edit Responses This option displays the Edit Responses page.Auto-Apply Codes Automatically code closed-ended and other specify questions.Phrase Analyzer The option displays the Phrase Analyzer page, which has advanced
capability for coding short verbatims.Load Details
This option displays the number of responses loaded, combined, etc., for a question.
Accelerator (ACM) This option allows you to navigate to the ACM area, if a question is associated with a model. Also allows you to create a model from a question.
Inspector This option allows you to create an inspection or view any inspections created from this question.
Change Column Widths
Navigates to the Change Column Widths dialog box, which allows you to choose the column widths for the columns on this page.
Question TypesThe basic types of questions include open, closed, other specify, value, and data.
Every question type may be coded in Ascribe™. However, data questions usually are not coded and often do not appear in the question lists. Data questions are used usually for output.
41
PrintDoc01 020813
Open questions are answered with verbatim text. This text is entered in by the respondent over the Internet, described verbally to a phone operator, or written. Open-ended questions also can be verbally recorded or hand-written and scanned (image files).
Closed questions limit the responses to a fixed set of answers. A closed-end question can help you understand a respondent’s answer to an open-ended question. For example, the open-ended question may be: "You said x about y, why did you say that?", where x and y are answers to a closed-ended question. Closed-ended questions may also be used in the Study Analysis function to build cross-tabulated reports (see Cross-Tab Report.)
When you load a closed-ended question, the data can be automatically coded if the codebook for the question has been defined and the loaded data matches the code values in the codebook. Here's how it works:
Define the question ID to match the question ID in the data to be loaded. Create a codebook that matches the codes in the data to be loaded. For instance, if
you have a five-number rating scale on a purchase intent question, then your codebook should use the same numbers.
After you build the codebook, load the data, and it will be automatically coded. Ascribe™ matches the codes in the incoming data to those in the codebook.
If you load the data before you create a codebook, you can still automatically code the data. Create a codebook, then right-click the question, and select Auto-apply codes.
Other specify questions may have both open-ended and closed-ended data. The closed-ended data can be automatically coded when the data is loaded, if the codebook is set up correctly. However, the verbatims for other specify questions often contain multiple responses. When Ascribe™ finds the same question ID and respondent ID combination in a load file, the data is concatenated and separated with the vertical bar symbol (|). These responses will not be automatically coded.
Value questions have a numeric response which will be coded as a range. "How many miles do you drive your car in a week?" is an example. Ascribe™ has a special way to automatically code value questions in the correct range in Phrase Analyzer.
Question ComponentsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click a question/Select Add a New Question or
EditA question is made up of four tabs of information:
General – Allows the user to set up the general information about the question.
Tasks – Allows the user to choose tasks to be performed. These tasks govern whether a question is accessible for the function indicated. The defaults come from the account option settings under Administrator (see Site Configuration.)
Coding – Allows the user to define different aspects of the verbatim.
Data – Allows the user to determine how and where the data will be reported or downloaded.
General Tab (Question)The user can set up the general information about the question. These fields are on the General Tab:
42
Codebooks
Field Description
Question Type Select the question type from the list.
Question ID
Enter a short identifier for the question, typically the question number. This value must be unique within the study. If you enter a name that is already used by a question in this study, Ascribe™ automatically creates a unique name by adding a colon and a number to the name you entered. The question ID determines where a response is loaded in Ascribe™ by matching it to the question identifier in the data file.
Question LabelEnter a short name for the question. This label is used in cross-tab report and in other places where a short form of the question name is required for display purposes.
Question TextEnter the text of the question from the survey. The question text displays in the top pane of the Coder Window if you select Show question from the Settings option. (See Customize the Coder Window with Settings.) It also displays in the top pane of Review Responses.
Question HelpEnter information about a question here. Coders can view the question help when they select Question Info on the right-click menu in the Coder Window.
Tasks TabThe user can select the tasks to be performed on the question. These tasks govern whether a question is accessible for the function indicated. The default comes from the account option settings under Administrator (see Site Configuration.)
43
PrintDoc01 020813
Field Description
Code This Question
If checked, the question will appear in the coders' questions to code list.
TranscribeIf checked, the question will appear in the transcribers' questions to transcribe list. This check box is available only if transcriptions are licensed for your account.
TranslateIf checked, the question will appear in the translators' questions to translate list. This check box is available only if translations are licensed for your account.
Cross-Tab If checked, the question will appear in cross-tab reports. This check box is available only if cross-tab reports are licensed for your account.
Coding TabThe user can define different aspects of the verbatim. These are the fields on the Coding Tab:
Field Description
Sort Order
This field determines where the question will appear in lists of questions for this study. Question lists are sorted first by this numeric value, then by the question ID. If you leave the value at the default of zero, questions sort alpha-numerically by question ID alone. Use the Study Setup function from Language Logic Tools in Excel® to update this information easily. The Excel® Add-In can be found under Downloads on the Ascribe™ Home page.
Coding Source This field determines the part of the response that is displayed for coders to code the response. The default is to code from the verbatim. If transcriptions are licensed, you may want coders to code from the transcription. Similarly, if translations are licensed, you may want coders to code from the translation.
44
Codebooks
Phrase Analyzer uses the coding source. If there is a saved parse, the coding source cannot be changed here, and this option will be disabled.
Alternate Coding Source
This field determines a second response field to be displayed when the primary coding source is empty. It is useful when working with translated responses where not all responses are translated. For example, a survey may have responses in both English and French, and only the French get translated to English. By setting this field to the verbatim, the various coding windows will display either the translation if there is one or the verbatim if the translation is empty. For more information, see the Alternate Coding Source section.
Allow Duplicate Codes(not shown in screen shot below)
This check box is available only if duplicate code assignment is licensed for your account. If this box is checked, the same code may be applied more than one time to a response for this question.
Coder and Transcriber List
This list includes only users who have coder and/or transcriber privilege. To select one user, left-click the name. Use control-click or shift-click to select multiple users. The highlight indicates that you have selected the user or users.
Assigned To
This box is initially empty. Use the ">" button to move the selected user or users from the Coder and Transcriber List to the Assigned To box. (The user or users that are highlighted are the ones that will move.) To remove a user or users from the Assigned To box, select the user or users by a left-click, control-click, or shift-click. Use the "<" to move a user or users from the Assigned To box to the Coder List. (The user or users that are highlighted are the ones that will move.) After you save the assignment and exit the dialog box, the Assigned To column on the Studies page and the Questions page displays the users who are assigned to this study. You can make changes to assignments on this tab, through the Assigned To column drop-down box on the Questions page, or the Assigned To column drop-down box on the Studies page. NOTE: When a study is saved or archived from your site, the Assigned To information is not retained. When a study is restored, the original Assigned To information is not available and will not display.
45
PrintDoc01 020813
Sort OrderThe sort order specifies where the question will appear in lists of questions for this study. Question lists are sorted first by this numeric value, then by the question ID. If you leave the value at the default of zero, questions will sort by question ID alone.
The sort order also can be changed by using the Excel® Add-In. After downloading the page to Excel®, you can make changes to the sort order and then load the file back into Ascribe™. When you load the file back into Ascribe™, the changes in sort order will be applied.
Alternate Coding SourceNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click a question/Choose Edit
The Alternate Coding Source function allows users to see the translation or transcription of a verbatim as the coding source if a translation or transcription exists. If the field set as the
46
Codebooks
coding source is blank (meaning there is no translation or there is no transcription), then the alternate coding source will be displayed. Usually, the alternate coding source is the verbatim (which refers to the original file that was loaded into Ascribe™).
This tool is helpful in Review Responses when coding multi-language studies where respondents can answer in multiple languages, but a language question does not exist to separate the languages. For example, a French/Canadian study may have some French responses to be translated and some English responses not requiring translation. The alternate coding source allows the user to display the coding source and notes in Review Responses. This is especially helpful for those companies that track their other mentions using notes.
Another reason to use the alternate coding source would be to code mixed media studies. A mixed media study is one that has some verbatims that need to be transcribed (either scanned images or voice recordings) and other verbatims that are "normal" text. The alternate coding source allows the user to view the transcription if a transcription exists and view the verbatim when there is no transcription. This way, the user still can track other mentions using the notes field without changing the View Options in Review Responses. Also, the screen is less cluttered.
Set the coding source to either Translation or Transcription depending on your situation.
While in Review Responses, you will see either the translation (if one exists) or the verbatim (if no translation exists). Be sure to set your View Options to display the Coding Source with Notes as the alternate coding view. The response displayed will have the text [Verbatim] after it if it has not been translated. See respondent 13170 below.
47
PrintDoc01 020813
Notice that respondent 13588 has the response hippo. This is the translation. You can right-click the response and choose Edit Response to see the native language verbatim. (While you are in the Edit Response screen, you also can add a note if necessary.)
Another option is to right-click the verbatim and choose Other Responses to view the native language verbatim.
Data TabThe user can determine how and where the data will be reported or downloaded on the client side. This information can be set up after coding has taken place. The question set-up function included with the Language Logic Tools Add-In for Excel® allows the user to set-up all the data components of a study easily. See Use the Excel® Add-In for Question Setup in
48
Codebooks
Ascribe™ for more information. Users with Client access can edit the Data tab from the Client/Studies/Reports/Card Layout Report page.
Field Description
Layout
The layout setting affects the placement of the data when downloaded from Ascribe™. It allows the user to determine how the data will be written for each individual question. The layout setting is only active if you choose ‘Use Question Settings’ on the Data Tab of the Study Edit screen.
Punch – Obtains the column location from the output code value rather than from the "column" field on the question edit page.
Punch using column offset – Obtains the column location by offsetting the output code value by the value in the "column" field on the question edit page.Computes the column for the punch as the sum (column value specified in the code) + (Column value of the question)
Numeric – Creates a flat data file, where the output code value is truly written to the column identified on the question edit screen.
Output Data Map
The following three settings are used for column binary output. Card - The card numbers where the coded data for this question
will be written. There are no limits on the number of cards. Column - The starting column where coded data for this
question will be written. It is important to note that this is only for data that will be written in a card column format as numeric codes. The starting column is not relevant for multi-punched data unless you are using the Punch using column offset option.
Columns - The number of characters that each code will consume in the data file. So, if you’re using 3 digit numeric values for your codes, then use 3 here. It is important to note that you will need to reserve enough space to accommodate the largest number of codes that you think you will apply to any given response. The Card Layout Report helps the user determine the amount of space needed for a question.
49
PrintDoc01 020813
Input Data Map
The following four values are used when loading data from a Mapped Ascii Multiple response file. These are files that contain one row per respondent with the responses to each question contained at specified positions in the row.
Start - The starting locations for data for this question in the Mapped ASCII-Multi load file type.
Length - The lengths of the data in a load file for this question. Together with the start value above, this field defines the position and size of the response field for this question.
Width - For questions with multiple response values, this value represents the width of any given response.
Spread - For questions with multiple response values, this setting determines whether the response values are positional indicators (e.g., 0/1 only in a column) or represent data values.
Maximum Codes
The maximum number of codes to be written to the output file. Used in column binary and user defined output. Also available in user defined output as an output value.This value does not restrict the number of codes that may be applied to a response. It is used to limit the number of codes that are output.A value of zero means any number of codes may be output.
Related QuestionsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click the question that you want to be
related/Click Related QuestionsRelated questions allow coders to see the response to another question while in the Coder Window. For example, you have an open-ended response and you would like to see the closed-ended response that relates to this question. To relate the questions, right-click the question and click Related Questions. On the next screen, click the box next to the questions you would like to relate and click OK.
50
Codebooks
Delete a Study and/or ComponentsYou must be a supervisor to use the deletion options. You can choose to delete the entire study, questions, coded responses, or loaded verbatims.
Delete a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click the study you want to delete/Click Delete…
After you select to delete a study, the dialog box below displays:
Type OK into the box, click the OK button, and you will erase the entire study from Ascribe™. It is important to note that once deleted, the study is gone and can not be retrieved. We suggest that you use the save study function to store your study on your hard drive before you delete any studies.
Delete QuestionsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click any question/Click Delete Questions
When you select delete questions, this function allows you to delete components of multiple questions at one time. The check boxes that correspond to question components allow you to delete just the codes that have been applied (basically uncoding the question), the quality codes (see Set Quality Codes), or the responses. Or you can delete everything about the question.
Check a box or boxes in the Delete column to select a question or questions for deletion. Make your selection for each question from the Delete Options section. Click the OK button when finished.
51
PrintDoc01 020813
Delete Loaded VerbatimsNavigate: Supervisor/Loads/Right-click the load/Click Delete
Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click a question/Click Load Details/Click DeleteWhen you delete a load, you delete all of the responses for that load (and only for that load). When you select to delete a load, this screen displays:
A dialog box will display and ask you to confirm the delete. Type OK in the box, click the OK button, and the load will be deleted from Ascribe™. This action will delete all responses for the selected question which were loaded from the file on the date and time indicated.
You also can see the load details and delete the load if you navigate to Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click a question/Click Load Details.
Delete Coded ResponsesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click your study/Click Questions/Right-click the question/Click Edit Responses
52
Codebooks
When you reach the Edit Responses page, right-click the response and click Delete Response. This dialog box displays:
Click OK, and you will delete the response and any codes applied to it.
NoteThe Edit Responses page is the only place in Ascribe™ that you can delete a respondent from one question. If you reload data through a second wave, the respondent will be added back into the question.
CodebooksThe codebook refers to the list of categories the coder will choose from when coding a response. The list of categories (or codebook) is used by the coder to organize open-ended or other specify verbatims so they can be further analyzed by a researcher. The codebook also is referred to as the code frame, code map, code list, code manual, codes or various other names.
Codebook Components (Codes and Nets)Codebooks have codes and nets. Nets are sometimes referred to as " undups" because, when tabulated, they typically describe unduplicated respondents that belong to the net.
NoteYou can have a codebook without nets in Ascribe™. When a codebook contains only codes, the codebook is said to be "straight listed."
Presentation in Ascribe™
53
PrintDoc01 020813
In Ascribe™, codebooks are stored and displayed in a hierarchy of parents and children (similar to a family tree). A codebook with nets looks like this in Ascribe™:
The question is shown at the top of the codebook, with the codebook itself below the line. The codebook is almost always displayed on the right side of the Ascribe™ window.
Net – In Ascribe™, a net starts out as a code. In order for a code to become a net, it must have children or sub-codes which belong to it. The codebook above has three nets (Spicy, Smoky, and Sweet). In Ascribe™, the term parent is the same as net. Smoky is the parent of both Hickory and Mesquite.
Codes – Codes display indented below their nets. In Ascribe™, the term children means sub-codes or codes which belong to a net (parent). In the example above, Hickory and Mesquite are children of Smoky.
Finally, siblings are codes with the same parent. Hickory and Mesquite are siblings. So are Spicy and Sweet. Peppery and Honey are at the same level in the codebook, but are not siblings.
Create and Manage CodebooksSeveral options exist to create a new codebook or obtain an existing codebook for a question in Ascribe™. Edit the Codebook and Review Responses offer the most options. The table lists which Ascribe™ functions you can use for codebook creation and management.
Task Ascribe™ FunctionCreate codebooks manually/add codes -Edit the Codebook
-Review Responses-Phrase Analyzer
Copy codebooks from an existing study -Edit the Codebook-Study Restore
Copy codebooks from an existing question in the same study
-Edit the Codebook-Supervisor/Studies/Questions page
54
Codebooks
Copy/paste a codebook from another source
-Edit the Codebook-Review Responses
Share codebooks from an existing study -Edit the Codebook-Study Merge
Share codebooks between questions in the same study
-Edit the Codebook-Supervisor/Studies/Questions page
Unshare codebooks -Edit the CodebookLoad codebooks from another source -LoaderChange codebooks/add and delete codes
-Edit the Codebook-Review Responses-Phrase Analyzer
Change the order of the codebook -Edit the Codebook-Review Responses
Create nets for a codebook -Edit the Codebook-Review Responses
Renumber codebooks -Edit the Codebook-Review Responses
Change code properties/add expressions -Edit the Codebook-Review Responses-Phrase Analyzer
Change codebook properties -Edit the Codebook-Review Responses
Delete empty codebook -Edit the Codebook
Review Responses and Edit the Codebook Right-Click MenusThe Review Responses Window and the Edit the Codebook Window have the most functions to create or change codebooks. Both windows use a right-click menu for these actions. These menu options are the same in each window:
Action ResultQuestions Navigates to the Questions page.Code This Question Navigates to the Coder Window for this question.
Phrase Analyzer Navigates to the Phrase Analyzer Window for this question.
Codebook Editor (Preview) Navigates to the Codebook Editor.Question Info Provides help text for the question.Card Layout Navigates to the card layout report.
Insert Inserts a code at the level of the code you right-clicked.
Insert as Child Inserts a code as a child of the code or the net you
55
PrintDoc01 020813
right-clicked.Delete (when the user right-clicks a code) Delete this code.
Properties (when the user right-clicks a code or net) Edit the properties of the code or the net.
Properties (when the user right-clicks the question) Edit the properties of the codebook.
Renumber CodebookIf you right-click the question, you can renumber the codebook. If you right-click a net, you can renumber a net. The option is not available if you right-click a code.
Paste Paste copied text from other sources like Excel® or Word.
These actions are exclusive to Review Responses:
Action Result
Match Expression When you right-click a code, it searches for the regular expression associated with that code.
Expression Tester Searches the responses by the options set inthis dialog box.
These actions are exclusive to Edit the Codebook:
Action ResultSort Allows the user to sort alphabetically or numerically.Refresh Refreshes the screen.Check Spelling Uses Word to spell check the codebook.Delete (when the user right-clicks the question) Deletes the entire codebook.
Edit the Codebook WindowNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook
Coder/Studies in Progress/Questions in Progress/Code This Question/Right-click/Select Edit the CodebookThe Edit the Codebook window has two panes. The right pane contains the codebook. The question ID displays above the codebook. You can change the codebook from this screen with the right-click menu.
56
Codebooks
View pane Codebook pane
The left pane provides various views that are useful when you work on the codebook. Here are the display options in the view pane:
View DescriptionCode Dictionary This dictionary can be used to store frequently used
codes. The codes in the dictionary can be dragged onto a codebook.To add a code to the dictionary, right-click in the dictionary view or on a code in the dictionary. Select Insert to add a sibling code, or Insert as child to add a sub-code.
Question List Displays a list of all of the studies that are currently active and gives you access to the codebook for each question. Useful to copy or share codebooks between studies.
Responses Displays the responses for the question/codebook in the right-hand window.
Expression List Displays a list of all of the expressions that are programmed into the codebook.
Duplicates List Use this option to check for duplicate outputIDs (especially if you have manually numbered the codebook and have unchecked No duplicate outputID’s in Codebook Properties.)
Where Used After you switch to this view, click a code in the codebook pane. A list of the studies and questions that use this code will display.
Codebook EditorSupervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor (preview)
Supervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click a codebook/Select Codebook Editor (preview)Supervisor/Copy/Share Manager/Right-click a question/Select Codebook Editor (preview)
The Codebook Editor combines some features of Edit the Codebook with the new Codebook Editing Tool, which has more functionality for changing codebooks. The Codebook Editor will replace Edit the Codebook in a future release.
57
PrintDoc01 020813
You can access this page in context of a question (from the Questions page or the Copy/Share Manager) or without the context of a question (from the Account Codebooks page.) Certain features of the Codebook Editor depend on whether you are working in the context of a question.
The right pane of the Codebook Editor contains the Codebook Editing Tool. The left pane contains display options for responses and questions.
Left pane
Codebook Editing Tool:
Menu Bar
Codebook Display
Right-Click Menus
Navigation Keystrokes
Left Pane FeaturesWhen you access the page in context of a question, the left pane displays the study ID, question ID, and question label. Drop-down boxes are available on the study and question ID's to see the details of the study or question.
Other features:
A slider control at the top of the pane allows you to change the size of the pane. The right-click menu for the left pane gives you the standard navigation menu
(Home, Help, Supervisor, Logoff, etc.) You can use the Excel® icon ( ) to put any of the displayed lists into Excel®. View options that are useful when you work on the codebook. They are:
View DescriptionQuestion List Displays a list of all questions in the current study
(when working in the context of a question.)Drop-Down InformationDrop-downs are available on the question ID for
58
Codebooks
question information and on the Shared Codebook column (even if the question is not shared) for codebook information. Edit Any Codebook from the ListIf you right-click a question in the list and select Codebook Editor, you can edit the codebook for that question.
Responses Displays unique responses, listed in decreasing order of the count of the response.Source of ResponsesIf you accessed the Codebook Editor via a question, only the responses for that question will display. If you accessed the Codebook Editor via an account codebook, responses from all questions that share the account codebook will display.Use Regular Expression to Search for ResponsesYou can enter a regular expression to search for specific responses or leave the text box blank to display all responses. Click the Test It button to see results. The number of responses and percent of total responses are displayed below the Test It button. The expression text is highlighted in the response.Select Number of RowsIn addition, you can specify the number of rows to display by entering a number or a percent. (Note that the percent option displays responses in a random, repeatable fashion.)This option allows you to efficiently view responses to questions with a large number of responses. You can use Regular Expression option and the Select option together. Click the Test It button to see results. The number of responses and percent of total responses are displayed below the Test It button. Create Code from TextYou can drag any text onto a code in right pane to insert the text as a new code.
Expression List Displays only codes that have a regular expression. Click a code in the list to highlight it in the right pane.
Duplicates List Use this option to check for duplicate input and output code values (especially if you have manually numbered the codebook and have unchecked No duplicate outputID’s in Codebook Properties.) Click a code in the list to find it in the right pane codebook.When you correct a duplicate input or output code value, the corrected duplicate will display a line through it after the correction. Blank input and output IDs are ignored when searching for duplicates.Update after Making Changes to Code Values
59
PrintDoc01 020813
If you're using the Duplicates List and making changes to code values in the right pane codebook, you need to click Update to refresh the Duplicates List display. Changes to code values do not automatically display.
Word List Displays the unique words for the first 5,000 responses in the question, list in decreasing order of occurrence. Displays only words that are used twice or more.
Unused Codes Displays codes that have not been applied to any response in this question (does not check across shared questions.) Click a code to highlight it in the right pane.Select Number of MentionsEnter a number or a percent to display codes with counts (number of times applied to responses) that are equal to or less than these values.
Shared Questions If the codebook is shared, a Shared Questions view is available. It lists the questions sharing the codebook.Drop-Down InformationDrop-downs are available on the study ID and question ID.Unshare CodebookClick the Unshare button to unshare this question from questions in the list.Access from Account CodebookIf you access the Codebook Editor from an account codebook, you are not able to unshare questions.
Codebook Editing Tool Menu BarThe Codebook Editing Tool allows you to create and maintain codebooks. In the Codebook Editor, the Codebook Editing Tool is in the right pane. At the top of the tool is a menu bar. An icon on the left side of the menu bar indicates the current mode of operation. The tool has multiple modes of operation, which can be selected in the drop-down menu. The tool remembers your current mode if you navigate away from this page and return to it.
Modes of Operation Each mode of operation has an icon associated with it. The modes of operation are:
Mode Description
60
Codebooks
Drag/Drop Redline In this mode, drag/drop operations are supported in a fashion similar to that currently provided in Review Responses. The visual effect is somewhat different. It has been changed to guard against inadvertent "drops" on the wrong location.Larger Redline The line that appears when you drag a code or net is much larger than currently used in Review Responses. It also appears whenever you drag over a code or net, not just when the pointer is over the blank region between codes. This is intended to make your drop targets much easier to locate without error. Grey LineThe line appears grey when the pointer is not over it, and becomes red when the pointer is over it.Promote Code to NetAs in Review Responses, dropping directly on a code will promote the code to a net, and place the item dragged into the net at the bottom.
Drag/Drop Ctrl-Key If you find the visual effect of the red line obtrusive, you may prefer this mode. It functions identically to the Drag/Drop redline mode, except that you use the control key to indicate whether the drop should be into the target or below the target.Use Control Key to Add Child to NetIf you hold the ctrl key down as you drop the item, it is the same as dropping directly on the code or net in the Drag/Drop redline mode: the item dropped is placed into the target as a child. Think ctrl = child. If the ctrl key is not pressed at the time of the drop, the item dropped is placed below the target.
Multi-Select In this mode, drag/drop operations are not supported. This mode instead uses cut/copy/paste operations to copy and move codes. This makes it very appropriate for large codebooks where you want to move codes more than a screen height of distance. It also allows selection of multiple sibling codes. When multiple codes are selected you can Cut or Copy them and then Paste the multiple codes. You can also Delete multiple codes, and Place into Net the multiple codes. Select Multiple Sibling CodesTo select multiple codes, hold the shift or ctrl key as you click with the mouse, in a fashion similar to the File Explorer in Windows. The ctrl key toggles the selection of the codes you click. The shift key selects codes in a range. If you click on a code or net that is not a sibling of the current selection, the selection is cancelled. Cut/Copy/Paste OperationsOnce you have selected multiple codes,you may right-
61
PrintDoc01 020813
click in the selection area for a menu of available commands. A Cut/Paste sequence performs the same operation as dragging and dropping the cut codes (but you can cut and paste multiple codes instead of dragging single codes.) A Copy/Paste operation makes a copy of the codes at the paste location, but does not affect the copied codes. Paste OptionsWhen pasting onto a net, you have two paste options available. Paste will paste the code below the net (like dropping on the red line below the net). Paste as Child will paste the code into the net (like dropping on the net itself).
Direct Edit In this mode there are no right-click menus. It allows editing of codes by simply clicking the text of the code or net and typing the changes. When you first click a code, the cursor is positioned at the end of the text. Click again or use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor. Move Around CodelistUse the tab key to move down the list of nets/codes. Shift-tab moves up the list.Keyboard ShortcutsYou can also edit a code by pressing the Enter key, insert codes by pressing the Ins key, or insert codes into a net by pressing the ctrl-Ins keys.
Check Spelling Use this mode to check the spelling of the description field of codes and nets.Uses Microsoft WordSpell checking uses Microsoft Word, and will use the spelling options and dictionary you have selected in that application. If Word is not installed, spell checking will not work, and the right-click menus will be disabled. Errors in RedSpell checking is performed on the entire codebook when you enter this mode. When spell checking is completed, the spelling errors are underlined in red. The number of errors display in the menu bar.Suggested CorrectionsRight-click on a misspelling to see the list of suggested corrections that Word has provided, and click one to apply it. Alternatively you can press the Enter key to edit the description in the Edit dialog. Move to ErrorsIn this mode, the shift-left and shift-right arrow keys move to the previous and next spelling errors respectively.
Properties This mode is provided as a default mode to be used
62
Codebooks
when the user lacks permission to edit the codebook. It displays a popup showing the properties of a code when you right-click on the code.
Go To MenuUse this menu to navigate to another page. Click the desired page in the drop-down menu. The right-click menu used in Ascribe™ for general navigation does not appear in this tool, but the left pane does have this menu.
FormatThis menu item controls what is displayed in the codebook. The description of the code is always displayed. You can select the following optional items for display.
Display DescriptionInput Code Value Displayed with an underline.Output Code Value Displayed with a colon following the value.Regular Expression Displayed on a new line below the code description.Hover Help Displayed in italics on a new line below the code
description.Long Help Displayed on a new line below the code description.Show Details (Counts And Percents)
Displayed in red to the right of the code description. It is not displayed for nets. If you modify the codebook, the counts and percents may be removed by the edit operation. To restore the values, click the Update link in the Format menu.
(Long Help ) Displays a question mark icon at the start of each code if long help is defined for the code. To view the help, either hover over the question mark or click it.
+ / - (Expand/Collapse All)This menu item allows you to fully collapse or fully expand the nets in the codebook. To expand or collapse an individual net, click the red + or – icon to the left of the net.
SummaryThis menu item displays a summary view of the nets in the codebook (if there are no nets, this menu item does nothing). At the top of the summary appear numbers showing the available levels, or depth of nesting, of the nets. The current level is displayed in red. To change the level, click the number of the desired level. When you click a net in the summary, that net is expanded in the codebook and all other nets are collapsed. This allows you to navigate quickly to a desired location within a large codebook.
FindThe Find menu item allows you to locate codes in the codebook. Type the text you want to find in the box and then press Enter. If a match is found, the code will be highlighted. The search is performed only on the text displayed in the codebook. For example, if a code has an output code value of 10, searching for 10 will find that code only if the output code value is displayed (using the Format menu item).
63
PrintDoc01 020813
When you have entered text in the Find box, you can use the left and right arrow keys to search for the next occurrence of the text. Press the left key to search upward, and the right key to search downward. The search starts from the currently highlighted code, or from the top of the codebook if you press the right arrow and no code is currently highlighted.
The menu below the Find item provides options for the search:
Option DescriptionMatch Case Performs a case-sensitive search; for example, "likes"
matches "likes" but not "Likes".Match Whole Word The text you type must match a complete word in the
codebook.Regular Expression The text in the find box is a regular expression. For
example, "good|bad" will match either "good" or "bad".
Search Collapsed Nets If this option is selected, the search will look at nets that have been collapsed (they display the + icon.) If a match is found in a collapsed net, it will be expanded. If this option is not selected, the search applies only to items that are visible.
Codebook DisplayCodes are displayed with either a hollow circle or solid circle. A hollow circle indicates that the code has not been used to code a response (in any question.) This makes it eligible to be deleted, or to be changed to a net. A solid circle indicates that the code has been used to code at least one response (in any question.) Such codes cannot be deleted, nor can they be promoted to nets.
Nets are displayed with a red icon, either a minus or plus sign. A minus sign indicates that the children (if any) of the code are visible. If there are children, you can click the minus icon to collapse the net, hiding the children and changing the icon to a plus. Clicking the plus expands the net again.
Concurrent EditsThis tool checks for updates by other users while you are modifying the codebook. If another user makes a change to the codebook, the next change you make will be rejected. The tool will display a message indicating that another user has updated the codebook, and your display will be refreshed.
Right-Click MenusEach of the following items have right-click menu options: question ID, nets, and codes. The options available depend on the mode of operation selected. For example, Direct Edit, Check Spelling, and Properties do not use the right-click menus, and Multi-Select has some options unique to it.
Many of the options open dialog boxes. These boxes may be dismissed by pressing the Esc key. You can reposition a dialog box (except in IE6) by dragging the title bar.
Question ID Right-Click MenuNote: Direct Edit, Check Spelling, and Properties do not use the right-click menus.
64
Codebooks
Option Description
Codebook Properties Opens Codebook Properties dialog where you can edit the properties.
Question Properties Opens the Edit Question dialog where you can edit properties of the question.
Set Color Opens the Set Color dialog, which allows you to change the color of the entire codebook.
Copy Text Opens the Copy Text dialog, which allows you to copy the entire codebook.
Paste TextOpens the Paste Text dialog, which allows you to paste codes into the codebook.
Change Case Opens the Change Case dialog, which allows you to change the case of the entire codebook.
Sort Opens the Sort Codes dialog. Renumber Opens the Renumber dialog.
Insert As Child Opens the Code Properties dialog, to add a new code.
Delete
Deletes the entire codebook; only available when no codes are applied in the codebook. If the codebook is shared, and the codes have been used in one of the shared questions, the delete option is not available.
Net and Code Right-Click MenusNote: Direct Edit, Check Spelling, and Properties do not use the right-click menus.
When you right-click a net or a code, the menus offer similar options. However, there are a few options unique to each one, and they are noted below.
Option Description
Properties Opens the Code Properties dialog where you can edit the properties.
Set ColorOpens the Set Color dialog, which allows you to change the color of the net and its children and other items at the same level.
Copy Text Opens the Copy Text dialog, which allows you to copy the net and its children.
Paste TextOpens the Paste Text dialog, which allows you to paste codes into the net.
Sort Opens the Sort Codes dialog. (Net right-click menu only.)
Change Case Opens the Change Case dialog, which allows
65
PrintDoc01 020813
you to change the case of the net and its children. (Net right-click menu only.)
Renumber Opens the Renumber dialog. (Net right-click menu only.)
Place Into Net
Opens the Code Properties dialog so you can create a new net. The operation moves the highlighted code or net into the new net as a child. In multi-select mode, you can select multiple codes or nets for the Place into net operation.
Demote To CodeTurns a net into a code. You may also press the - key to perform this operation. This command is available only if the net has no children. (Net right-click menu only.)
Promote To Net
Turns a code into a net. You may also press the + key to perform this operation on the highlighted code. This command is available only if the code has not been applied to a response in any question. (Code right-click menu only.)
Insert
Creates a new code or net below the highlighted code; opens the Code Properties dialog. The Input and Output code values presented when you open the dialog are calculated using the current settings in the Renumber dialog. The initial color presented is based on the color of the highlighted code when you open the dialog.
Insert As Child
Creates a new code or net and places it into the highlighted net; opens the Code Properties dialog, with the additional choice of Insert at start or end of net. The Input and Output code values presented when you open the dialog are calculated using the current settings in the Renumber dialog. The initial color presented is based on the color of the highlighted code when you open the dialog.(Available only on the net right-click menu.)
Insert Copy
Creates a copy of a code or net below the highlighted code; opens the Code Properties dialog. The Input and Output code values presented when you open the dialog are calculated using the current settings in the Renumber dialog. The initial color presented is based on the color of the highlighted code when you open the dialog.
66
Codebooks
Insert Copy As Child
Creates a copy of a code or net and places it into the highlighted net; opens the Code Properties dialog, with the additional choice of Insert at start or end of net. The Input and Output code values presented when you open the dialog are calculated using the current settings in the Renumber dialog. The initial color presented is based on the color of the highlighted code when you open the dialog.(Available only on the net right-click menu.)
Delete
Deletes the highlighted code or net. When deleting a net, all of the descendents of the net are also deleted. In multi-select mode, you may select multiple codes or nets for this operation. Only codes that have not been applied to any response may be deleted. Only nets that contain no codes that have been applied to a response may be deleted. If the deletion will affect more than one code, you are prompted for confirmation.
Cut (Multi-Select mode only)Cuts selected items so you can move them with a copy operation (see Cut/Copy/Paste Operations.)
Copy (Multi-Select mode only) Copies selected items (see Cut/Copy/Paste Operations.)
Navigation KeystrokesYou can use these keystrokes to navigate around the right pane:
Option Description
Up/Down Arrows Move the highlight to the next visible code upward or downward.
Ctrl-Up/Down ArrowsHold the ctrl key and press the up and down arrows to move to the next sibling of the selected code.
Shift-Up/Down Arrows Hold the shift key and press the up and down arrows to scroll the codebook up or down.
Set Color DialogNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor
(preview)/Right-click question ID, a net or a code/Select Set ColorSupervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click a codebook/Select Codebook Editor (preview)/Right-click question ID, a
net or a code/Select Set ColorThis dialog allows you to change the color of multiple codes at the same time. You can change the color of the entire codebook or only selected nets and/or codes.
Change Color of Entire Codebook
67
PrintDoc01 020813
Right-click the question at the top of the codebook to change the color of the entire codebook. You can change the color of just the nets or just the codes or both. See Set Color Options below.
Change Color of Selected Nets and/or CodesRight-click a net or a code and select Set Color. You can change the color of nets and/or codes. See Set Color Options below.
Set Color Options
Option DescriptionText Color Select the desired color by clicking the box to the left
of Text Color.Apply Color to Children A checkmark indicates that the change will apply to all
descendents of the highlighted net. Apply Color to Level A checkmark indicates that the change will apply to all
siblings of the highlighted code or net. Nets A checkmark indicates that the color of nets will be
set. Codes A checkmark indicates that the color of codes will be
set.
Copy Text DialogNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor
(preview)/Right-click question ID, a net or a code/Select Copy TextSupervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click a codebook/Select Codebook Editor (preview)/Right-click question ID, a
net or a code/Select Copy TextThis dialog displays the highlighted item and allows copying it to the clipboard so that you can paste it into another application (such as Word). If you display this dialog from the question at the top of the codebook, the entire codebook is displayed. If you display the dialog from a net, only the net and its children are displayed. If you display the dialog from a code, only that code is displayed.
The format of the display uses the current options in the Format dropdown menu; however, it does not copy the counts and percents.
Initially the entire display is selected. Right-click it and select Copy to place it in the clipboard. You can create a different selection with the mouse. To restore the entire selection, click the Select All button. In IE, the right-click Select All option will select the entire browser window, which is probably not what you want to do.
Paste Text DialogNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor
(preview)/Right-click question ID, a net or a code/Select Paste TextSupervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click a codebook/Select Codebook Editor (preview)/Right-click question ID, a
net or a code/Select Paste TextThis dialog lets you paste text into the codebook as new codes and nets. Paste or type the desired text into the box on the left. A preview of the results are shown on the right. You can adjust the results by editing the text on the left until you are pleased with the results. When
68
Codebooks
you press the OK button, the new codes and nets are inserted below the highlighted code (the one you displayed the dialog from).
New lines separate codes. Blank lines are ignored.
Use white space (tabs or spaces) in front of the codes to adjust the nesting level of the codes. Tabs and spaces are equivalent, each indicate one nesting level. While you can paste tabs into the box, the browser will not let you type them. Use blanks instead.
If a line starts with digits and is followed by an optional colon then text, the digits are assumed to be the Output code value. This is displayed in the preview with the number followed by a colon. Only the code description, and optionally the output code value, can be entered using this dialog.
Change Case DialogNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor
(preview)/Right-click question ID or a net/Select Change CaseSupervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click a codebook/Select Codebook Editor (preview)/Right-click question ID or a
net/Select Change CaseYou can change the casing of net and code descriptions to lowercase, uppercase, title case, and first letter capital. Some rules:
You must be in Drag/Drop Redline, Drag/Drop Ctrl-Key, or Multi-Select mode to use Change Case.
If you right-click a net, this operation applies to all descendents of the selected net. If you right-click the question ID, this operation applies to the entire codebook.
Here are the options in the dialog:
Option DescriptionCodes Changes only codes.Nets Changes only nets. lower case Changes text to all lowercase.UPPERCASE Changes text to all uppercase.Title Case Changes each word to start with a capital letter.
First letter capitalChanges only the first word to start with a capital letter. (If a word has a special character such as * in front of it, the word itself will not be capitalized.)
Renumber the CodebookNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook or
Select Review ResponsesSupervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Codebook Editor
You can renumber the codebook from Edit the Codebook, Review Responses or the Codebook Editor. When you renumber, you can change the inputID and/or the outputID for the codes and/or nets in the codebook.
69
PrintDoc01 020813
Renumber with Edit the Codebook or Review Responses To renumber the entire codebook, right-click the question at the top of the codebook
and select Renumber codebook. To renumber only the codes in a net, right-click the net and click Renumber
codebook. Select an option from the Value section:
o Input code value – changes only the input value for each code or net.
o Output code value – changes only the output value for each code or net.
o Both – changes both the input and output value and gives them the same value.
Select an option from the Renumber section:o Nets – renumber only the nets; codes remain the same.
o Codes – renumber only codes; nets remain the same.
o Both – renumbers both nets and codes.
o Blanks only – renumbers only those codes or nets with blank values; non-blank values remain the same.
Enter a value in the Start code value field. The first code or net will start with this number.
Enter a value in the Spread between codes field. The codes are increased by this number. For example, if the start code value is 1, and the spread between codes is 10, the values assigned will be 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, etc.
Enter a value in the Digits field or leave it blank. This field defines the number of digits in the code values and whether leading zeros are used. A blank or zero means the value will not be given leading zeros. A number greater than zero means the value will be given leading zeros. The maximum value is 20.
Click the OK button. A dialog confirms the renumber. Click OK to see the renumbered codebook.
Renumber with Codebook Editor
70
Codebooks
To renumber the entire codebook, right-click the question ID and select Renumber. To renumber just a net, right-click the net and select Renumber to display the dialog. The settings in this dialog are also used to calculate the proposed input and output code values when adding codes.
The Renumber dialog has these options:
Field Description
Renumber
Use the check boxs to select Input code value and/or Output code value:Input code value – changes the input value for each code and/or net.Output code value – changes the output value for each code and/or net.
Items To RenumberUse the check boxes to select one or more of these: Nets, Codes, or Blanks only. Blanks only renumbers only those codes and/or nets with blank values; non-blank values remain the same.
Start Enter a value in this field. The first code or net will start with this number.
Spread Between Codes
The codes are increased by the number in this field. For example, if the start code value is 1, and the spread between codes is 10, the values assigned will be 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, etc. The default value for this field is set in the Codebook Properties dialog.
Digits
This field defines the number of digits in the code values and whether leading zeros are used. A blank or zero means the value will not be given leading zeros. A number greater than zero means the value will be given leading zeros. The maximum value is 20.
Ignore (Regular Expression)
You can prevent codes from being renumbered by typing a regular expression in the Ignore box. Codes with values that match this regular expression will not be renumbered. The input and output code values and the code description are searched for the expression. If the expression is found anywhere in the code description, the code will not be renumbered.
71
PrintDoc01 020813
Sort CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook
Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/select Codebook Editor (preview)/Right-click question ID or a net/Select Sort
The sort feature changes the order of the codes in the codebook.
If the codebook has nets and you access the Sort Codes dialog from Edit the Codebook, the sort feature will not work on the entire codebook; you will receive a message which says "Cannot reorder nets." The sort feature will work if you right-click a net (it sorts codes within a net.)
If the codebook has nets and you access the Sort Codes dialog from the Codebook Editor, the sort feature will not work on the entire codebook; however, top-level codes (codes not in a net) will be sorted. The sort feature also works if you right-click a net (it sorts codes within a net.)
To sort the codes:
If you want to change the order of the codes in a net, right-click the net and select Sort.
If you want to change the order of a codebook that has no nets, right-click the question ID and select Sort.
Choose a sort option:o Code description sorts the codes alphanumerically by the code text or
description fields.
o Output code value sorts the codes alphanumerically by the output code values.
o Input code value sorts the codes alphanumerically by the input code values.
o Descending sorts the codes in descending order within the Sort By option (available only from the Codebook Editor.)
Click OK. A dialog box displays to confirm the sort (in Edit the Codebook only.) Enter OK in the box and click OK. A message displays to tell you the sort is complete.
Click OK.
NoteA sort can not be reversed. You can sort the codes again by one of the three choices. However, if the original codebook was not in numeric or alphabetical order, the original order will be lost.
Define Codebook Properties
72
Codebooks
Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook or Review Responses or Codebook Editor/Right-click question ID/Select Properties
Supervisor/Account Codebooks/Right-click codebook/Select Codebook PropertiesSupervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Copy/Share Manager/Right-click question/Select Codebook Properties
The Codebook Properties dialog contains basic information about a codebook such as the codebook ID and description. If you access the dialog from the Codebook Editor, Account Codebooks, or Copy/Share Manager, you will have two additional fields (Account Codebook and Notes.)
Field Description
Codebook IDThis field is a unique identifier for the codebook and allows you to access the codebook from external sources. It should be unique within all codebooks. An error will occur if you try to set this ID to a value that already exists for another codebook.
DescriptionThis field provides a description of the codebook. You can use this field to provide information about the codebook, which may be useful particularly for shared codebooks.
Spread Between Codes
This field determines how the default value for inputID and outputID are calculated. You may use any number greater than zero. When the No duplicate outputID's check box is cleared, the default value for a new code is determined by inspection of all of the siblings of the code. The default value will be the first whole multiple of Spread between codes greater than the outputID of all siblings. Only siblings with numeric outputIDs are considered.
No Duplicate OutputID's
If this check box is selected, Ascribe™ will guarantee that the outputID of each code in the codebook is unique. When you assign a new value to the outputID of a code, Ascribe™ will change the outputID if necessary to ensure that it is unique within the codebook. If Ascribe™ changes the outputID, it will assign a large number. This is a visual indication that you need to correct the outputID. This check box is disabled if the codebook contains duplicate codes. To enable the check box, you must first ensure that all codes have unique outputIDs. Note that uniqueness applies to all codes in the codebook, including nets.
Account Codebook If this check box is selected, the codebook will be designated as an account codebook. The codebook must have an ID to use
73
PrintDoc01 020813
this option. (Only available when accessed from the Codebook Editor, Account Codebooks, or Copy/Share Manager.)
NotesUse this optional field to enter additional information about the codebook. (Only available when accessed from the Codebook Editor, Account Codebooks, or Copy/Share Manager.)
Edit the Properties of a CodeThe properties dialog for a code displays when you add a code, or when you right-click a code or a net and select Properties.
After you have edited the properties, click the OK button to update the code.
More information on Code Properties:
Field Description
Description The description is the text of the code which displays in the codebook. If you leave the field blank, you will not see the code.
Input Code ValueThe input code value is used for automatically coding responses to closed-ended, other specify, and value questions. The field may be blank if you will not use this codebook for automatic coding of closed-ended responses.
Output Code Value
Ascribe™ writes this field to the output file when the coded responses are downloaded. It is the “value” or outputID of the code. The codebook displays the field to the left of the code description. It can be a number or text.If you select the no duplicate outputID’s option in the codebook properties dialog, Ascribe™ checks for duplicate values in the codebook. If a duplicate is found, Ascribe™ changes the value you entered here to a large number. The large number reminds you to select a different and unique value.The field may be blank. Even if the no duplicate outputID's option is set, you may have multiple codes with no outputID. These are not considered to be duplicates.
Net
When you open the Properties dialog, the box is checked if the code is a net (the IsNet property of the code is true). The box is disabled (meaning you can’t change whether it is checked or not) if any of the following are true:
The code has children The code is currently applied to a response The code is currently applied as a quality code
If a code has not been applied to any responses, you can click the box to make this code a net. If this code has been applied to responses, you cannot change it to be a net.
Regular Expression
An expression is used to match words in a response. It helps the coder to pick the proper code for a verbatim.During coding in the Coder Window, Ascribe™ checks the response against all of the expressions in the codebook. When a match is found, Ascribe™ highlights and underlines the expression word or words found in the response. The coder clicks the highlighted words, and the
74
Codebooks
corresponding code is placed in the selected codes pane. The Regular Expressions section has more information. The field may be blank if you do not want to use regular expressions.
Hover HelpThis field provides short instructions to the coders for this code. This text displays when you place the mouse over this code in the codebook pane of the Coder Window and the Review Responses Window. The field may be blank if you do not want to use hover help.
Long Help (HTML)
This field provides longer instructions to the coders for this code. You can enter as much information as you want or the field may be blank.If you enter text here, a yellow question mark appears next to the code in the codebook pane of the Coder Window and the Review Responses Window. In the Coder Window, click the question mark to view the long help. In Review Responses, right-click the code and select Properties to view the help. The browser interprets the long help text as HTML. You can use HTML commands to format the text for the printed version of the codebook. For example, if you enter this:Here is the long help.< br>It contains <b>HTML</b> tags.It will display in the printed version as:Here is the long help.It contains HTML tags.
Text Color
This field controls the color of the code in the codebook. Use color to highlight new codes or frequently used codes or to separate positive, negative and neutral nets. To change the color of a code:
Click the text color box to display the color choices. Click the desired color. Optional: To change the color of this code and the children of
this code, click Apply color to children. (Not available when you access code properties from the Codebook Editor.)
Optional: To change the color of this code and all codes and nets at the same level, click Apply color to level. (Not available when you access code properties from the Codebook Editor.)
Click OK. The code or codes and nets change color based on the options you selected.
Insert AtChoose Start or End to insert the new code at the start or end of children of the net. (Available only from the Codebook Editor when you choose Insert as child.)
Add CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook or
Select Review ResponsesTo add codes to an empty codebook:
Right-click the question text to start a new codebook. Choose Insert. The properties dialog for the new code displays. Enter the information for the code properties, and the code is added.
If a codebook exists, you have several choices to add codes.
To add a sibling code:
75
PrintDoc01 020813
Right-click an existing code at the position where you want to add the code. Choose Insert. The properties dialog for the new code displays. Enter the information for the code properties, and the code is added below its sibling.
To add a child to the end of a net:
Right-click on the net. Choose Insert as child. The properties dialog for the new code displays. Enter the information for the code properties, and the code is added to the end of the
net.To create a net when you add a code:
Verify that the target code has not been used to code a response. (You cannot create a net from a code that has been used to code a response.)
Choose Insert as child. The properties dialog for the new code displays. Enter the information for the code properties, and the code is added below the new
net.Spell Check
Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Questions/Right-click question/Edit the CodebookCheck spelling uses the Microsoft Word spell checker and dictionaries to test the correctness of the spelling of code descriptions.
To check the spelling of a particular code, right-click the desired code and select Check Spelling. If the word is misspelled, it will be underlined and displayed in red.
To check the entire codebook, right-click the question and select Check Spelling. Misspelled words will be underlined and displayed in red. The entire code will be displayed within a black frame.
To correct the spelling, right-click the highlighted word and click a word from the menu. If the menu is empty, it means that Word could not find a suitable suggestion.
To manually correct the spelling, right-click the code and select Properties. Change the spelling in the Description field and click OK.
NoteWhen you are in the Edit the Codebook Window, Ascribe™ also checks the spelling of code descriptions whenever you add codes or change code properties.The spell checker "learns" as it works, and will operate faster as you continue to work in the Edit the Codebook window. When you leave the page, the spelling checker "forgets" the words it has learned, and will start slowly again the next time you enter the page.
Because Ascribe™ uses Microsoft Word to check spelling, you can check spelling in multiple languages by setting up Word for the desired language. Ascribe™ will use the spelling dictionary that you have selected in Word.
The spell checker can be disabled through the User Options under the General heading on the Home Page.
76
Codebooks
77
PrintDoc01 020813
Regular ExpressionsA regular expression is a pattern used to match text. Each code in a codebook can have an associated regular expression. You can enter expressions in the Code Properties dialog from Edit the Codebook, Review Responses or Phrase Analyzer.
Code in the Coder Window with ExpressionsWhen a verbatim is displayed to a coder in the Coder Window, Ascribe™ compares it to each regular expression defined in the codebook for the question. If a match is found, the matched text is underlined and highlighted. The coder can hover over the highlighted text to see which code will be selected. If the coder clicks the underlined text, the code that matched the text is selected and placed in the selected codes pane.
Simple Regular ExpressionsUse lower case letters in regular expressions. Ascribe™ views lower case and upper case letters the same. Do not use any symbols (such as $, +, -, &) unless you are an expert in their use. They execute powerful commands that can have unforeseen consequences.
Letters and digits in the regular expression match the corresponding text in the verbatim response. For example:
78
Codebooks
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI love cats love I love catsI love dogs dog I love dogsI LOVE DOGS o I LOVE DOGSNotice that these regular expressions simply match the same sequence of characters in the verbatim text. Upper and lower case letters are treated the same.
Match WordsIn many cases, you will want to match whole words. Use angle brackets around characters to mean "match this word". For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultThe cat likes Catawba melon
cat The cat likes Catawba melon
The cat likes Catawba melon
<cat> The cat likes Catawba melon
Notice that the first regular expression matches the "cat" in Catawba, which is probably not what you want. When we put the "cat" in angle brackets, we match only that exact word.
Often you will want to match words that begin with a certain sequence of characters. Use two angle brackets at the end of the word to mean "match words that begin with these characters". For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI like Cadillacs and Catalinas
<cad>> I like Cadillacs and Catalinas
I like Cadillacs and Catalinas
< ca>> I like Cadillacs and Catalinas
You can also match words that end with a certain sequence of characters. Use two angle brackets at the start of the word to mean "match words that end with these characters." For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI use USMail, email, and SnailMail
<<mail> I use USMail, email, and SnailMail
I use US Mail, e-mail, and Snail Mail
<<mail> I use US Mail, e-mail, and Snail Mail
I use US Mail, e-mailing, and Snail Mail
<<mail> I use US Mail, e-mailing, and Snail Mail
Notice in these examples that the definition of a word for matching is a contiguous sequence of characters. Word matching stops at punctuation marks and spaces.
Finally, you can use two angle brackets at the start and end of the word to mean "match words that contain these characters." For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression Result
79
PrintDoc01 020813
I send mail by USMailing, emailing, and SnailMail
<<mail>> I send mail by USMailing, emailing, and SnailMail
It is critical that the opening angle brackets are matched with closing angle brackets. Any of these examples would cause the regular expression matching not to work:
>cat<
<cat
cat>>
Verbatim Text NormalizationTo make the use of regular expressions easier, the verbatim response is "normalized" before it is compared to your regular expressions. The type of normalization depends on the language you have selected for your browser.
For English, the following normalization is performed:
This word in the verbatim response
Is replaced with this word
1st first2nd second3rd thirdcan not cannotdont do notdon’t do notwont will notwon’t will notisnt is notis'nt is notn't notcuz because& andIf the browser language setting is English and the study is in English, the results of the normalization changes are displayed on the coder's screen and are also used for regular expression matching.
For western languages other than English, the following normalization is performed:
These characters in the Are converted to these
80
Codebooks
verbatim response charactersàáâãäå Aç Cèéêë Eìíîï Iñ Nòóôõö Oùúûü UThe browser language determines the display of the results of normalization.
If the language setting is for a western language other than English:
The diacritical marks do not display in the Coder Window The diacritical marks display in Review Responses Searches and expression tests ignore the diacritical marks You do not need diacritical marks when you enter simple regular expressions for
codes. Use the letter without the diacritical.If the language setting is for English:
The diacritical marks display in the Coder Window The diacritical marks display in Review Responses Searches and expression tests use the diacritical marks You need diacritical marks when you enter simple regular expressions (if you want to
find that letter with its diacritical.)Match PhrasesYou can match exact phrases when you place the phrase inside angle brackets:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI love cats <love cat>> I love catsYou can also match phrases that are bound by certain words. Use three dots in the regular expression to mean "skip up to thirty characters within this phrase." The three dots match any sequence of up to 30 characters that do not contain the following characters: .,;:?!
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI love cats <love…cat>> I love catsI love white cats <love…cat>> I love white catsI love dogs and hate cats <love…cat>> I love dogs and hate
catsI love dogs, cats, and mice <love…cat>> I love dogs, cats, and
miceNotice that the third and fourth examples do not give the desired result. The third one matched, but the phrase is not the intended phrase. The fourth did not match because of the comma between 'love' and 'cats'.
81
PrintDoc01 020813
Match Negative PhrasesYou can use a tilde character '~' directly in front of a < or << to match the word 'not' in the preceding portion of the phrase. It is another way of writing <not>…
Remember that in English, the contraction n't is changed to 'not', so you do not need to match the contraction when you create an expression.
For example:
Verbatim Response Regular Expression ResultI love cats ~<love…cat>> I love catsI don't love white cats ~<love…cat>> I do not love white cats
Match Commonly Misspelled WordsA single dot character matches any character in that location. Use this to handle commonly misspelled words. For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultCadillacs and Catalinas <cad.l>> Cadillacs and CatalinasCadallacs and Catalinas <cad.l>> Cadallacs and CatalinasThe use of brackets with the single dot can also help with misspelled words. The characters .{1,2} tells the expression tester to look for one or two missing characters between the letters before and after the brackets. For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultNiether this nor that <n.{1,2}ther> Neither this nor thatNither this nor that <n.{1,2}ther> Nither this nor thatNether this nor that <n.{1,2}ther> Nether this nor that
Match Multiple CasesYou can join regular expressions together with a vertical bar. The vertical bar means "match either of these expressions." For example:
Verbatim response Regular expression ResultI love cats <love…cat>>|<love…dog>> I love catsI love dogs <love…cat>>|<love…dog>> I love dogsYou should only use the vertical bar to separate words surrounded by angle brackets, unless you are using the advanced features described in the next section.
Advanced Use of Regular ExpressionsSimple regular expressions are sufficient for most uses. However, this section covers the additional applications you can use with regular expressions. Use them only if you have a clear understanding of how they work.
82
Codebooks
You can use the special characters described in the table below to build more complex regular expressions.
Character Description\ Marks the next character as either a special character or a literal.
For example, "n" matches the character "n". "\n" matches a newline character. The sequence "\\" matches "\" and "\(" matches "(".
^ Matches the beginning of input.$ Matches the end of input.* Matches the preceding character zero or more times. For example,
"zo*" matches either "z" or "zoo".+ Matches the preceding character one or more times. For example,
"zo+" matches "zoo" but not "z".? Matches the preceding character zero or one time. For example, "a?
ve?" matches the "ve" in "never".. Matches any single character except a newline character.(pattern) Matches pattern and remembers the match. The matched substring
can be retrieved from the resulting Matches collection, using Item [0]...[n]. To match parentheses characters ( ), use "\(" or "\)".
x|y Matches either x or y. For example, "z|food" matches "z" or "food". "(z|f)oo" matches "zoo" or "food".
{n} n is a nonnegative integer. Matches exactly n times. For example, "o{2}" does not match the "o" in "Bob," but matches the first two o's in "foooood".
{n,} n is a nonnegative integer. Matches at least n times. For example, "o{2,}" does not match the "o" in "Bob" and matches all the o's in "foooood." "o{1,}" is equivalent to "o+". "o{0,}" is equivalent to "o*".
{n,m} m and n are nonnegative integers. Matches at least n and at most m times. For example, "o{1,3}" matches the first three o's in "fooooood." "o{0,1}" is equivalent to "o?".
[xyz] A character set. Matches any one of the enclosed characters. For example, "[abc]" matches the "a" in "plain".
[^xyz] A negative character set. Matches any character not enclosed. For example, "[^abc]" matches the "p" in "plain".
[a-z] A range of characters. Matches any character in the specified range. For example, "[a-z]" matches any lowercase alphabetic character in the range "a" through "z".
[^m-z] A negative range characters. Matches any character not in the specified range. For example, "[m-z]" matches any character not in the range "m" through "z".
\b Matches a word boundary, that is, the position between a word and a space. For example, "er\b" matches the "er" in "never" but not the "er" in "verb".
\B Matches a nonword boundary. "ea*r\B" matches the "ear" in "never
83
PrintDoc01 020813
early".\d Matches a digit character. Equivalent to [0-9].\D Matches a nondigit character. Equivalent to [^0-9].\f Matches a form-feed character.\n Matches a newline character.\r Matches a carriage return character.\s Matches any white space including space, tab, form-feed, etc.
Equivalent to "[ \f\n\r\t\v]".\S Matches any nonwhite space character. Equivalent to "[^ \f\n\r\t\v]".\t Matches a tab character.\v Matches a vertical tab character.\w Matches any word character including underscore. Equivalent to "[A-
Za-z0-9_]".\W Matches any nonword character. Equivalent to "[^A-Za-z0-9_]".\num Matches num, where num is a positive integer. A reference back to
remembered matches. For example, "(.)\1" matches two consecutive identical characters.
\n Matches n, where n is an octal escape value. Octal escape values must be 1, 2, or 3 digits long. For example, "\11" and "\011" both match a tab character. "\0011" is the equivalent of "\001" & "1". Octal escape values must not exceed 256. If they do, only the first two digits comprise the expression. Allows ASCII codes to be used in regular expressions.
\xn Matches n, where n is a hexadecimal escape value. Hexadecimal escape values must be exactly two digits long. For example, "\x41" matches "A". "\x041" is equivalent to "\x04" & "1". Allows ASCII codes to be used in regular expressions.
Check Expressions for a Specific CodebookNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Questions/Right-click question/Click Edit the Codebook/Select
Expression List from the Current View List
The codes and their expressions display in the view pane as this example shows:
84
Codebooks
Copy and Paste Codebooks from Excel® or WordAscribe™ allows the user to copy and paste codes into the codebook from a text document or an Excel® spreadsheet.
1. Before you copy and paste the codes, prepare the source document so that the outputID of the code appears to the left of the description of the code, separated by a tab (or in a different cell in Excel®). You can also indent the codes with tabs or empty cells to indicate the net level.
An example of a properly formatted codebook in Excel®:
85
PrintDoc01 020813
An example of a properly formatted codebook in Word (with all characters displayed):
86
Codebooks
2. To copy the document, select the desired portion of the document and select Copy from the Edit menu.
3. In Ascribe™, navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/Select Edit the Codebook or Select Review Responses.
4. To paste the codes into an empty codebook, right-click the question text, select Paste and click the OK button to insert the copied codes.
5. To paste the codes into an existing codebook, right-click the net or code where you want to insert the copied codes. Select Paste and click the OK button to insert the copied codes. (The Paste option under Edit in the Internet Explorer toolbar does not work to paste codebooks into Ascribe™.)
6. The codebook is copied into Ascribe™. The nets, the subnets and the codes use the value given in the Excel® spreadsheet or Word document.
Delete CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook or
Select Review Responses or Codebook EditorYou can only delete empty codes and codes that have no children.
If a code has responses coded to it, remove the code from the responses. Once the code is empty, you can delete it.
If a code is a net, first delete the child codes. When the net is no longer a parent, you can delete it.
Delete a code by one of these methods:o Right-click the code and select Delete.
o Left-click the code and press the Delete key.
Move CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook or
Select Review ResponsesCodes are moved around the codebook by the drag-and-drop method. Left-click and hold the mouse button down on the code to be moved. Drag the code to the new location and release the mouse button.
87
PrintDoc01 020813
Rules for Code Moves
To move a code to the top of a net, you will need to place it in-between the top code and the second code, and then move the top code below it.
To move a code to the bottom of the codebook, you can drag and drop it on the Question Text.
You can not make a code a net if it has been used to code any responses. To delete a net, you must first delete or move all of the children (codes) that report
to the net.Drag & Drop Actions
This table explains what happens during the drag and drop actions.
Action
Result
Drop a code between two codesThe code is placed at the level of the upper code as a sibling. The code is inserted between the two codes.
Drop a code on top of another code
The dropped code becomes a child of the code you drop it on. This action creates a net or a subnet. (See Rules for Code Moves.)
Drop a code just below a net The code is not placed where you drop it, but is placed at the same level as the net.
Drop a code on a net The dropped code is placed as the last code in the net.
Drop a net on top of another netThe dropped net is placed below the last code of the existing net. The dropped net becomes a child or subnet of the first net.
Drop a net just below a netThe dropped net is not placed where you drop it, but is placed below the last code of the net. It is at the same level as the net.
Drag & Drop Visuals
The examples below show the drag-and-drop visual clues. In the first example, a blue line means the code or net is placed as a child of the code or the net that it is dropped on. This action is the same as insert as a child.
88
Codebooks
In the next example, a blue line with a red line means the code or the net is placed between two codes or nets. This action is the same as insert.
NoteWhen you drop a code on top of another code, the code you drop it on becomes a net. A code can only become a net if it has not been used to code a response. For this reason, the solid highlight will not always appear. It will appear only on those codes that have not been used to code a response.
Share and Copy CodebooksIn Ascribe™, a codebook can be shared by multiple questions, even by questions that are not in the same study. You can also copy a codebook from one question to another. There are several places in Ascribe™ where you can copy and share codebooks:
Supervisor/Studies/Copy/Share Manager Supervisor/Studies/Questions page (Copy/Share From dialog, Copy/Share To dialog,
Copy/Share Manager) Edit the Codebook page .
Here are some guidelines for which method to use:
Use the drag/drop method (which opens the Copy/Share From dialog) for a simple share for one question in a study. The dialog does contain options for getting codebooks from other sources on your account.
Use Copy/Share To dialog for sharing multiple questions within a study. Use Copy/Share Manager for sharing multiple questions within a study. This option
also has the most flexibility for finding source questions and codebooks (lists all studies, account codebooks, and automated coding models on your account.)
While Edit the Codebook offers options for copying and sharing codebooks, this page will be removed in a future release of Ascribe™.
Difference Between Copy and ShareWhen questions share a codebook, there is only one codebook. If you make a change to the codebook, that change will be seen in all questions that share the codebook.
When you copy a codebook, you create a new, separate codebook. If you copy a codebook from question A to question B, the codebooks are initially identical. However, there are two codebooks, and they are separate from each other. If you change the codebook for question A, the codebook for question B remains unchanged since it is a separate codebook.
89
PrintDoc01 020813
Copy/Share ManagerNavigate: Studies/Right-click a study/Select Copy/Share Manager
Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions/Right-click a question/Select Copy/Share>Copy/Share ManagerThe Copy/Share Manager allows you to manage the codebooks of a study. It allows you to share multiple questions in a study at one time. It also allows you to find any codebook on your site and to copy or share any of the codebooks with the questions in your study.
Copy/Share Manager Right PaneThe right side of the Copy/Share Manager displays all questions in the study that have no coded responses. These questions are eligible to have their codebooks replaced by a copy or share operation.
Here are the fields at the top of the right pane:
Field DescriptionStudy ID The study ID of the current study displays at the top of
the pane. Drop-down information is available.Study Name The study name displays next to the study ID.Group By You can display groupings by questions or codebooks.SHARE The Codebooks Shares the codebooks.Make A COPY Of The Codebook
Makes a copy of the codebook.
SHARE The Codebooks Shares the codebooks.
Questions ViewWhen you group by Questions, here are the fields available in the table (you can choose the columns displayed by selecting Choose Columns from the right-click menu):
Field DescriptionUse the check box to select one or more questions which will receive a codebook with the copy or share operation.
90
Codebooks
Codebook The Codebook column has drop-down information about the codebook. The icons give the status of the codebook:
- The open book means the codebook has codes. - The open book with arrows means the codebook
has codes and the question is shared.
- The closed book means the codebook is empty.
- The closed book with arrows means the codebook is empty and the question is shared.
Question Type This field displays the type of question.Question ID A short identifier for the question.Question Label A short name for the question.Question Text The field displays the question text information from the
General Tab.Codebook ID The ID of the codebook (if one was given in the
Codebook Properties dialog.)Codebook Description Description of the codebook (if one was given in the
Codebook Properties dialog.)Length The number of items in the codebook.Shared Questions The number of questions that share the codebook. Click
the number to view the questions which share the codebook. You also have the option to unshare the question.
Notes Notes about the codebook (if any were given in the Codebook Properties dialog.)
The right-click menu for the Questions View has these options:
Option DescriptionQuestions This option navigates to the Questions page.Question Properties
This option displays the dialog box where you can change any of the question components like question text and question help. (Available on the right pane only.)
Add A New Question
The option creates a new question for the study. You enter the question components in the dialog box to add the question ID, question label, etc. (Available on the right pane only.)
Codebook Properties
Opens the Codebook Properties dialog where you can edit the information. (Available on the right pane only.)
Codebook Editor (Preview)
This option displays the Codebook Editor. (Available on the right pane only.)
Code This Question
The option navigates to the Coder Window.
91
PrintDoc01 020813
Review Responses This option navigates to Review Responses.Choose Columns Navigates to the Choose Columns dialog box, which allows you to
choose the columns to be displayed on this page.Change Column Widths
Navigates to the Change Column Widths dialog box, which allows you to choose the column widths for the columns on this page.
Codebooks ViewWhen you group by Codebooks, the questions that share the codebook display before the codebook. If a codebook ID exists, the ID is listed first, followed by the length of the codebook. If no codebook ID exists, only the length of the codebook displays. The icons have the same meaning as when you Group by Questions. There is one additional icon; if you click the question mark in a balloon, a drop-down list with study information displays.
The right-click menu for the Codebooks View has these options:
Option DescriptionQuestions This option navigates to the Questions page.Add A New Question
The option creates a new question for the study. You enter the question components in the dialog box to add the question ID, question label, etc. (Available on the right pane only.)
Properties If you right-clicked a codebook, the Codebook Properties dialog opens where you can edit the information. (Available on the right pane only.)If you right-clicked a question, the Edit Questions dialog opens where you can change any of the question components like question text and question help. (Available on the right pane only.)
Codebook Editor (Preview)
This option displays the Codebook Editor. (Available only when you right-click a question on the right pane only.)
Code This Question
The option navigates to the Coder Window.
92
Codebooks
Review Responses This option navigates to Review Responses.
Copy/Share Manager Left PaneThe left pane allows you to choose a codebook from several sources via the Choose From drop-down list. You can group by questions or codebooks (see Questions View and Codebooks View for more information.) When you group by codebooks, questions that are shared with a codebook may belong to another study. Those study IDs will have brackets around them.
When you select a source via the Choose From drop-down list, that choice will remain until the next time you use the Copy/Share Manager.
How to Copy and Share with the Copy/Share ManagerIn the left pane, choose the source of the codebook by using the Choose From drop-down list:
A question in this study - All questions in the study are listed. A question in another study - A drop-down list of studies displays. Select a study, and
the list of questions/codebooks from that study display. Account codebooks - All account codebooks on the site are listed. Accelerator coding models - All accelerator coding models are listed. Empty Codebook - Use the empty codebook to delete a codebook in a question or
questions.Select the source question or codebook on the left pane, and then select the target question or codebook on the right pane. Because the Copy/Share Manager allows you to copy/share multiple questions or codebooks, you can select as many questions or codebooks in the right pane as you would like.
Select SHARE the codebooks or Make a COPY of the codebook, and click OK.
Note that when you use the copy option, you could be unsharing a previously shared question. But, the Copy/Share Manager lets you re-establish the share if needed. It can save you time if you are aware of the shared relationships between questions before you do anything. The double-arrow icon can help remind you of these relationships.
Note that using the Empty Codebook option also affects the shared relationships of questions. You can create a share between questions if you select Empty Codebook and multiple questions and choose Share. Also, you will unshare questions if you use the Copy option.
How to Unshare QuestionsThese pages have ways to unshare questions:
Copy/Share Manager Codebook Editor Questions Page Edit the Codebook
Unshare Questions with the Copy/Share Manager
93
PrintDoc01 020813
To unshare a question with the Copy/Share Manager, you need to Group by Questions on the right pane. Open the Shared Questions drop-down box for the question you want to unshare by clicking in the Shared Questions column. (If the Shared Questions column is not displayed, right-click the question and use Choose Columns to display that column.)
The unshare option is at the top of the Shared Questions drop-down box. Click it to unshare the question.
Copy/Share From DialogNavigate: Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions
The Copy/Share From dialog allows you to copy or share a codebook from another question, replacing the codebook of the selected question. It is available only when the selected question has no coded responses. If the question's codebook is not empty but has not been used to code responses, you will get a message which asks if you want to replace the codebook.
Within the dialog, you may select from questions in the current study, questions in another study, an automated coding model, or an account codebook.
There are two ways to access the Copy/Share From dialog:
Drag/Drop method: In this method, you have a source question which contains the codebook that you want to copy/share. You also have a target question which receives the codebook from the source question. Highlight text in the row of the source question. Left-click and drag the text to the target question and release the mouse button. The Copy/Share From dialog displays. (Note that you do not have to use the source question you originally selected; you can get a codebook from another source in the Copy/Share From dialog.)
Right-click a target question (a question that needs a codebook) and choose Copy/Share>Copy/Share Codebook From. The Copy/Share From dialog displays.
Here are the options in the dialog:
Option DescriptionChoose From You can choose what question/codebook you give the
target question. Your choices are: A question in this study - choose a question from
the Question text box. A question in another study - choose a study from
the Study text box. Account codebooks - choose one from a drop-
down list that displays. Automated coding model - choose one from a
drop-down list that displays.Study This field displays if you choose to get a codebook from
a question in another study. Enter the beginning character of the study ID or name, and a list of studies that match that character will display in a drop-down list. (Only the first 10 studies that begin with the character will display so you may need to enter more characters. If you need to see more than 10 studies, you
94
Codebooks
may want to use the Copy/Share Manager, which lists all of the studies.)
Question Type You can filter the list of questions by selecting or unselecting the question type boxes (open,closed, other specify, or value.)
Question If you used the drag/drop method and chose A question in this study, the Question text box defaults to the source question. If you used the right-click method and chose A question in this study or you chose A question in another study, the Question text box defaults to the first question of the study. The Question text box has a drop-down list of questions so you can select whatever question you would like.
Make A COPY Of The Codebook
Makes a copy of the codebook.
SHARE The Codebooks Shares the codebooks.Click OK to finish the procedure or click Cancel to exit without copying or sharing the questions.
Copy/Share To DialogNavigate: Studies/Right-click a study/Select Questions
The Copy/Share To dialog allows you to share the codebook of the selected question with any number of other questions in the study. The questions you share the codebook to must have no coded responses.
In this method, you select a source question which contains the codebook you want to copy/share. To start the process, right-click your source question and select Copy/Share>Copy/Share Codebook To. The Copy/Share To dialog opens, and the source question remains highlighted in gray behind the dialog.
Here is the format of the dialog box:
Option DescriptionQuestions With No Coded Responses
We can also refer to these as target questions. These questions can have their codebooks replaced with the codebook of the source question.
The target questions may have a codebook, but they have not been used to code responses. The number in brackets before the question ID shows the number of codes in the codebook. If there is no number in brackets, then the codebook is empty. If the question's codebook is not empty, you will get a message which asks if you want to replace the codebook.
Click a question to highlight it. To select multiple
95
PrintDoc01 020813
questions, press the Ctrl key while you click different questions.
If the questions are next to each other, click the first question and press the Shift key while you click the last question in the range.
Click the forward arrow button to move the selected questions to the right pane. These are the questions which will have their codebooks replaced.If you need to remove a question from the list of Selected Questions, click the question and click the backwards arrow button.
Selected Questions These are the questions which will have their codebooks replaced.
Make A COPY Of The Codebook
Makes a copy of the codebook.
SHARE The Codebooks Shares the codebooks.Click OK to finish the procedure or click Cancel to exit without copying or sharing the questions.
Rules for Copy and Share Codebooks with Edit the CodebookThe question that receives the copied or shared codebook must have an empty codebook.
When you attempt to copy or share a codebook and the question has a codebook, you will receive a message that a codebook exists. The copy or share will not work.
If you still want to copy or share to this question, you can delete the existing codebook if no responses have been coded. If responses have been coded, you have to remove the coding before you can delete the codebook.
To delete a codebook, navigate to Edit the Codebook for the question. Right-click the question and select Delete. Enter OK to confirm the delete and click OK. The codebook is deleted, and you can continue with the share or copy procedure.
Copy and Share Codebooks with Edit the CodebookNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click question/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook
From the Edit the Codebook page, you can copy and share codebooks from any question, including questions in different studies.
To copy/share a codebook from any study question:
Navigate to Edit the Codebook for the question that will receive the copied or shared codebook.
Select Question List in the Current View box. A list of studies displays. Find the study that contains the question you want to copy or share. Click the plus
sign next to the study ID. A list of questions for that study displays. Highlight the question you are copying from and drag it to the right pane. Drop it on
the question ID on the top right pane.
96
Codebooks
Select Copy or Share in the dialog box that displays. Click OK and the codebook displays.
NoteTo see the codebook before you copy or share it, right-click the question ID in view pane and select View Codebook.
This example shows the View Codebook option:
Copy and Share Codebooks to Multiple Questions with Edit the CodebookTo copy or share a codebook from the current question being edited to one or more study questions:
Navigate to Edit the Codebook for the question you want to share or copy. Select Question List in the Current View box. A list of studies displays. Find the studies or questions that will be the targets. Click the plus sign in the left
column to expand the question list.
97
PrintDoc01 020813
Click the left-most cell of the question row to select the questions you wish to copy or share. The selected question will display a in the cell as shown in the example below.
Left-click the question ID in the codebook pane to highlight it. Drag it from codebook pane and drop onto any of the selected questions in the view pane.
In the dialog box displayed, select whether you want to copy or share the codebook.
NoteAs you move your mouse over the left-most cell of the question rows in the view pane (left pane), the cursor will display a "hand" image if the question has no codes in its codebook. This symbol indicates it can be selected for sharing.
Find Where a Code Has Been Applied in Shared CodebooksNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click question/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook
If you want to know where a code has been used in shared codebooks, you can use the Where Used function in Edit the Codebook.
Select Where Used from the Current View list in the view pane. Left-click any code in the codebook pane. The table displays the study ID and the question ID where the highlighted code has
been applied. This search looks at both quality codes applied and regular codes applied.
98
Codebooks
Unshare Codebooks with Edit the CodebookNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click question/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Edit the Codebook
The share between codebooks can be broken in two ways from Edit the Codebook. One way is to click the Unshare link located just under the question ID in the codebook pane. A dialog box displays. Click the OK button to confirm.
A second way is to select Question List from the Current View list in the view pane. Click the plus sign next to the study ID to show the questions which share this one. Then right-click the question to be unshared and select Unshare. A dialog box displays. Click the OK button to confirm.
99
PrintDoc01 020813
NoteAfter you break a share between codebooks, the questions contain separate codebooks. The questions cannot be shared again unless one of the codebooks is deleted. In order to delete a codebook, you first have to delete any coding.
Account CodebooksNavigate: Supervisor/Account Codebooks
Codebook Editor/Go To Menu/Select Account CodebooksThe Account Codebooks page displays a list of codebooks that have been designated as account codebooks. The purpose of account codebooks is that you can use them as master codebooks to be shared or copied to other questions.
The codebooks will not be deleted if even no question references them.
You can designate a codebook as an account codebook by accessing the Codebook Properties dialog from the Codebook Editor (question ID right-click menu option) or the Copy/Share Manager. The codebook must have an ID in order to be designated as an account codebook. Each codebook ID must be unique.
If you no longer want a codebook to be an account codebook, right-click the codebook and select Edit to open the Codebook Properties dialog. Click the check box next to Account Codebook to change the designation. You can also access the Codebook Properties dialog from the Codebook Editor (question ID right-click menu option) or the Copy/Share Manager to change the designation.
When you restore a study that had an account codebook, the account codebook designation is not restored.
The Account Codebooks page has these columns (you can choose the columns displayed by selecting Choose Columns from the right-click menu):
Field DescriptionID The codebook ID.
Description An optional description of the codebook.Notes An optional field which lists additional information about the
codebook.
Length The number of codes and nets in the codebook.Shared Questions
The number of questions that share this codebook.
No Duplicate OutputID's
If there is a dot in this column, duplicate outputID's are not allowed in the codebook. If this column is empty, duplicate outputID's are allowed. For more information, see No Duplicate OutputID's on the Codebook Properties dialog.
Spread Between Codes
This field displays the value entered in the Spread Between Codes field on the Codebook Properties dialog.
ACM If a codebook is shared with a model, the name of the model displays.
100
Codebooks
The right-click menu options for this page are:
Option DescriptionEdit Opens the Codebook Properties dialog so you can edit the fields. If
you no longer want a codebook to be an account codebook, click the check box next to Account Codebook to change the designation.
Codebook Editor (Preview)
Navigates to the Codebook Editor. Because you are navigating from an account codebook, you will not have access to a Questions List on the View Pane side or be able to navigate to a Questions page from Go To menu on the toolbar.
NoteDrop-Down BoxesSeveral columns on this screen display drop-down boxes when left-clicked. A hand icon displays when you hover over these fields. The drop-down boxes can open with a single click or a double click. Choose the method you prefer in User Options. To close the drop-down box, click Close, left-click twice in the box, or click once anywhere on the other columns.
101
VerbatimsAscribe™ has several ways for handling verbatims, typically based on the coding task at hand.
Code Verbatims in the Coder Window— In this window, the coder is presented with one verbatim at a time and can easily access other information to help decide how to code the response.
Code Verbatims in the Review Responses Window— This function has advanced capabilities to search and manage the codes and responses. For example, you can search the verbatims for specific phrases and then code all those responses at one time.
Code Verbatims in the Phrase Analyzer Window— This function is an advanced version of the auto-coder. It provides flexible facilities to separate verbatims for short responses, to build codebooks, and to code the responses.
Multi-Media Coding—Ascribe™ supports coding from images and sound files. Coding from images is designed for scanned paper surveys, where the images are pictures of the handwritten responses.
Edit Verbatims— You can edit both the respondents and the responses in a variety of ways.
Translate/Transcribe Verbatims— Ascribe™ supports the translation of data into many languages and is completely Unicode compliant. Ascribe™ also supports the transcription of verbatims from both visual and sound files.
Filter – Set a Response Filter— You can set a filter to view only those responses that meet your criteria. For example, you may want to see just the respondents that answered "Yes" to a previous question.
Studies in ProgressNavigate: Coder/Studies in Progress
A study displays in this list only if both of the following are true: the study status is In Progress, and the Code task is checked in the Questions Properties for at least one question in the study. This page can also be filtered, based on the settings in the filter bar at the top of the page.
The text filter in the bar allows you to filter studies by study ID or study name. To show only studies whose ID or name starts with certain characters, enter those characters in the Filter box and click the Update button. For example, if you enter " abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or Name start with abc will be shown in the list.
To find studies whose ID or name contains certain characters, put an asterisk as the first character of the filter. For example, if you enter "* abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or name contains abc will be shown in the study list.
The Assigned to Me check box means "only display studies that are assigned to me a coder (or a transcriber/translator.)" See Assign a Coder to a Study for more information.
When you right-click a study, you have options to navigate to other parts of Ascribe™ or edit the study. See Studies in Progress Right-Click Menu for more information.
103
Columns on the Studies in Progress PageThe Studies in Progress page contains these columns (you can choose the columns displayed by selecting Choose Columns from the right-click menu):
Field DescriptionDue Date The date this study is expected to be completed.
Study ID The unique identifier for the study. If you left-click this field, a drop-down box displays study information. You can navigate to the Study Question page if you click the Questions button on drop-down box toolbar.
Study Name The name of the study.Questions The number of questions in the study. The drop-down box for this
field displays information about the questions.Description A description of the study.Assigned To This column displays users assigned to this study. For more
information, see Assign a Coder to a Study.Responses Coded SectionCoded
The number of responses coded.
Total The total number of responses in the study.% The percentage of responses coded.Responses Transcribed Section
Transcribed
The number of responses transcribed.
Total The total number of responses in the study.% The percentage of responses transcribed.Responses Translated SectionTranslated
The number of responses translated.
Total The total number of responses in the study.% The percentage of responses translated.Client The company assigned as the client for this study.End Customer The company assigned as the end customer for this study.Supervisor The associate designated as the supervisor of this study. The
drop-down box displays supervisor details.Help Help for this study, intended to assist coders with information
about the study.
104
Client Access to Data
NoteSeveral columns on this screen display drop-down boxes when left-clicked. A hand icon displays when you hover over these fields. The drop-down boxes can open with a single click or a double click. Choose the method you prefer in User Options.To close the drop-down box, click Close, left-click twice in the box, or click once anywhere on the other columns.
Studies in Progress Right-Click MenuThe right-click menu on the Studies in Progress page has the following options:
Option DescriptionQuestions in Progress
Navigates to the Questions in Progress page for this study.
Edit Respondent Navigates to Edit Respondent page.
Choose Columns Navigates to the Choose Columns dialog box, which allows you to choose the columns to be displayed on this page.
Questions in ProgressNavigate: Coder/Studies in Progress/Right-click a study/Select Questions in Progress
Select the question you want to code from the list. Right-click on the question you want and select Code this question from the list.
A question will appear in this list only if the Code task is checked in the Question Properties dialog or on the Tasks field on the Questions page.
If you have transcriber privilege, you can also edit the responses in the question, whether they are coded or not. To review and edit responses, select Edit Responses from the right-click menu.
The filter bar at the top of the page is used to filter the list of questions displayed, by question type and by text. The Filter text box matches questions whose ID or label starts with or contains the text. To display questions whose ID or label starts with certain characters, type the characters in the Filter box and click Update. To display questions whose ID or label contains certain characters, type an asterisk as the first character in the Filter box, followed by the characters you want to find. For example, "*like" displays those questions whose ID or label contains "like".
The check boxes at the top of the screen control the type of questions displayed. Click the boxes to select the question types, and then click the Update button. Only the question types that have check marks in the boxes will display.
The Assigned to Me check box means "only display studies that are assigned to me a coder (or a transcriber/translator.)" See Assign a Coder to a Study for more information.
The Study ID and Study Name display above the question fields, on the left side of the screen.
105
PrintDoc01 020813
Each question has several fields. Because there are so many fields, you can choose which ones display from the Choose Columns page. For information about other right-click menu options, see Questions in Progress Right-Click Menu.
NoteSeveral columns on this screen display drop-down boxes when left-clicked. A hand icon displays when you hover over these fields. The drop-down boxes can open with a single click or a double click. Choose the method you prefer in User Options. To close the drop-down box, click Close, left-click twice in the box, or click once anywhere on the other columns.
Fields on the Questions in Progress PageHere are the available fields for the Questions in Progress page:
Field DescriptionQuestion ID
A short identifier for the question. Each question ID should be unique within a study. Click this field to display a drop-down box with study and question information.
Question Label
A short name for the question. This label is used in the cross-tab report and in other places where a short form of the question name is required for display purposes.
Question Text The field displays the question text information from the General Tab.
Question Help The field displays the question help information from the General Tab.
Question Type This field displays the type of question. Users with supervisor privilege can change the question type at any time through the drop-down box on the Question page or through the Questions Properties dialog.You can select the type of questions that display on the Questions in Progress page with the check boxes in the gray bar at the top of the page. After you make your selections, click the Update button to refresh the screen.
Coding Source This field displays the information from the Coding Tab. It refers to the portion of the response (verbatim, transcription or translation) coded by the coder.
Codebook ID The ID of the codebook used to code this question. A drop-down box displays codebook information.
Assigned To The Assigned To field displays coders and transcribers assigned to the question. For more information, see Assigned To column on the Studies page.
Responses Coded SectionCoded
The number of responses that have at least one code applied.
Total The total number of responses for this question.
% The percentage of responses that have at least one code applied.
106
Client Access to Data
Responses Transcribed SectionTranscribed
The number of responses that have a transcription. This column will display only if transcriptions are licensed for your account.
Total The total number of responses for this question.% The percentage of responses that have a transcription.Responses Translated SectionTranslated
The number of responses that have a translation. This column will display only if translations are licensed for your account.
Total The total number of responses for this question.% The percentage of responses that have a translation.Responses Referred
The number of responses in this question that were referred to a supervisor for more information.
Max Codes The maximum number of codes to output for this question.
Questions in Progress Right-Click MenuWhen you right-click a question, you have options to code a question or to navigate to other pages. Here are the options on the right-click menu:
Option DescriptionCode This Question
This option displays the Coder Window.
Review Responses
This option displays the Review Responses page.
Edit Responses This option displays the Edit Responses page.Phrase Analyzer
The option displays the Phrase Analyzer page, which has advanced capability for coding short verbatims.
Auto-Apply Codes
This option allows you to automatically code closed-ended and other specify questions.
Studies in Progress
The option displays the Studies in Progress page.
Choose Columns Navigates to the Choose Columns dialog box, which allows you to choose the columns to be displayed on this page.
Code Verbatims in the Coder WindowNavigate: Coder/Studies in Progress/Right-click a study/Select Questions in Progress/Right-click a question/Select
Code This QuestionA user with coder privilege only must navigate to the Studies in Progress page to see a list of studies that are ready to be coded. To select a study, right-click the study and select Questions in Progress.
On the Questions in Progress page, the coder selects a question to code. To select a question, right-click a question and select Code this question. The Coder Window displays.
107
PrintDoc01 020813
The Coder Window DefinedThe Coder Window has several panes. These panes always display: verbatim, selected codes, and codebook. The other panes display if certain settings are used. The settings are described in the sections that follow.
Question
VerbatimCodebook
Notes
Summary
Selected Codes
Related Responses
Question PaneThis pane displays the ID and text of the question you are coding. The question pane appears only if you have selected Show Question in the Settings dialog.
Verbatim PaneThis pane displays the normalized verbatim to code. The gray bar above the verbatim displays the respondent ID next to the arrows and the number of responses that remain to be coded. The current verbatim is not included in this count. The gray bar also has these buttons:
Button DescriptionClick the Apply Codes button, and you will code the response with the codes that appear in the selected codes pane. The next verbatim then displays. Once you have applied codes to a verbatim, the verbatim will not be displayed again in this window unless you uncode the verbatim. This button is the same as the Apply Codes button in the codebook pane.This button shows you the first uncoded verbatim. It does not apply codes to the currently displayed verbatim. If you have selected codes for the verbatim, they will be discarded. If you have made changes in the transcription pane, these changes will be saved when you click this button.This button shows you the next uncoded verbatim. It does not apply codes to the currently displayed verbatim. If you have selected codes for the verbatim, they will be discarded. If you have made changes in the transcription pane, these changes will be saved when you click this button.
Codebook Pane (Coder Window)This pane displays the set of available codes and has a variety of options for the coder.
108
Client Access to Data
Gray Bar Options
The gray bar above the codebook has these options.Button/Box Description
Click the Apply Codes button, and you will code the response with the codes that appear in the selected codes pane. The next verbatim then displays. This button is the same as Apply Codes button in the verbatim pane.Search for a code value or text in the codebook:
Type the text you want to find in the box next to the Find Code button and click Find Code or press Enter. Ascribe™ highlights in yellow the code that you found.
To continue the search through the codebook, press Enter. Each time you press Enter, a code is highlighted if it matches
your search. If no code matches your search, nothing is highlighted.
Once a code is found, the Settings dialog controls how the codes are selected and the responses are coded.
Check this box to display only responses that are reviewed. This setting uses the coding source for the response to determine whether the response is reviewed. For example, if the coding source is the verbatim, then only responses with the reviewed setting checked for the verbatim are selected. If the coding source is the translation, then only responses with the reviewed setting checked for the translation are displayed.
Change the Codebook Display
You can change how you view the codebook:
To collapse the view of a net, click the bullet to the left of the net. This action hides the codes in the net and displays only the name of the net.
To expand the view of a collapse net, click the bullet to the left of the net. This action displays the codes that were hidden.
View Coded Responses for a Code
Also in the codebook pane, you can view how a code has been used. Right-click any code text and choose Coded Responses. A dialog displays with the responses in this question that have this code applied. To close the window, click the Close button.
Uncode Responses
The Coded Responses dialog box also has an option to uncode responses. To select a response, click the box next to the response. You can select multiple responses. Next, click the Responses to be Recoded button. All codes are removed from the response, and it is placed back in line to be coded. Click the Close button to close the window.
Notes PaneThis pane allows you to enter notes about a verbatim. The pane displays only if you have selected Show Notes in the Settings dialog. You can enter notes for any response. For example, you can make notes about a portion of the verbatim that requires later coding.
109
PrintDoc01 020813
Regular expressions in the codebook display for both the verbatim and the note as you code.
Three Methods to Create a Note
You can create a note in several ways:
Click just below the gray bar at the top of the notes pane. A blinking cursor appears. Type the note text.
Highlight a piece of the verbatim and drag it to the notes pane. Copy a piece of the verbatim or any text and paste it in the notes pane.
After You Create a Note
Once you create a note, you have several options:
Move to the next response without coding. Press Enter with the cursor in the notes pane. Ascribe™ saves the note and moves to the next response.
Code the response and save the note. Select codes for coding, and click the Apply Codes button. Ascribe™ saves the note and applies the selected codes. The next response displays. Once you have coded a response, you can not change the note in the Coder Window without uncoding the response. You can change notes for coded verbatims in Review Responses (use the Edit Verbatims option from the right-click menu in the response pane.)
Delete the note. Click the note, and a blinking cursor displays. Use the backspace or the delete key to remove the entire note. You can continue coding that response or move to the next response.
Selected Codes PaneThis pane displays the codes you have selected for this response. The codes shown in this pane are the ones applied to the verbatim when you click the Apply codes button in the verbatim pane or the codebook pane.
You can select codes in several ways:
Click a code in the codebook pane Click a highlighted expression in the verbatim pane Use Find Code in codebook pane.
To remove a code, left-click the code in the selected codes pane. It is removed from the pane.
Related Responses PaneThis pane displays responses to other questions that are related to this question. This pane displays only if a supervisor has set up related questions for the question you are coding.
Summary PaneThe summary pane displays only when you choose a number other than 0 for the Summary setting. To change this setting, select Settings from the right-click menu in the codebook pane.
The summary pane displays only nets, and only to the level you choose in the Summary setting. When you click an entry in the summary list, the corresponding net in the codebook
110
Client Access to Data
is expanded. All other nets in the codebook are collapsed. This function can help you find codes in large codebooks.
How to Code in the Coder WindowThe verbatim pane displays the response to be coded. You can either use the codebook pane or use expressions to select codes. You can use both methods to code the same response.
Code with the Codebook Pane
Use these steps to code in the codebook pane:
1. Left-click a code in the codebook pane to select it. The code displays in the selected code pane.
2. Continue to select codes as necessary.3. After you select enough codes, click one of the Apply Codes buttons. The codes
are applied, and the next verbatim displays.Note
You can not select a net for coding. You can only select codes.
Code with Expressions
Use these steps to code with expressions:
1. If Ascribe™ finds an expression for the verbatim, that text is underlined and highlighted.
2. Use the cursor to hover over the text to see the suggested code.3. If the suggested code is the right one for the text, click the highlighted text to
select the code. The code displays in the selected code pane.4. Continue to select codes as necessary.5. After you select enough codes, click one of the Apply Codes buttons. The codes
are applied, and the next verbatim displays.Code by Number
If you like to work from the numeric keypad only, select all four of the Find Code options in the Settings dialog. These options help you code efficiently from the numeric keypad. Use this method to code:
1. Enter the number of the first code you wish to apply in the Find Code search box. Press Enter. The code is selected and placed in the selected codes pane.
2. Continue to enter numbers of additional codes and press Enter after each number.
3. After you have selected all of the codes, press Enter again. This action applies the codes and moves to the next response.
Remove Codes
If you decide that a selected code is not right, you can remove it before you apply it. Left-click the code in the selected code pane, and it is removed from the list.
111
PrintDoc01 020813
Right-Click MenuThe codebook pane has additional options for the coder, such as a right-click menu. To see the right-click menu options, right-click in the white space next to the codes. A menu with these options displays:
Option DescriptionHelp Connects to the online help for this page.Question List Navigates to the list of questions for the study.Edit the Codebook Navigates to this question in Edit the Codebook.Codebook Editor (Preview)
Navigates to the Codebook Editor.
Review Responses Navigates to this question in Review Responses.Print Prints the codebook with a time/date stamp and includes any help
text under the code in italics. (Entire codebook will be printed).Postpone Sends the current response to the end of the responses to make it
the last response you will see. Useful when you wish to delay coding a response.
Undo code Allows you to "undo" all codes applied to the last response coded. You may uncode as many responses as you code during a single session.
Refer to Supervisor Refer a response to the study’s supervisor.Reclassify Reclassify a response to another questionFilter Allows you to see only the responses that meet your criteria.Settings Allows each individual user to define the default settings for the
coder window.Question Info Displays information from the Study and Question set-up screens.Other Responses Displays the current respondent’s responses to all of the questions
in the study. Use this before reclassifying a response or if the respondent says "See previous answer.”
All Responses Displays all responses for the current question. A table displays respondent id, verbatim, translation, transcription, notes, and codes applied.
Open Sessions Displays the users who are logged into Ascribe™.Go To Gives you the default right-click menu.
112
Client Access to Data
Refer to SupervisorChoose Refer to Supervisor when you wish to communicate with a supervisor about a response. Your supervisor will receive an indication that you have referred this response and will then reply. Use referrals to communicate questions, to request a new code or net, or to train new coders.
Create a Referral
Right-click in the white space next to the codebook and select Refer to Supervisor. A dialog box displays. Enter your reason for the referral, and click OK. When you refer a response, it is not available for coding until the supervisor has responded to your referral.
Reply to a Referral
To see a list of referrals, navigate to Supervisor/Referrals. If the My studies only box is checked, you will see only those studies assigned to you as the supervisor. If this box is not checked, all studies are displayed. Any supervisor may respond to a referral, even if that person is not the supervisor assigned to the study.
113
PrintDoc01 020813
To reply to a referral, right-click the referral and choose Edit. The study information and verbatim display, along with a response box. Enter your answer in the box and click OK. The verbatim is removed from the list of referrals and is available to be coded.
View a Response to a Referral
114
Client Access to Data
The next time the referred response displays to a coder, a button appears to the left of the response. Left-click the Responses to Referrals button, and a window displays with the supervisor’s reply.
Reclassify a ResponseTo reclassify a response means to copy the response from the original question to another question. This action is useful when the respondent gives a response to one question that is really a response to a different question. For example, a respondent gives a 'dislikes' response to a 'likes' question. In this case, you can reclassify the response to the 'dislikes' question.
When you reclassify a response, the text of the response is copied to the target question. However, the response remains in the original question and still needs to be coded. (How you code the original response depends on your department’s coding rules.)
NoteOnly text responses can be reclassified. Numeric and media responses (such as pictures and audio) can not be reclassified. If you try to reclassify a non-textual response, the list of available questions will be empty. If you try to reclassify a text response to a question where the same respondent has a non-text response, the reclassify operation will have no effect.Append a Response or Create a Response
Two situations can exist when you reclassify. First, the respondent answers both questions (the original question and the question that is the target of the reclassify.) Or, second, the respondent only answers the original question.
When the respondent answers both questions, the response is copied and appended to respondent’s answer in the target question.
115
PrintDoc01 020813
When the respondent only answers the original question, the response is copied to target question. However, this action does two things. First, a response is created in the target question for the respondent. Second, the number of responses to the target question increases by one. Therefore, the quota and load totals may not match at the end of the study. It is possible to have more responses than were originally loaded because of reclassification.
Because reclassification allows the coder to create data, it should be used with care. In most instances, you should check the response to the target question with the Other Responses option. You may not need to reclassify if the idea was covered in the respondent’s verbatim to the target question.
How to Reclassify
To reclassify a response:
1. Select Reclassify from the right-click menu. The Reclassify dialog displays.2. Choose the target question from the drop-down menu and click the OK button.
Display of a Reclassified Response
When you reclassify a response, a note is added before the copied response in both the original question and the target question. For example, if a response is copied from question 7 to question 8, this note would display in question 7 before the copied response: {-- copied to q8 --}. A note also displays before the response in question 8: {-- copied from q7 --}.
Customize the Coder Window with SettingsAscribe™ allows you to change aspects of the Coder Window through the Settings function of the right-click menu. Just adjust the check marks illustrated below, and you can customize how the window works.
116
Client Access to Data
The setting dialog has the following options:
Section Option DescriptionWindows Allows you to choose which panes display on the
Coder Window. Summary Levels Displays the nets of the codebook in the summary
pane. If you have a large codebook, you can use this option to see only a section of it. The number in the box controls the nets that display. Summary level 1 displays all of the nets. Summary level 2 displays both nets and subnets. Summary level 0 hides the summary pane.
Show Notes Displays the notes pane. Show Question Displays the question ID and question text in the top
pane of the Coder Window. Wide Verbatim Pane Allows you to extend the verbatim pane across the
entire screen. This option is when coding large responses or scanned image verbatims.
Magnification Allows the user to determine the size of scanned image verbatims that display in verbatim pane. A setting of 100% means no magnification, and the image is displayed at normal size. Settings below 100 shrink the image. Settings above 100 expand image.
Find Allows you customize how the Find Code button works.
Select Code Found Selects the first code that meets your search criteria and places it in the selected code pane. The effect is the same as if you clicked the code after it is found. You can click the Find Code button or press the Enter
117
PrintDoc01 020813
key to search and select codes. Each time you press Enter, the next code that is found is selected for coding.
Clear After Find Clears the Find Code area after a code has been found.
Apply Codes When Blank
When you press Enter or click the Find Code button after you find all of the codes and the search field is blank, all the selected codes are applied. This setting works in conjunction with Clear after Find setting.
Whole Word Limits the search to whole words only. This setting has the same effect as placing angle brackets around the text in the search field.
Coding Allows you to customize your coding style. Double-click to
Apply CodesAllows you to apply codes when you double-click anywhere in the codebook pane. If you double-click a code, it selects the code and applies all selected codes. If you double-click a net or the white space next to the codes, it applies all selected codes.
Code Duplicates If this option is selected, Ascribe™ checks all of the uncoded responses when it codes a response. If it finds an exact textual match, those matches are coded with the same code or codes that were selected. You may not want to use this option if the responses need to be reclassified or if the responses are very large.
Codebook Allows you to customize the codebook display. Show Code Values Allows you to toggle code values on and off. Show Net Values Allows you to toggle net values on and off. Use Short Menus Breaks the right-click menu into shorter menus by
category. The Go to… menu displays these
navigation options: Question List, Edit the Codebook, Review Responses, and Other Menus.
The View… menu displays these view options: Help, Print, Filter, Settings, Question Info, Other Responses, All Responses, and Open sessions.
The Actions… menu displays these functions that work on the current respondent: Postpone, Undo Code, Refer to Supervisor, and Reclassify.
The short menus are displayed below:
118
Client Access to Data
Code Verbatims in the Review Responses WindowThe Review Responses Window allows you to review and code multiple responses. It is different from the Coder Window which only permits coding of a one response at a time. Review Responses also has advanced capabilities to find and handle codes and responses.
There are several reasons to use the Review Responses Window:
Change coding and perform quality review. You can check the coders’ work, change coding, check miscellaneous mentions codes for ‘codeable’ ideas, adjust netting, and perform other quality review.
Build codebooks. Review Responses has tools to analyze the verbatims and allows you to build codebooks based on this analysis.
Expert mode coding. Review Responses is often used for coding. Users can search for words or phrases, view all responses that match the search criteria, and code several responses at one time.
Also, you can use Review Responses to:
Test expressions Code brand lists Delete codes Add codes to the codebook Edit codes in the codebook Move code from one net to another Copy & paste a codebook from Microsoft Word, Excel®, or Notepad Swap one code for another to change coding View notes, transcriptions, or translations Edit notes, transcriptions, or translations View respondent’s responses to all the other questions within the study Filter on other questions within the study View counts and percents for the codes in a codebook See who applied codes to a response Renumber codebook Create a word count
The Review Responses Window DefinedNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Review Responses
The Review Responses Window has three panes: the response pane, the codebook pane and the button pane.
119
PrintDoc01 020813
Response pane Codebook pane
Button pane
Response PaneThe response pane displays responses and the codes applied to the responses. When you first display the Review Responses Window, the response pane is empty. To fill the response pane, use any of the commands in the codebook pane, such as the expression tester, and the buttons in the button pane. When responses display in the response pane, you can code them or change their coding. You can also change the display of the responses through View Options on the button pane and with the response pane right-click menu.
Codebook Pane The codebook pane displays the codebook. The study ID, study name, question ID, and question text display above the codebook. The codebook pane has a right-click menu that provides many of the same features as Edit the Codebook. For example, you can add codes, move codes, and edit the properties of codes. In addition, Review Responses has two unique features for viewing responses. They are match expression and expression tester.
Match ExpressionsYou can locate responses that contain matches to the regular expressions for codes. (Expressions are entered on the code properties dialog.) This function displays only uncoded responses. Coded responses are not matched.
To find responses that match a single code:
1. Click the Clear button to make sure no other codes are highlighted.2. Right-click a code and select Match Expression(s). Responses that match will
display in the response pane.To find responses that match any of multiple codes:
1. Click the Clear button to make sure no other codes are highlighted.2. Double-click the codes to select them.3. Right-click and select Match Expression(s). Responses that match any of the
expressions will display in the response pane.Expression TesterThe expression tester has several options to help you find responses. You can find responses with expressions or words. You can use it to show all coded responses or uncoded responses. To display the expression tester dialog, right-click a code or the white space next to the codebook. The options for expression tester are:
120
Client Access to Data
Option DescriptionEnter the expression to be tested
The text box and buttons below it control the search for responses. Enter the word or expression you want to use to match responses. You can enter a simple expression, a complex expression, a single word, several words, or just a period.
The text box defaults to a period if you right-click a code that has no expression.
A period by itself means ‘show all’ that match the button you select. For example, if there is a period by itself in the text box and you click show uncoded responses only, all of the uncoded responses will display.
The text box defaults to the code’s expression if you right-click a code that has an expression.
The Regular Expression section shows many ways to enter expressions for codes. These methods also apply when you enter expressions in the text box.
Show Uncoded Responses Only
Displays responses that have not been coded and that match the expression in the text box.
Show Coded Responses Only
Displays responses that have been coded and that match the expression in the text box.
Show All Responses Displays all responses that match the expression in the text box. Both coded and uncoded responses display.
From Current Result Set
The current result set means the responses that are displayed currently in the response pane. This option limits the search to just the responses that are displayed.
Return First ( ) Responses
Leave the field blank to see all responses that meet the criteria. You can limit the number of responses if you enter a number in the field.
Test It Click the Test It button to start the search.Cancel Click the Cancel button to close the expression tester dialog and
cancel the search.
Button PaneThe button pane has the following buttons:
Button/Box DescriptionResponses - All Displays all of the responses that are coded with the selected code.
If you select more than one code, Ascribe™ displays responses that are coded with all of the selected codes. It acts like the ‘and’ operator in a Boolean search. To use this function:
1. Double-click one or more codes in the codebook pane. The code or codes are highlighted with yellow.
2. Click the Responses – All button. The responses display in the response pane.
Responses – Any Displays all of the responses that are coded with the selected code or codes. If you select more than one code, Ascribe™ displays responses that are coded with any of the selected codes. It acts like
121
PrintDoc01 020813
the ‘or’ operator in a Boolean search. To use this function:1. Double-click one or more codes in the codebook pane.
The code or codes are highlighted with yellow.2. Click the Responses – Any button. The responses display
in the response pane.Clear Removes responses from the response pane and removes the
highlight from all codes in the codebook pane.View Options Allows the user to choose display and view options for the
responses and codebook. Word List Displays a list of words and the frequency that they appear in the
responses. It is helpful when you build codebooks because you can see what words are used. The Word List also displays the number of unique words in the responses, the total number of words in a question, and the average number of words per response. The Word List Options in the View Options dialog controls how the Word List is displayed.The Word List also has a feature for displaying responses. When you double-click a word, Ascribe™ displays all responses (coded and uncoded) that contain the word.
Set Response Filter Displays the Response Filter dialog, which allows you to filter the responses displayed in the response pane.
Select Responses and Apply Codes in Review ResponsesThe Review Responses Window provides more flexibility in coding than the Coder Window. For example, you can code one response at a time or you can code several.
Code a Single Response
122
Client Access to Data
You can code one response at a time through the drag-and-drop method. Left-click a code in the codebook pane and drag it to the response. Drop the code when the response turns red.
Code Multiple ResponsesYou can code more than one response at a time when you select multiple responses.
1. To select multiple responses, double-click each response or hold down Control (Ctrl) and left-click each response. The codes will be highlighted in blue. (To deselect a response and remove the highlight, double-click the response again.)
2. Drag a code from the codebook pane and drop it on one of the highlighted responses. Each response will display the selected code. You can continue to drag and drop as many codes as necessary.
3. After you have applied all of the codes, right-click in the response pane and select Clear all responses. This action deselects the responses and removes the highlight. You can continue coding other responses. If you do not remove the highlight, you will continue to add codes to these responses.
If you want to code all of the responses in the response pane at the same time, there is a quick method to select all of them. Right-click in the response pane and choose Select all Responses. This option is useful when you expression test for one word answers like ‘none’ or ‘nothing.’
Avoid Partially-Coded DataAfter you apply a code to a response, the response is considered coded. The response will not display when you use the expression tester to see uncoded responses. You want to make sure you have completely coded a response or established a way to track the uncoded portion before you perform new actions.
For example, you apply one code to a response, but notice it needs a second code. If you press the Clear button or refresh your screen at this point, all responses on the left side of the screen are cleared from the screen. Any response with a code is considered coded and won’t appear when you bring up uncoded responses.
You can see coded responses with the show coded responses only button on the expression tester. Or you can select a code and click the responses all button to see the responses that use that code.
Right-Click Menu in the Response PaneThe response pane contains the responses that you’ve selected either through the expression tester, or use of the responses all or response any buttons. After the responses are on the screen, you can right-click, and the following menu displays.
123
PrintDoc01 020813
Option DescriptionFind Code Allows you to highlight part of a response and find a code that
matches it. To use this option, highlight a word in a verbatim, right-click the highlighted word, and select Find Code. Ascribe™ finds and highlights the code that matches the word.
Add to Notes Allows you to highlight part of the response and add it to the Notes field. To use this option, highlight a word or phrase in a response, right-click the highlighted words, and select Add to Notes. Ascribe™ adds the highlighted text to the existing note or creates a new note. To see the notes, the user should have the additional display field under View Options set to notes.
Edit Response Allows you to edit the text fields (translation, transcription, and notes) for a respondent. (You can not edit the response here. You can use the Edit Responses Window to change the verbatim.) To use this option, right-click any response and select Edit Response. The Edit Response dialog displays. The dialog displays the response, the transcription, the translation and the notes fields. You can add, delete, copy or paste text into all of the fields except the response field.
Mark as Quality Reviewed
Allows you to mark responses as quality reviewed. To use this option, double-click responses to select and highlight them. Right-click a highlighted response and select Mark as Quality Reviewed. A dialog box displays with the number of responses processed. Click Ok. The respondent ID changes color. (You choose the color in the respondent ID color field under View Options.)
Clear Quality Reviewed
Clears the quality review status from a response. It also changes the respondent id back to its original color.To use this option, double-click responses to select and highlight them. Right-click a highlighted response and select Clear Quality Reviewed. A dialog box displays with the number of responses processed. Click Ok. The respondent ID changes color.
ACM - Add to Training Examples
This option is only available when the question is associated with the model. It allows you to add the selected responses as training examples for the model. A dialog opens with these options:Language - If there is more than one language in the model, you can select which language to use. If there is only one language, that language is the default and cannot be changed. Quality Reviewed Responses Only - Add only responses that have been quality reviewed. New Responses Only - Add only responses that do not already exist in the model; duplicate responses will not be added. Coded Only - Add only responses that have been coded. Apply Coding - Add the responses and the coding.
ACM - Update This option is only available when the question is associated with
124
Client Access to Data
Training Examples the model. It allows you to replace the coding of matching examples in the model with the coding of the selected responses. A dialog opens with these options:Language - If there is more than one language in the model, you can select which language to use. If there is only one language, that language is the default and cannot be changed. Quality Reviewed Responses Only - Use only responses that have been quality reviewed.
Clear all Responses Removes the highlight from the responses. The highlight means that a response is selected. When you remove the highlight, the response is no longer selected. After you clear the responses, the responses stay on the screen.
Clear all Codes Removes the highlight from the codes. The highlight means that a code is selected. When you remove the highlight, the code is no longer selected.
Select all Responses Highlights in blue all responses in the response pane. The highlight means that the responses are selected.
Select all Same Code Allows you to select the same code from all of the responses currently displayed in the response pane. This is helpful when you want to swap one code for another or delete a code from a number of responses.
Remove Selected Codes
Deletes all of the codes you have selected. (Selected codes are highlighted in yellow.) You can not undo this action.
Hide Selected Responses
You can hide responses to make the screen less cluttered.
Show all Images Expands all image files loaded into the study. Allows the user to browse through the images.
Hide all Images Collapses all image files back to a link.Other Responses Allows you to see a list of that respondent’s answers to all of the
questions in the study. This option is helpful for responses that say ‘see previous answers.’
125
PrintDoc01 020813
See Who Applied a Code to a ResponseWhen multiple coders are assigned to the same question, you may need to see which coder applied a code to a response. When you hover over an applied code, the coder’s name displays at the bottom left corner of your screen. Ascribe™ keeps track of who applied which code to each response. When saving and restoring studies prior to 01/29/2010, Ascribe™ did not restore the name of the coder. After that date, the coder name is restored.
If you use shared codebooks and need to see which question the response is in, you can see the question ID when you hover over the response or the applied code.
See the Question ID When You Use Shared CodebooksWhen you code questions that share a codebook, you can view the question ID for each response. When you hover over the response, the respondent ID, or the codes, the question ID displays.
126
Client Access to Data
See How Many Responses You Have Left to Code in a QuestionWhen you use the expression tester to display all uncoded responses, the number of responses and the percentage display in the bottom left corner of the screen. This number is displayed every time you use a filter, the expression tester, or display responses. If you use shared codebooks, the number and percentage include all responses in the shared questions.
View OptionsView options allow you to select how the codebook and responses are displayed. After you select the options, click OK.
127
PrintDoc01 020813
Option DescriptionCoding Source Coding Source determines which field will be returned for coding. It
defaults to display the coding source set on the coding tab of the Question Edit screen. It is usually the verbatim. The coding source can also be translation or transcription if the coder needs to code from either of those fields. The coding source can be toggled off if the coder only wishes to view the Additional Display.
Additional Display The additional display selection allows the user to choose another text field to view along with the coding source. The additional display text is displayed after the coding source text. It is displayed in italics to allow the user to distinguish between the coding source and the additional display. The options are:
None – No additional display Verbatim – Displays the verbatim which is useful when
the coding source is set to transcription or translation Transcription – Displays the text in the transcription
field Translation – Displays the text in the translation field Notes – Displays the text in the notes field.
Additional Display Filter
The first filter is related to the additional display field. It allows users to display responses based on whether or not the additional display text boxes are empty. The default setting is "With or without" (additional display). The options are:
With or without (additional display) – displays all responses whether they have information in the additional display field or not
Without (additional display) – displays only those responses that do not have text in the additional display field
With (additional display) – displays only those responses that have information in the additional display field.
Review Status Filter This filter allows users to display responses based on the quality reviewed status. The options are:
Any Review Status – displays responses with any review status
Not Reviewed – displays responses that have not been marked as quality reviewed
Reviewed only – displays responses that have been marked as quality reviewed.
Coder Filter This filter allows users to display responses that were coded by all coders or by one coder. The default is all coders. You can select one coder from the list of coders who worked on the study.
Coded Since This filter allows users to display responses that have been coded since a specified date. It defaults to "Any Date." Click the text box to display a calendar and select a date. To reset the filter, click Clear Date. Note that the calendar is based on GMT.
Coding Method Filter This filter allows users to display responses by coding method. The default is Any Coding Method. The options are:
128
Client Access to Data
Manually Coded - displays responses that were coded in the Coder Window, Review Responses, Phrase Analyzer, or the Multiple Responses Window in Desktop.
Any Auto Coded - displays responses that were coded automatically when loaded, with the Auto Coder script, or with Text AutoCoder in Desktop.
ACM Coded - displays responses that were coded with the Automated Coding Model.
Inspector Coded - display responses that were coded by Inspector.
Sort Order This field determines the order that responses are displayed in the response pane. The default is by respondent ID, but most users change the field to by response for coding purposes. The options are:
By Respondent ID – the responses are displayed in respondent ID order (alphanumerically)
By Question ID, Respondent ID – the responses are displayed alphanumerically by question ID and by respondent ID. This option is only for shared codebooks.
By Response – the responses are displayed alphabetically by verbatim
By Transcription - the responses are displayed alphabetically by transcription
By Translation – the responses are displayed alphabetically by translation
By Notes – the responses are displayed alphabetically by the notes field
By Text Length - the responses are displayed from shortest to longest.
Code Book Display These fields control the display of the codebook. The options are: Display Codes Only – displays codes in alpha order
without any nets or subnets. You cannot move the codes around in the codebook (drag and drop actions within the codebook are disabled.) You can apply codes, add codes, deleted unused codes, and change the properties of codes. However, code swapping is disabled.
Show Details – displays the code counts and percentages. The code count is the number of respondents that use the code. The percentage is calculated as the code count divided by the total number of respondents coded.
Show Code Values – displays the output code value to the right of the code text
Show Net Values- displays the output value of the net to the right of the net text.
Response Source This field controls the access of data from all questions that share this codebook. If the field is toggled off, responses display only from the current question.
Respondent ID Color This field allows you to customize the color of the respondent ID of those verbatims marked as reviewed and not reviewed.
129
PrintDoc01 020813
Show Respondent ID This field allows you to display or not display the respondent ID. When you do not display the respondent ID, you will not know if the response has been marked as quality reviewed since the respondent ID color gives this indication. You will also not be able to use the right-click menu option to see the respondent's other responses. You can still code the responses.
Word List Options These options control how the Word List is created from the responses. The options are:
Delimiter – A list of characters that define where the responses are split before you view the word list. The default characters are the space character as well as ,./.
Characters to Ignore – A list of characters to ignore when the responses are displayed in the word list
Words to Ignore – A list of words to ignore when the responses are displayed in the word list.
Here are some common words to ignore: a able about actually also always am an and any anything are as at be because been being but by can could did do does for from gave get had has have how I if im in is it its itself ive just like liked many may me might much my of on or really said say says seemed seems so such tend than that the their them then there these they think this through to too until very was we were what when where which who why will with within would yet you your
Here are some common characters to ignore: 1=234567890+)(*&^%$#@!~’}{|\][“:;><,./!-
130
Client Access to Data
Swap One Code for AnotherAscribe™ has a quick way to swap codes or replace one code with another. For example, you may have multiple responses that with the same code that needs to be changed. A swap takes less steps than if you add a code to each response and then delete the code you did not want from each response.
To swap the same code for multiple responses:
1. Find all of the responses with the code that needs to be changed. One option is double-click the problem code in the codebook pane and right-click the Responses All button. All of the responses coded with this code display in the response pane.
2. Select the responses you wish to swap. One method is to right-click in the response pane and choose select all responses. Each response is highlighted in blue. You can remove responses from the selection if you double-click them.
3. Find the code you want to swap below one of the highlighted responses. Left-click the code and drag it to the desired code in the codebook pane. (You must drag the code from the response pane to the codebook pane.)
4. When the code in the codebook pane turns blue, and a plus sign displays, stop the left-click. A dialog box displays and asks, ‘Do you want to swap these codes for the selected responses?’
5. Click OK. The codes are swapped, and the responses remain highlighted until you clear them.
131
PrintDoc01 020813
Create a New Code from a Combination of CodesSometimes you may want to create a new code from some existing codes. For example, you notice a pattern among the respondents. You decide to create a new code called Really, Really Easy for all of the respondents who were coded with both WORKS WELL/QUICKLY and EASY/QUICK TO APPLY.
In the codebook pane on the right-hand side:
1. Highlight both WORKS WELL/QUICKLY and EASY/QUICK TO APPLY. Click the Responses Any button. The responses that have been coded with either code display in the response pane.
2. Add a code called Really, Really Easy to the codebook. (To add a code, right-click the codebook and select insert. Enter the code properties.)
3. Code each of the responses displayed in the response pane. (To code all of the responses, right-click any response and choose select all responses. Then drag the Really, Really Easy code to any of the responses.)
4. Delete the unwanted codes from the responses. Double-click the unwanted code WORKS WELL/QUICKLY beneath any of the responses to highlight it yellow.
132
Client Access to Data
5. Right-click the highlighted code and choose "Select all same code". Every WORKS WELL/ QUICKLY code on the left side of the screen is highlighted yellow.
6. Right-click again and choose remove selected codes.7. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the EASY/QUICK TO APPLY code.
Code Verbatims in the Phrase Analyzer WindowThe Phrase Analyzer feature is useful for coding short response answers, like other specify and brand lists. With it, you can code responses to all questions that share a codebook, code responses automatically, and create codebooks.
There are two basic ways to use Phrase Analyzer:
When you already have a codebook in place, like a brand list When you create a codebook from the loaded data.
In each case, it is useful to prepare the loaded data and combine the responses that have the same meaning, and then apply the codes or build the codebook. Phrase analyzer will also allow you to limit responses to a group of numerics only.
The Phrase Analyzer Window DefinedNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Questions/Right-click question/Select Phrase Analyzer
Phrase Analyzer has a window with three panes: the codebook displays in the right-hand pane, the parsed responses display in the left-hand pane, and the option buttons are in the bottom pane.
Parsed Responses pane Codebook pane
Options pane
133
PrintDoc01 020813
The Parsed Responses PaneThe left-hand pane in Phrase Analyzer displays a list of "parsed" responses. It displays portions of responses which have been parsed or split apart using some specific character or characters as the splitting points. These characters are referred to as delimiters. The initial view shows responses for a question which have been split apart using the vertical bar character ("|"). This action splits apart multiple responses to the same question for a respondent. The display groups all the same parsed response elements on one line together with a count of how many were combined into that line.
It is important to recognize that this display shows a list of pieces of responses. It is not necessarily a list of respondents’ verbatim answers to a given question. Depending on how it was parsed, a given respondent may actually be part of a number of lines in the list.
In the left-hand pane, you are able to manipulate the response lines with these options:
Re-parse them Visually combine the same ideas Create codebooks in an automated way from the response lines View respondents that make up the parsed response lines.
Right-Click Menu in the Parsed Responses PaneThe parsed responses pane has a right-click menu. Here are the available functions:
Function DescriptionFind Code This function finds a code that matches selected text. To use this
function, select a piece of text in a response, right-click in the left pane, and select Find Code. Ascribe™ searches the codebook for that text. When the text is found, the code is highlighted in the codebook pane.
Save Parse This function saves your current parsed responses. You should use this function if you want to stop coding but want to use these parses again.
134
Client Access to Data
Delete This Parse This function deletes the current parsed segments.New Response Parse This function allows you to parse the responses and enter which
characters to use as delimiters and which characters and words to ignore.
Parse Line This function splits or parses the response. To use this function: Put the cursor where you want to split the response. Press Alt and then left-click. The delimiter character
displays. Right-click in the parsed responses pane and select Parse
Line. The line splits where the delimiter was placed.Parse Selection This function parses the responses with the selected text. To use
this function, highlight some text and right-click in the parsed responses pane. Select parse selection. The lines are split before and after the selected text, with each part put on a new line.
Parse Expression You may use an expression to parse the responses. The matched text is removed from each line and grouped into its own line, but the line itself is not split apart. The matched segment of the text is replaced with a ‘~’. The combined line segment is moved to the top of the list of segments.
Combine Select the response lines that you want to combine, click the combine option, and the responses will be combined. The count of the combination is equal to the individual counts of the lines that you combined.
Add to Notes This function adds selected text to the coding notes for a response. This option is only available if some text has been selected or highlighted.
Add Selected Uncoded Segment to Notes
This function adds the text of the currently uncoded segment to the coding notes for a response. An uncoded segment is one that has a strikethrough displayed. It is created when another segment from the same response has been marked for coding, and the Apply Codes button was clicked.
Add All Uncoded Segments to Notes
This function adds the text of all uncoded segments to the coding notes for a response. An uncoded segment is one that has a strikethrough displayed. It is created when another segment from the same respondent has been marked for coding, and the Apply Codes button was clicked.
Ignore Current Uncoded Segment
This function allows you to ignore this segment when you apply codes. Ascribe™ applies codes even though not all of response has been marked for coding.
Ignore Selection This function causes the selected lines to be ignored. They remain unprocessed and uncoded.
Clear Selection Codes
This function removes the codes from that selection.
Clear All Codes This function removes all codes from all of the responses.Create Code This function creates a code from the selected text and places it in
the codebook pane. The created code will be applied to the
135
PrintDoc01 020813
selected text.Make Codebook This function creates an entire codebook from the response lines.
You must enter how many mentions at which to build the codebook.View Respondents This function displays a list of all respondents included in the
combined line item.
NoteAscribe™ does not automatically save your parsed data. In order to leave the page and return later, save your work with the "Save Parse" option.
How to Parse ResponsesTo parse responses means to split apart words by a delimiter character. The initial view of a question’s set of responses is parsed by the "|" character. Ascribe™ uses this same character when it combines multiple responses from the same respondent during the loading of data. If there are no multiple responses in the data from a given respondent, the list simply shows the responses to a question grouped by response. Identical responses are grouped together without considering case.
You can get a new parse of the entire response set when you choose New Response Parse from the right-click menu. You can enter delimiter characters as well as characters and words to ignore during the parse. The delimiters default to "|". Additional delimiters can be added.
For example, if the response was loaded with quotes as part of the data, it would display just as it is, with no additional delimiters.
However, if a comma is added to delimiters, it becomes:
136
Client Access to Data
But, the data is not grouped into matches because the quotes are still part of the data. If you add quotes as a delimiter, Ascribe™ matches the data and groups it into three lines:
You can enter as many delimiters and characters to ignore as you would like.
You can process the existing parse further with the Parse Selection option on the right- click menu. This action can be useful when a codebook does not exist.
For example, you have these responses in the display. Highlight the word "coke" in one of the lines:
Right-click and select Parse Selection from the menu. You now have:
Next, select Combine from the right-click menu. You know have:
Now, right-click the line with the word coke and select Create Code. A new codebook entry is created, and the word coke will be marked for coding.
You can also split up individual lines when you position the cursor at the point you wish to split, press Alt and left-click. A vertical bar ("|") appears. Repeat anywhere you wish to add additional line splits, including other lines. When ready, select the Parse Line option from the right-click menu.
You also can group responses manually through a drag-and-drop process. To do this, highlight text within a row and drag it to a different row. The highlighted text disappears. The count of items in the target row increases by one. If you highlight an entire row and drag it, the entire row disappears. This dragging process is useful for words that re misspelled. For example, you have these responses:
137
PrintDoc01 020813
I like coke
cokie is great
The second line will not auto code or group together with the other "cokes". If you highlight the second line and drag it to the "I like coke line", the two will now be coded as one.
Phrase analyzer allows you to limit responses to groups of numerics only. This action is useful when auto coding a question with both text and numeric responses, such as an Other Specify. To select this option, check the "Numerics Only" option in the new parse dialog window.
If you have created a new set of parsed data with any of the above methods, you need to save if it you wish to leave this window and return. PARSED DATA AND TEXT MARKED FOR CODING ARE NOT SAVED AUTOMATICALLY. Save the parsed data with the Save Parse option from the right-click menu.
The Options PaneThe options pane provides these selections:
Function DescriptionFrom This Question The responses to be parsed come from only the selected question.From Shared Codebook Questions
The responses to be parsed come from any question within the current study that share a codebook with the selected question.
Respondent View This option displays the respondent ids of responses which have been marked for coding.
Show Details This option displays the responses for each code.Show Nets This option displays the nets for the codebook. When it is not used,
the codebook displays in alphabetical order with only the codes.Apply Codes When you press the Apply Codes button, you apply codes to all of
the responses that are marked to be coded. This action is different than most other areas in Ascribe™, where codes are applied in real time.
The Codebook PaneThe right-hand codebook views are similar to those in the Review Responses and the Edit the Codebook windows with several significant differences.
138
Client Access to Data
The default view displays only the codes without nets. It lists them in alphabetical order rather than codebook order. This display is useful when you code from brand lists and other non-concept type of codes. The Show Details view lists the codes in alphabetical order, but also will expand each code to show the responses coded with that code. To expand or contract the display, double click the code or click the +/- icons. Finally, the "Show Nets" view displays the codebook with nets.
You can not rearrange the codebook, renumber the codes, or insert codes here since the codebook does not display in its true order. (Codes can be added with the Create Code option from the right-click menu in the parsed responses pane.) You can edit the properties of a code and delete unused codes. Here are the right-click menu options for the codebook pane:
Function DescriptionQuestions This option navigates to the Questions page.Code This Question This option navigates to the Coder Window.Review Responses This option navigates to the Review Responses Window.Edit The Codebook This option navigates to the Edit the Codebook Window.Codebook Editor (Preview)
The option navigates to the Codebook Editor.
Auto Code This option attempts to match a code to a response segment. If matched, the response segment is tagged for coding.
Delete This option deletes a code from the codebook if the code has not been used.
Properties This option displays the code properties dialog. You can change the code properties here.
139
PrintDoc01 020813
The Phrase Analyzer Coding ProcessIn general, the coding process is similar to the Coder Window. You select codes to be applied either by auto-coding or manually. When ready, you click the Apply Codes button to actually code the responses.
As you select codes to be applied to particular text (either entire rows or portions of text within a row), the text is "marked" with the code. This action is similar to the Coder Window where codes are listed in the selected codes pane as they are selected. When you use the auto-coder option, the marked text is indicated by a color change. The first code applied changes the text to red, the second to green, and the third to yellow. You can see which codes are applied when you hover over the colored text.
Auto Code in Phrase AnalyzerWhen you auto code, Ascribe™ attempts to match a code to a response segment. If matched, the response segment is tagged for coding. Codes are matched to response segments with these rules.
When the question is not closed ended:
If a portion of the text is highlighted, Ascribe™ uses the highlighted text to match a code.
If an expression exists for the code, Ascribe™ uses the expression to match a code. If the code text is highlighted, Ascribe™ uses the code text to match the responses.
When the question is closed ended, Ascribe™ uses the input IDs of the codes to match the responses.
You can also auto code in these ways. Place your cursor on a net, and you auto-code all of the codes in that net. Place it on a code, and you auto-code only that code. Place it on the question text, and you auto-code all the codes in the codebook. Any time a match is made, the matched text in the response line will be color-coded in red, green, or orange depending on the order that it has been coded.
This screen was generated by auto-coding the entire codebook. If you wish to uncode something, use Clear Selection Codes or Clear All Codes options from the right-click menu. The former removes the marked codes from the current row, and the latter removes all marked codes from all rows.
140
Client Access to Data
When ready, click the Apply Codes button. Any row with marked text will have the corresponding respondents coded with the marked code. Those respondents will be considered coded, and any text from their responses will no longer display in the parsed response list.
If a response has been parsed into several segments, and not all of the segments have a code applied, no codes will be added for that response. Instead, you will receive a message that not all codes could be applied. Segments without a code will display with a strikethrough. To continue coding, either ignore the strikethrough or apply codes to those segments.
Auto Code Value QuestionsValue questions have a numeric response which will be coded as a range. In order to auto code them with Phrase Analyzer, the input code value should be specified in this format: n:n, where the n's are the numbers in the range. For example, a code that represents the range of 1-10 should have an input value of 1:10, 11-20 should have an input value of 11:20, etc.
Once the input values are correctly set, you can use Phrase Analyzer to auto code the responses. Right-click the code and select Auto Code. The selected responses will be highlighted. Repeat for each code, and click Apply Codes to apply the codes.
Manual Coding in Phrase AnalyzerIn addition to the auto-code process, you can mark text for coding manually in several ways.
First, you can drag a code from the codebook to a row of parsed text. This action marks that row with the appropriate code.
You can also drag entire rows or highlighted portion of rows from the parsed response view to a code in the codebook.
Finally, you can drag responses from a non-marked row to a marked row. This action codes the non-marked row’s respondents the same as the marked row.
Remember to save your parsed views if you want to leave the screen and continue your work later.
141
PrintDoc01 020813
When you are finished, click the Apply Codes button. Any row with marked text will have the corresponding respondents coded with the marked code. Those respondents will be considered coded, and any text from their responses will no longer display in the parsed response list.
If a response has been parsed into several segments, and not all of the segments have a code applied, no codes will be added for that response. Instead, you will receive a message that not all codes could be applied. Segments without a code will display with a strikethrough. To continue coding, either ignore the strikethrough or apply codes to those segments.
Multi-Media CodingAscribe™ supports coding from images and sound files.
Coding from images is designed for scanned paper surveys, where the images are pictures of the handwritten responses. The user can code the image in the Coder Window or in the Review Responses Window. In the Coder Window, the written image will be visible.
When you code in Review Responses, double-click the word "image" to view the written image.
Coding from sound files is designed for working with voice files from IVR systems.
The user can code sound files in the Coder Window or the Review Responses Window. In the Coder Window, you can listen to the sound file if you click the play button in the audio box.
142
Client Access to Data
In Review Responses, click the blue text "Audio" to listen to the sound file.
Transcribe IVR and Image FilesNavigate: Transcriber/Transcribe/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Transcribe
Most users find it helpful to transcribe responses from IVR and image files prior to coding them. You can do transcription from the Transcribe page.
Audio Keyboard ShortcutsThe following default key combinations can be used to control the media player. You can change the keyboard key if you click the text box of the shortcut and enter a different key. Note that not all browsers or operating system will support all key combinations.
Activity Keyboard Shortcut
143
PrintDoc01 020813
Start/Pause Ctrl + S Start Over Ctrl + B Advance 30% Ctrl + Right ArrowRewind 30% Ctrl + Left ArrowVolume Up Ctrl + Up ArrowVolume Down Ctrl + Down ArrowAuto Translate Ctrl + TNext Response Ctrl + EnterNext ID/Respondent Ctrl + Page UpPrevious ID/Respondent Ctrl + Page DownCheck Spelling Ctrl + R
Edit VerbatimsAscribe™ offers two ways to edit verbatims. Edit Respondent allows you to view and edit a single respondent’s answers to every question in a study. Edit Responses allows you to view and edit all responses to a question.
Edit Respondent and Edit ResponsesEdit Respondent allows you to view and edit a single respondent’s answers to every question in a study at one time. Edit Responses allows you to view all responses to a question. Both windows have similar functions. The difference is that Edit Respondent displays one respondent at a time, and Edit Responses displays all responses to a single question. Here are the functions of the two windows:
View and edit verbatims: Correct the spelling of verbatims, fix verbatims wrongly reclassified from the coder window, and update a response with new information.
View and edit transcriptions: Transcribe audio and image files and quality check transcriptions (mark as reviewed.)
View and edit translations: Translate foreign languages and quality check translations (mark as reviewed.)
View and edit notes: Review notes and remove unwanted notes. Add a response. Delete a response (without deleting the entire respondent.)
Edit Respondent WindowNavigate: Coder/Studies in Progress/Right-click study/Edit Respondent
Transcriber/Transcribe/Right-click study/Edit RespondentTranscriber/Translate/Right-click study/Edit Respondent
The window is divided into two text columns. The column on the right can be edited, and the column on the left can not. Also, you can display the same column on both sides. For example, if you are changing a verbatim, you could select both columns to display verbatim.
144
Client Access to Data
The left would show the original verbatim, and the right would show the changed verbatim.
Controls and Options for the Edit Respondent WindowThe banner bar has these options:
Move to the first respondent.Move to the previous respondent. Also available from the right-click menu. The Page Up key is a shortcut for this button.Move to the next respondent. Also available from the right-click menu. The Page Down key is a shortcut for this button.Move to the last respondent.The respondent ID. To move to a specific respondent, enter the respondent ID and press Enter. This box displays in red if there is no respondent with this ID, or if there is no available respondent in the direction selected by one of the buttons above. Note that in most cases, respondent IDs in Ascribe™ will have any leading zeros stripped. So a respondent ID of "001" will be in the Ascribe™ database as "1" and will not match "001".Click this button to display the filter dialog. In this dialog, you can select the respondents to display by their responses to a set of questions. The filter button is yellow when a filter is applied.
Check spelling Check this box to enable the spell checker. The spell checker is available only if you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer.
Hide N/ACheck this box to hide any questions to which the respondent has no response. When this box is not checked, a question for which there is no response is displayed with a grey background.
Row height When this selection is blank, the rows change height to accommodate the size of the response. You can select a fixed number of rows to display with one of the options in this list.
These controls are available at the top of the left text columns:
Coding Status Indictor
The cell next to the question ID displays blue if the response is coded. It displays red if the response is locked because it is being coded, transcribed, or translated at the time you displayed this respondent. If cell has no color, the response has not been coded.
This menu selects the portion of the response to display in this column. Verbatim and Notes are always available. Transcription and Translation are available if licensed.
145
PrintDoc01 020813
The center menu selects the reviewed status of the responses. If you select "All reviewed", only those respondents that have all responses reviewed will be displayed.
This menu selects the blank status of the responses. If you select "None blank", only those respondents who have text in all responses will be displayed. There is not a requirement that the respondent have a response to all questions, but for each question with a response text must be present. This option has no effect when Verbatims are displayed (a response always has a verbatim, and it will be displayed even if it is blank).
These controls are available at the top of the right column:
This menu selects the portion of the response to display in this column. Verbatim and Notes are always available. Transcription and Translation are available if licensed.
If you select Transcription, only those questions with the transcription task checked on the question task tab will display. Similarly, if you select Translation, only those questions with the translation task checked will display.
The center menu down selects the reviewed status of the responses. If you select "Some not reviewed," only those respondents that have at least one response that is not reviewed will be displayed.
This menu selects the blank status of the responses. If you select "Some blank", only those respondents who have text missing in at least one response will be displayed. When used with Verbatims, this option will cause no responses to be displayed (a response always has a verbatim; it can never be missing).
Determine the Set of Questions DisplayedThe set of questions displayed (the rows in the table) is determined by two factors:
The setting of the Hide N/A check box. If this box is checked, only those questions for which there is a response will be displayed.
The properties of the question (selected on the Task Tab.) The Task Tab controls whether transcription or translation can be done for the question. When one of these is selected, only those questions with the corresponding transcribe or translate setting checked will be displayed
Move to Next RespondentThe set of respondents you can move to is determined by the combination of filters active on the page. These are:
The codes applied filter set using the Filter... dialog The reviewed status filters set using the center menu in each text column The blanks filters set using the right menu in each column.
146
Client Access to Data
If no filters are active, the set of respondents available is all respondents in the study. Otherwise, the set of respondents available is restricted to the set selected by the combination of filters.
When you use one of the navigation buttons in the banner bar, the next available respondent is displayed. If there is no available respondent, the respondent ID box shows red.
You can move to a specific respondent if you enter a respondent ID in the banner bar box, and press Enter. Again, that respondent will display only if available according to the active filters.
Translate, Transcribe, or Edit a VerbatimYou can translate, transcribe, or edit a verbatim on this page. If you click in the right column, a cursor appears, and you can type the desired text.
The Enter key moves the cursor downward to the next response. To enter a line break in the text, press the Shift-Enter key.
In this window, you can drag and drop text from one response to another.
You can edit transcriptions, translations, and notes for a response only if the respondent has an existing verbatim response to that question. If you have supervisor privilege, you can edit the verbatim for a response even if the respondent has no existing response to that question.
When you select Verbatims in the right column, a warning message displays. The message alerts you that when you edit verbatims, you have the ability to add responses. When you edit verbatims, the right column is editable even if the respondent has no existing response to the question. If you add text to a response where the leftmost column is grey (no existing response), a response is added to the question that respondent.
NoteIf you delete all of the text for a verbatim, the response is not deleted. The response remains as a blank response. To delete the response, select Delete Response from the right-click menu.You can not edit verbatims that do not contain text. For example, you can not edit images or audio responses. However, you can delete those responses.
Delete a ResponseSupervisor privilege is required to delete a response. Right-click a response and select Delete Response.
Spell Check in the Edit Respondent WindowIf you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer, you can check spelling in this window. To enable the spell checker, select the check spelling box at the top of the window.
When the spell checker is enabled, Ascribe™ checks the spelling of verbatims or transcriptions when you click on them or when you exit a cell. You can also request a spell check for the current cell by pressing the Esc key. Spell check is only performed for the right column and not the left column.
147
PrintDoc01 020813
Misspelled words are highlighted and underlined. You can correct the spelling if you type the box, or if you right-click the highlighted word and pick a word from the menu. (If the menu is empty, it means that Word could not find a suitable suggestion).
The spell checker "learns" as it works, and will operate faster as you continue to work in this page. When you leave the page, the spell checker "forgets" the words it has learned, and will start slowly again the next time you enter the page.
Because Ascribe™ uses Microsoft Word to check spelling, you can check spelling in multiple languages if you set up Word for the desired language. Ascribe™ will use the spelling dictionary that you have selected in Word.
Ascribe™ also uses the Microsoft Word autocorrect feature, using the auto correct list maintained in Word. If you do not wish to use this feature, disable that option in Word.
Mark as ReviewedCheck the box to the left of a text area to mark it as reviewed. To set all responses in the left or right column as reviewed, right-click, select reviewed status, and select set all in left column or set all in right column. You can clear the reviewed status if you right-click, select reviewed status, and select clear all in left column or clear all in right column.
Multi-User ConsiderationsThis page is not fully multi-user. It does not lock responses, so it is possible for two users to attempt to modify a response at the same time.
However, this page does detect such conflicts. It will post an alert if you attempt to modify a response that was changed since it was displayed on this page. When a conflict is detected, your changes are discarded. It is safe for multiple users to edit responses simultaneously, but they must be prepared for occasional conflicts and possible loss of edits to a response.
Edit Responses WindowNavigate: Coder/Studies in Progress/Right-click study/Questions in Progress/Right-click question/Edit ResponsesTranscriber/Transcribe/Studies to Transcribe/Right-click study/Questions to Transcribe/Right-click question/Edit
ResponsesTranscriber/Translate/Studies to Translate/Right-click study/Questions to Translate/Right-click question/Edit
ResponsesOn this page you can view and edit all of the responses to a question. All Edit Responses functions can take place before, after, or during coding. The Edit Responses page is designed to allow you to enter translations or transcriptions quickly for many responses.
Controls and Options for the Edit Responses WindowThe Edit Responses Window has two columns and a number of controls. The text in the left column can not be edited. The text in the right column can be edited, except for multi-media verbatims. The text which displays in the columns are determined by the controls in the banner bar and above the left column.
148
Client Access to Data
The banner bar has these options:
Allows you to navigate through the responses. When there are more than 500 responses, the page does not display all of the responses. Use this field to select the range of responses to display. This field also works with the sort order field. For example, when you select 1-500 in this field, the first 500 responses display as determined by the current sort order. Click this button to display the filter dialog. In this dialog, you can select the respondents to display by their responses to a set of questions. The filter button is yellow when a filter is appliedCheck this box to enable the spell checker. The spell checker is available only if you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer.
You can change the sort order of the responses with this field. The sort applies to the entire set of responses, not just those displayed. Here are the options:
Respondent ID – Sort by the respondent ID. If your respondent IDs are numeric, they will sort in numeric order only if all respondent IDs are the same length. For example, 10 will sort above 2, and 10 will sort below 02.
Left text – Sort by the response text in the left column. Only the first 100 characters of the response are used in the sort.
Right text – Sort by the response text in the right column. Only the first 100 characters of the responses are used in the sort.
Coded – Sort by the coding status, which is indicated by the colored bar to the right of the respondent ID.
Left reviewed – Sort by reviewed check box for the responses in the left column.
Right reviewed – Sort by the reviewed check box for the responses in the right column.
The Descending check box reverses the sort order.
When you change translations, transcriptions, or notes for a response, you can have that change applied to other duplicate responses.For this option, a duplicate response is one where the text in the left column is the same as the response you are changing. Responses where the text in the left column is blank are never matched.If more than one response is affected when you change the text, Ascribe™ displays the number of additional responses that were changed, and asks if you want the page to be refreshed with the changes. The options are:
None – The change is not applied to duplicates.
149
PrintDoc01 020813
Only the response you change is affected. Blank – The change is applied to all duplicates that
have no text in the right column. Not Blank – the change is applied to all duplicates
that have some text in the right column. All – The change is applied to all duplicates.
These controls are available at the top of the left text and right text columns:
Coding Status Indictor
The cell next to the question ID displays blue if the response is coded. It displays red if the response is locked because it is being coded, transcribed, or translated at the time you displayed this respondent. If cell has no color, the response has not been coded.
This menu selects the portion of the response to display in this column. Verbatim and Notes are always available. Transcription and translation are available if licensed.
The center menu selects the reviewed status of the responses. These are the options:
Blank – All responses will be displayed. Reviewed - Only those responses that have the reviewed box
checked will be displayed. Not Reviewed – Only those responses which are not reviewed
will be displayed.This menu selects whether you display all responses or only those with the column blank or not blank.
This option is only in the left text column. If this box is selected, the codes applied to the responses display below the text for each response. Codes are not displayed for multi-media verbatims. Codes are displayed for the transcriptions, translations, and notes for multi-media verbatims.
Suggested Settings for Translation View Pane – Set to Verbatim to display the native language verbatim. Edit Pane – Set to Translation to allow translation to be entered. Filter – Set your language or country filter before you start. See Filter for more
information. Check Spelling – Toggle this option on to check spelling. Apply to duplicates – Set to either All or Blank. For more information, see Apply to
Duplicates. Review Filter – Leave this filter empty unless you need to see reviewed translations. Blank Filter – Set to Blank to view those respondents without a translation.
Translate, Transcribe, or Edit a VerbatimYou can translate, transcribe, or edit a verbatim on this page. If you click the right text column, a cursor appears. Enter text or modify the verbatim. To move to the next response, click another response, press the Enter key, or press the Tab key.
150
Client Access to Data
The Ascribe™ database is updated immediately when you move the cursor from the text you are editing.
Fix a Wrongly Reclassified VerbatimTo fix a wrongly reclassified verbatim, first click the verbatim response in the right pane. Then you can highlight and delete the part of the response that has been reclassified from another question.
Add a Response
151
PrintDoc01 020813
If you have supervisor privilege, you can add responses to the question. Right-click and select add response. You can enter in the desired respondent ID and response in the Add Response dialog.
To enter in multiple responses with incremental ID’s, select the Increment Respondent ID option. The last Respondent ID will be replaced with the next highest RID. Also, the response field will be empty, and text can be entered. For example: if the increment response ID option was selected in the above screen, and you add a response, the next respondent ID field would contain 10003.
Delete a ResponseSupervisor privilege is required to delete a response. Right-click a response and select Delete Response.
Mark as ReviewedCheck the box to the left of a text area to mark it as reviewed. To set all responses in the left or right column as reviewed, right-click, select reviewed status, and select set all in left column or set all in right column. You can clear the reviewed status if you right-click, select reviewed status, and select clear all in left column or clear all in right column.
Spell Check in Edit ResponsesIf you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer, you can check spelling in this window. To enable the spell checker, select the check spelling box at the top of the window.
When check spelling is enabled, Ascribe™ checks the spelling of responses when you click on the text in the right column, or when you press the escape ( ESC) key. Spell check is performed only on the text in the right column, not in the left column. You can check the spelling of all responses if you right-click and select spell check all.
Misspelled words are highlighted in red and underlined. Just right-click those words and a list of suggested, correct spellings display. You can choose a corrected spelling from the list or type the correction yourself. If you have “apply to duplicates" set to all, then duplicate responses in translations, transcriptions, and notes will be fixed also.
You will find that the spell checker slows down the operation of the window. If you are not using the spell checker, you can turn it off to improve performance.
Because Ascribe™ uses Microsoft Word to check spelling, you can check spelling in multiple languages by setting up Word for the desired language. Ascribe™ will use the spelling dictionary that you have selected in Word.
If you change your dictionary options in Word, the changes may not appear in Ascribe™ until you logoff, close your browser window, and log back on.
152
Client Access to Data
To spell check individual words, press the ESC key.
Multi-Media ResponsesMedia responses cannot be changed in this page and can not be modified even when they are displayed in the right column.
When working with images, there is a difference between the way the Tab and Enter keys work when moving from one row to the next in the right column. If you press the Enter key and there is an image in the row you are moving to, that image is expanded and the current image is collapsed. If you use the Tab key, the cursor will move to the next response without changing the image display.
You can use the audio control keys in this window to control the playback of the audio response for the current row. For example, the CTRL-B key restarts the playback of the audio.
Translate/Transcribe VerbatimsAscribe™ provides several methods to translate or transcribe verbatims.
Translate or transcribe at the study level – This method uses the Translate/Transcribe Window. It displays one response at a time in respondent ID order. If a respondent appears in more than one question, you will see each answer in order of the question ID.
Translate or transcribe at the question level – This method uses the Translate/Transcribe Window. It displays one response at a time in respondent ID order for the question you choose.
Edit respondent – This method uses the Edit Respondent Window. It allows you to translate or transcribe responses at the study level. Ascribe™ displays on one screen a respondent’s answers to all questions marked for translation.
Edit responses – This method uses the Edit Responses Window. It allows you to translate or transcribe responses to a single question. All of the responses display in order by respondent ID.
The Studies to Transcribe/Translate page lists studies available for these tasks. A study will appear in this list if both of the following are true:
The Transcribe or Translate check box (depending on whether you are in Studies to Transcribe or Studies to Translate) is set in at least one question in the study
The status of the study is In progress.Questions to Transcribe/Translate
Navigate: Transcriber/Transcribe/Studies to Transcribe/Right-click a study/Select Questions to TranscribeTranscriber/Translate/Studies to Translate/Right-click a study/Select Questions to Translate
153
PrintDoc01 020813
This page lists the questions in the study to be transcribed or translated. A question will appear in this list only if the Transcribe or Translate task is checked in the Question Properties dialog.
To Transcribe/Translate a Question - Right-click on the question and select Transcribe or Translate from the popup menu.
To Edit the Responses to a Question - Right-click on the question and select Edit Responses from the popup menu.
Considerations for Translation Using Ascribe™ Make sure the translators have transcriber privileges. Associates with
transcriber privileges can see all studies marked for translation. Contacts with transcriber privileges can only see studies that have their company as the end customer or client. (See Add/Edit an Associate or Add/Edit a Company Contact.)
Make sure the questions are marked for translation. You must mark a question for translation or transcription in order for it to display in the list of questions available for translation or transcription. (See Tasks Tab.)
Decide whether the coding source should be set to translation or not. When you set the coding source to translation, it affects the Coder Window, Review Responses, and Phrase Analyzer. (See Coding Tab.)
Make sure the study status is set to coding in progress. Only studies marked as "coding in progress" will appear in the list of studies to be translated or transcribed. (See Study Status on the General Tab.)
Translate/Transcribe WindowNavigate: Transcriber/Transcribe/Right-click study/Select Transcribe
Transcriber/Translate/Right-click study/Select TranslateTranscriber/Transcribe/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Transcribe
Transcriber/Translate/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select TranslateThis page is designed for transcription and translation of responses. Responses are presented one at a time. You simply type the desired text and press Enter to move to the next response.
If you navigate to this page through Transcribe, the editable portion of the page is the transcription. Similarly, if you enter this page through Translate, the editable portion is the translation.
If you navigate to this page from a list of studies, you transcribe or translate the entire study. Responses are presented by respondent. Each response for that respondent is presented before you move to the next respondent.
If you navigate to this page from a list of questions, you transcribe or translate only the responses for that question.
This page supports multi-user access, and more than one person may be work on the same study or question. A given response will never be presented to two people in this page at the same time.
When you press Enter in the editable transcription or translation pane, your changes are saved, and the next available response displays. The response selected will be the next one with no text in the editable area.
The right-click menu has these options:
154
Client Access to Data
QuestionsorStudies
The option will display Questions or Studies, depending on how you navigated to the page. If you are viewing the responses by question, the option will be Questions. If you are viewing all responses in the study, the option will be Studies.
Settings This option opens a dialog with settings for the page.Keyboard Shortcuts This options opens a dialog with the keyboard
shortcuts for the page.For more information, see:
Controls in the Banner Bar Controls in the Source Pane Controls in the Translation Pane Counts of Responses Add or Edit a Translation Auto Translate
Translate/Transcribe SettingsChoose the following settings for the transcription/translation page:
Show Notes Check this box to display and edit the notes for each response.
Show Question Check this box to display the question ID and text at the top of the Transcribe/Translate page.
Split Vertically Check this box to split the window vertically.Magnification Enter a numeric magnification percentage. This setting
is used for image verbatims only. The value 100 displays the image at normal size. Use a value less than 100 to shrink the image, and a value greater than 100 to expand the image.
Controls in the Banner BarThe bar above the source pane has these options:
Move to the first response.
Move to the previous response.
Move to the next response.
Move to the last response.
Displays the respondent ID. To move to a specific respondent, enter the respondent ID and press Enter. Displays a red background if a respondent is not available. Note that in most cases, respondent IDs in Ascribe™ will have any leading zeros stripped. So a respondent ID of "001" will be in the Ascribe™
155
PrintDoc01 020813
database as "1" and will not match "001".Move to the first response with a blank transcription or translation.Move to the next response with a blank transcription or translation. If you press Enter in the editable transcription or translation box, it is the same as if you click this button.
Select a filter for responses based on codes applied.
This option determines whether the changes you make in the editable transcription/translation pane are applied to duplicate responses in the non-editable pane. See Apply to Duplicates.Check this box to enable the spell checker. When the spell checker is enabled, you can use your keyboard shortcut to check what you have typed. You can also click anywhere on the page after you have typed a translation/transcription. Spell check uses Microsoft Word’s dictionary. You must have Word installed on your PC to use the spell check.
Controls in the Source PaneThe source pane displays what you transcribe or translate. The top of that pane has these controls:
Verbatim
Translation
or
Transcription
This control is displayed only if you have licensed both transcriptions and translations. It allows you to select the other available source. For example, when you translate, you can select either the verbatim or the transcription as your source.
Reviewed only
Check this box to display only source items that have the reviewed check box set (you can not set that box in this page; it is set in other pages such as Edit Respondent or Edit Responses). When you change this option, it is in effect when you move to the next response.
Uncoded onlyCheck this box to display only uncoded responses. When you change this option, it is in effect when you move to the next response.
Controls in the Translation PaneThe translation pane has these controls:
Auto Detect Source Language
This field works in conjunction with the Auto Translate feature, but also controls whether the Source Language field is able to be changed. If Auto Detect Source Language is checked and you use the Auto Translate feature, the auto translator will determine the source language of the response.
156
Client Access to Data
If Auto Detect Source Language is checked, you are not able to change the Source Language drop down. In order to change the Source Language field, unselect Auto Detect Source Language. If you unselect Auto Detect Source Language and the incorrect language is set in the Source Language field, the Auto Translate feature may not work correctly. You must select a Source Language and a Target Language if you do not use the Auto Translate feature.
Source Language Drop Down
This field is used to display the source language of the response. You can change the language if Auto Detect Source Language is unchecked. If you do not use the Auto Translate feature, you must select a Source Language and a Target Language. The Source Language is used in conjunction with the translation library on each account. The translation library stores an entry for each verbatim text and its corresponding translation, Source Language, and Target Language. If the exact verbatim appears again in a question or study, a pop-up window displays the translation from the library, and you can decide to use that suggestion or enter a different translation.
Target Language Drop Down
This field is used to display the language of the translation. You must select the Target Language before anything can be translated. The selection will stick from session to session, so you may only need to select it one time if you always translate to the same language.
Auto Translate
This feature allows you to use 'statistical machine translation,' which looks for patterns in hundreds of millions of documents to help decide on the best translation. These languages are supported: Afrikaans, Albanian, Arabic, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese simplified or traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Esperanto, Filipino, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Hungarian, Icelandic, Indonesian, Irish, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Macedonian, Malay, Maltese, Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swahili, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Welsh, and Yiddish. Note that transactions may apply in addition to the normal translation transaction schedule. Contact [email protected] if you have questions.
Audio Keyboard ShortcutsThe following default key combinations can be used to control the media player. You can change the keyboard key if you click the text box of the shortcut and enter a different key. Note that not all browsers or operating system will support all key combinations.
157
PrintDoc01 020813
Activity Keyboard Shortcut
Start/Pause Ctrl + S Start Over Ctrl + B Advance 30% Ctrl + Right ArrowRewind 30% Ctrl + Left ArrowVolume Up Ctrl + Up ArrowVolume Down Ctrl + Down ArrowAuto Translate Ctrl + TNext Response Ctrl + EnterNext ID/Respondent Ctrl + Page UpPrevious ID/Respondent Ctrl + Page DownCheck Spelling Ctrl + R
Counts of ResponsesIn the banner above the translation or transcription, the counts of work completed are displayed. There are two sets of counts. The first is sensitive to any filter settings you have selected. The second is not. For example, suppose that you have a filter selected in the Filter... dialog, and also have the Reviewed only box checked. You might see this in the banner:
Transcription 34/220 (55/500 Total)
This means "You have completed 34 of 220 responses that are selected by your filter and have the reviewed box checked. Of all responses to be transcribed, 55 of 500 are completed."
Apply to DuplicatesThis option in the banner bar determines whether changes made in the editable transcription/translation pane are applied to duplicate responses in the non-editable pane. The changes apply only to the transcription or translation. If you change the notes for a response, the change for the notes is always applied only to that response, regardless of this setting.
If a response is being edited by another user in this window, your changes will not be applied to that response, even if it matches.
The available options are:
None - The changes you make will apply only to the current response. Blank - The changes you make will apply to the current response, and also to any
blank responses in the editable pane, for all responses that match the text in the non-editable pane.
Not blank - The changes you make will apply to the current response, and also to any non-blank responses in the editable pane, for all responses that match the text in the non-editable pane.
158
Client Access to Data
All - The changes you make will apply to the current response and to all responses that match the text in the non-editable pane.
Add or Edit a TranslationTo add or edit a translation, click the translation pane. A cursor appears. Enter or change the translation. To move to the next translation, press Enter or use the controls in the banner bar.
As you are translating responses, you are building a library of translations for the account on which you are working. The translation library stores an entry for each verbatim text and its corresponding translation, Source Language, and Target Language. If the exact verbatim appears again in a question or study, a pop-up window displays the translation from the library, and you can decide to use that suggestion or enter a different translation. Note that it is best practice to have the Source and Target Languages set correctly in order to make the most of the translation library. The translation library cannot be edited by users - it is simply there to make suggestions based on previous translations.
See Auto Translate for information about the Auto Translate feature.
Auto TranslateThis feature allows you to use 'statistical machine translation,' which looks for patterns in hundreds of millions of documents to help decide on the best translation. These languages are supported:
Afrikaans, Albanian, Arabic, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese simplified or traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Esperanto, Filipino, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Hungarian, Icelandic, Indonesian, Irish, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Macedonian, Malay, Maltese, Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swahili, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Welsh, and Yiddish.
Note that transactions may apply in addition to the normal translation transaction schedule. Contact [email protected] if you have questions. The Transactions reports display the number of transactions incurred for auto translations.
When you click the Auto Translate button, the translated response displays in the Translation pane. You may edit or tweak the translation as necessary.
If Auto Detect Source Language is checked and you use the Auto Translate feature, the auto translator will determine the source language of the response. If you unselect Auto Detect Source Language and the incorrect language is set in the Source Language field, the Auto Translate feature may not work correctly.
You may receive a message indicating that no translation can be provided from the auto translator under these circumstances:
the source response exceeds approximately 5000 characters (the response is exceedingly long)
the source response is the same word in source and target languages the source or target language is not properly set.
Filter - Set a Response Filter
159
PrintDoc01 020813
Navigate: Coder Window/Right-click/FilterReview Responses Window/Click the Response Filter Button (bottom left)
Edit Responses or Edit Respondent Window/Click the Filter button (top right)Translation or Transcription Window/Click the Filter button (top right)
You can set a filter to view only those responses that meet your criteria. For example, you may want to see just those respondents that answered "Yes" to a previous question. Or, if you have to translate respondents, you may want to filter by language.
In order to use a filter, you must first code the question that acts as the filter. In most cases, this is a closed-end question.
If you wish for your filter to stay from session to session, you can navigate to the home page and set your user options to keep filters between sessions.
Filter DialogYou can set filters from the Coder Window, the Review Responses Window, the Edit Responses Window, the Edit Respondent Window, the Translation Window, and the Transcription Window. After you select to filter, the filter dialog displays.
In the filter dialog, you select a question which acts as the filter. You further define the filter when you select a code or codes from that question’s codebook. Only respondents who have codes that match those selected as the filter will be displayed.
The filter dialog has two panes at the top of the page. The left pane is the study questions pane and displays all of the questions in the study. The right pane is the filtering questions pane and is initially blank. It will display the question you select as the filter.
To select a question to act as a filter:
1. Highlight the question in the study questions pane and click the “>” button or just double-click the question. After you select the question, it displays in the filtering questions pane.
2. Click the question in the filtering questions pane. The question’s codebook displays in the bottom window or codebook pane.
3. After you select enough codes, click one of the Apply Codes buttons. The codes are applied, and the next verbatim displays. To choose the code or codes you want to use as a filter, click the box next to the code. If you select multiple codes, Ascribe™ selects respondents who have any of the codes.
4. Click OK to return to the responses. Only respondents who have codes that match the filter criteria will be available for display.
Multiple questions can be used as a filter if you repeat the process. The And/Or buttons in the center of the page determine the logical conditions for inclusion when multiple questions are chosen.
Choose "Apply to all Questions" to have the filter stick for all questions in your study.
Other options for this window include:
“>>” button – this button selects all questions in the study questions panes and moves them to the filtering questions pane.
“<” button – this button removes the highlighted question from the filtering questions pane (the question must be highlighted first.) You can also remove a question if you double-click it.
160
Client Access to Data
“<<” button – this button removes all questions from the filtering questions pane. There is no limit to the number of questions to filter by, but the filter process will slow
down as you add more and more questions.
How to Tell if a Filter is SetEach window has an indicator to let you know a filter is set for the respondents. Here is a list of the indicators:
In the Coder Window, the forward and backward buttons are highlighted in yellow.
In the Review Responses Window, the response pane has the words “Question Filters: question ID: question label”
In the Edit Respondent Window, the Edit Responses Window, the Translation Window, and the Transcription Window, the Filter button is highlighted yellow.
161
PrintDoc01 020813
Client Access to DataNavigate: Client
The client section of Ascribe™ provides controlled access to each study and may be accessed by project directors, clients, tabulators, account executives, etc.
The Client Studies page lists the studies available to you. The studies listed depend on the type of user account you for Ascribe™. If you have an associate account, you can see all of the studies except those that are archived. If you have a contact account, you can see only those studies for your company.
Client ReportsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Click Reports
All items in the client results section display in "real time." Information is pulled directly from the database and includes all data/information in the database at the time the report was generated.
162
Client Access to Data
NoteReal-time is a much misused term. Here it means "you are getting the results as they are stored in the database."When you navigate to the Studies page, the list of studies is displayed. You can filter the list by the study status. In the grey bar at the top of the window, check the status boxes for the studies you want to view, and then click the Update button. You also have the option to change the properties of the study if you right-click the study and select Edit.
NoteLanguage Logic can optionally configure your site to allow contacts to view only completed studies. If this option is in effect, a contact will not see the grey bar to select study status.
Coding Overview ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Click Coding Overview
The Coding Overview Report lists all studies that are currently on the system except for those marked as archived. This report allows you to quickly gauge the level of completion for all live studies. The studies listed depend on the type of user account you have for Ascribe™.
If you have an associate account, you can see all of the studies except those that are archived.
If you have a contact account, you can see only those studies for your company.
When you reach the Coding Overview report, you can filter the list of studies by the study status. In the grey bar at the top of the window, check the status boxes for the studies you want to view, and then click the Update button.
This information displays at the beginning of the Coding Overview Report:
Field DescriptionCreated The date the study was setup on Ascribe™. This date is based on
the web server clock.Study ID Study identification numberStudy Study nameHours The number of hours recorded for this study in the Time Accounting
records (only appears if you have administrative privileges)This information displays for all questions and then for each type of question individually in this order: All Questions, All Open Questions, All Other Specify Question, All Closed Questions, All Value Questions.
Field DescriptionRespondents Number of individual respondents in the study, in all open
questions, in all other specify questions, etc.Responses Number of responses in the study, in all open questions, in all other
specify questions, etc.
163
PrintDoc01 020813
Codes Applied Number of codes applied to all questions in the study, for all open questions, for all other specify questions, etc.
Responses Coded Number of responses coded in all questions of the study, in all open questions, in all other specify questions, etc.
% Percentage of responses coded in all questions, in all open questions, in all other specify questions, etc.
This information displays at the end of the report:
Field DescriptionClient The company that requested the studyEnd Client The end customer for the studyStatus The coding status of the study
Study Summary ReportNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Study Summary
The Study Summary Report displays two tables. Summary information about the study is at the top of the page. The second table lists coding information by question type. Here is the summary information on the table at the top of the page:
Field DescriptionStudy Name The study nameStudy ID The study identification numberCreated The date the study was createdStart Date The date work on the study was startedDescription The description of the study from the Study Edit screenHelp The information about the study from the Study Edit screenSupervisor The supervisor of the studyClient The company that requested the studyEnd Customer The end customer of the studyStatus The coding status of the study from the Study Edit screenCoders The number of coders who worked on this studyLoads The number of successful loads for this studyTransactions The number of transactions used on this study; only administrators
can view this informationHours The number of hours spent on this study; only administrators can
view this informationHere is the information on the table for question types:
Field DescriptionType Each question type (open, closed, other specify) has a row in the
table
164
Client Access to Data
Questions Number of questions for this question typeRespondents Total number of respondents for each question typeResponses Total number of responses for each question typeResponses Coded Total number of responses coded for each question typeCodes Applied Number of codes applied for each question type
Question Summary ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Question Summary
The Question Summary Report lists summary information about each question. You can filter the list of questions by question type. In the grey bar at the top of the window, check the boxes for the question types you want to view, and then click the Update button. The report also has additional options for showing codebooks and verbatims.
Here is the information on the Question Summary Report:
Field DescriptionQuestion ID The question identification numberQuestion Label The question labelQuestion Type The question typeLayout The data layoutRespondents The number of respondents for this question; the total of all
respondents is displayed at the bottom of the table.Responses Coded The number of responses coded for this question, followed by the
number of responses coded as a percentage of the number of responses; the total number of responses coded and its percentage display at the bottom of the table.
165
PrintDoc01 020813
Hours The number of hours recorded in time accounting for this question; only administrators can view this field. The total number of hours displays at the bottom of the table.
Responses Per Hour The average number of responses per hour is determined by the number of responses coded divided by the number of hours worked on this question; only administrators can view this field. The average responses coded per hour displays at the bottom of the table.
Question Detail Report within the Question Summary ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Question Summary
The Question Detail Report is used to quality check a study, approve codebooks or just check on the status of a study. You can select any number of questions to see more information.
From the Question Summary Report, click the box next to the question ID of one or more questions. Right-click the question to display these options:
Option DescriptionDetail This Question Displays a detail report of the selected question. From this option,
you also can display a detail report for questions that share this question.
Detail Selected Questions
Displays detail reports for multiple selected questions
Edit Question Displays the Edit Question dialogSelect All Selects all of the questions and puts a checkmark in each boxClear All Removes the checkmark from each boxShow Responses For This Question
Displays all of the responses for one question
Download Data Navigates to Codebooks and Results or Scripted OutputReports Navigates to other reportsExport Table To Excel™
Copies the report to Excel™
Go To Navigates to other parts of Ascribe™
166
Client Access to Data
The Question Detail Report has general information about the question at the top of the page. This information includes question type, number of responses loaded, number of current responses, number of responses coded, number of responses currently referred, number of codes applied, card number, column number, number of columns and data layout.
The codebook displays below the question information. The codebook information has these fields:
Field DescriptionRow The row number for this code or netInput The input ID for the code. This value is not displayed for nets.Output The output ID for the code. This value is not displayed for nets.Description The description of the codes. Nets display in bold.Number of Respondents
The top of the column shows the total number of respondents in the question. For nets, this value is the unduplicated count of respondents who had any code of this net applied. For codes, this value is the number of responses to which this code was applied.
Percentage Of Respondents
This column displays the percentage of respondents who had this code applied.
If the codebook is shared and if you select Detail this questions/with questions sharing codebook, a column is added for each question that shares the codebook within the study. Codebooks that are shared with questions in different studies are not displayed.
You can also display responses for this question from the Question Detail Report. To view responses for a code, right-click the code and select Show responses for this code. To view all of the responses for a question, right-click anywhere in the table and select Show responses for this question.
167
PrintDoc01 020813
Card Layout ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Card Layout
The Card Layout Report finds errors in your study set-up before you deliver data. It displays any problems detected in card/column/columns set-up and in numbering.
The report is divided into two panes. The upper pane displays the questions in the study and is updated automatically if you change the properties of the study or the questions. The
168
Client Access to Data
lower pane displays a picture of the data output in cards and columns. The lower pane is updated only if you select Update Card View in the upper pane and click the Update button.
The question list in the upper pane has these fields:
Field DescriptionQuestion ID The question IDQuestion Label The question labelType The question typeCard The card number where the data will be placed in column binary
output.Layout Numeric, column punch, and punch using column offset are the
three data layout types.Maximum Codes The maximum number of codes allowed for this question as defined
on the Data tab of the Edit Question dialog. (0 = unlimited number of codes.)
Max Codes Applied The maximum number of codes that actually have been applied to any one response.
Column In numeric layout, codes for this question will start in this column. Punch using column offset layout uses the column field in a calculation. See Punch Using Column Offset for more information. Punch layout does not use this field.
Columns Per Code The number of columns used to write the code which is also the number of digits in the output code value. This field only applies to the numeric layout type.
Columns Used The maximum number of columns used for the output of codes for this question, based on the codes currently applied to this question. Applies only to the numeric layout type.
The lower pane displays a diagram of the cards and columns to be output. The columns that are used display across the top of the card. The report has these fields:
Field DescriptionC Card numberR Respondent IDQuestion ID The report displays the columns used by the questions.Problems A list of any problems detected by analysis of the study and
question settings, the codebooks, and the codes currently applied in the study. This message displays if there are no errors - Card field : Specified column 0 starts before the first column of the card (1).
Below is an example of the Static Hair Study set-up to be output numerically.
169
PrintDoc01 020813
Study ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Study Report
The study report provides a real-time summary of the coding results for each question.
NoteReal-time is a much misused term. Here it means "you are getting the results as they are stored in the database."Typically this report is used by people who want to monitor progress, assess and approve codebooks, check for quality, and perform audits. It has two basic components: a study summary and a question summary for each question in the study.
Study Summary in the Study ReportThe study summary provides this information:
Field DescriptionStudy name The study nameStudy ID The study identifierStatus The study statusCreated The date the study was createdDue Date The due date of the studyResponses The total number of responses in all of the questions (includes open
ended, closed ended and other specify questions)Respondents The total number of respondents in all of the questionsResponses Coded The total number of responses coded in this studyCodes Applied The total number of codes applied for all questionsOpen Questions The number of open-ended questions in the studyClosed Questions The number of closed-ended questions in the study
170
Client Access to Data
Other Specify Questions
The number of other specify questions in the study
Value Questions The number of value questions in the studyA table displays below the study summary information. It lists question type, number of responses and number of codes applied. This table can put copied to Excel™ if you click the Excel™ icon ( ).
Question Summary within the Study ReportEach question in the study is listed with summary and detail information. You can click the
icon to view the verbatims and codes applied for the question. If you have supervisor privilege, you can specify responses to recode in this window. The question summary report has these fields:
Field DescriptionQuestion Type The question type (open, closed, other specify or value)Responses Loaded The total number of responses loaded for this questionResponses Current The number of responses currently stored in Ascribe™. This number
may differ from the number of responses loaded, because responses may have been reclassified.
Responses Coded This field displays the number of responses that have been coded, the number of total responses loaded, and the percentage of responses that have been coded.
Responses Referred The number of responses referred to the supervisor, but which have not gotten a reply yet
Codes Applied The number of codes that have been applied to all responses in this
171
PrintDoc01 020813
question.Card The card where this question’s data will be writtenColumn The starting column where the data (codes) will be written to upon
outputColumns The maximum width, in columns, for each code. It will be zero filled
on output.Open Questions The number of open-ended questions in the studyClosed Questions The number of closed-ended questions in the studyOther Specify Questions
The number of other specify questions in the study
Value Questions The number of value questions in the studyA table displays below the question summary information. This table can put copied to Excel™ if you click the Excel™ icon ( ). The table has this information:
Field DescriptionRow Number This column lets you resort the table in its original order if you have
sorted by a column.Input Code Value The input value of the codeOutput Code Value The output value of the codeCode Description The description of the code. If any responses have been coded with
this code, you can click the description to see the verbatims and the codes applied.
Codes Applied The number of times this code has been applied for this questionPercent The number of times this code has been applied divided by the
number of responses to this question. It displays as a percentage.
172
Client Access to Data
Study Quality ReportNavigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click Quality
The Study Quality Report typically is used for training. It shows the difference between codes applied to a study and the saved set of 'quality codes' for the study. The intention of the quality report is to allow you to store a set of 'known good' codes for a study, and then compare a coder's work against this set.
Quality coding refers to a process by which an expert codes a study "perfectly," or as close to the way it should be. After the study has been coded, it is converted to quality mode, and a trainee codes it. The trainee's coding is then compared to and measured against the expert’s coding. A report is created that shows the differences in coding.
Set Quality CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Set Quality Codes
To create quality codes, first you must have coded (or partially coded) a study. Then navigate to the Set Quality Codes screen. Select each question or group of questions for which you want to set quality codes and click OK.
When you set quality codes for a question, any existing quality codes are deleted and replaced with the current set of codes for the question. Questions you have not selected in the set quality codes window are not affected when you click the OK button.
You can set quality codes only for open or other specify questions.
After you set quality codes, you should delete the current coding. Navigate to the Questions screen, right-click any question, and choose Delete Questions. Select the questions for which quality codes have been set, and then choose "Codes" from the right-hand deletion column. See Delete Questions for more details.
Now the study is ready for the trainee to proceed with coding.
A few things to note:
Any notes, translations, or transcriptions the expert coder added continue to display for the trainee unless you use Edit Responses to get rid of them.
The codebook is already built for the trainee (otherwise the expert could not have coded the study.) Therefore, codes used for quality coding can not be deleted from the codebook.
If you need to delete the quality codes that have been applied, you use Delete Questions and choose Quality Codes for deletion.
About the Study Quality Report
173
PrintDoc01 020813
Navigate: Client/Right-click study/Select Reports/Click QualityThe report lists each question in the study, and provides summary information about the difference between the codes applied and the quality codes.
Summary Information DescriptionTotal Responses The number of responses to this question, both
coded and uncoded.Responses Coded The number of responses that have at least one
code applied, shown as a count and as a percentage of responses.
Responses Quality Coded The number of responses that have at least one quality code applied, shown as a count and as a percentage of responses.
Responses Both Coded and Quality Coded
The number of responses that have at least one code and at least one quality code applied.
Codes Applied The total number of codes (not quality codes) applied to responses in this question.
Quality Codes Applied The total number of quality codes applied to responses in this question.
Codes Added The number of codes applied to a response when there is no matching quality code.
Codes Missing The number of quality codes applied to a response where there is no matching code.
Quality Ranking An index that scores the coder on their conformity to an expert’s results. The actual score consists of codes missing vs. the expert and codes added vs. the expert. Missing codes count off more than codes added. At Language Logic, we begin to take action if the ranking is below the 80th percentile. The quality ranking is only displayed to people with supervisory access or above. Clients may not see the quality ranking.
The idea of this report is to give an overview of how the coding of the question differs from the quality coding. The Codes added and Codes missing rows contain the important information. These are based only on those responses that have both a code and a quality code applied. In other words, it is based only on the responses listed in the Responses both coded and quality coded row of the table.
The Codes added row lists the number of codes applied where there is no matching quality code. The coder has applied codes that the quality coder did not apply.
The Codes missing row lists the number of codes the coder "missed." The quality coder applied codes that the coder did not apply.
Percentile scores are assigned to the Codes added and Codes missing rows. These are intended merely to give a quick assessment of the overall quality. You should use the detailed report of the coding differences to assess quality issues, rather than relying on the percentile numbers.
174
Client Access to Data
The percentile ranking for Codes added is calculated as:
(1 - (Codes added) / (Correct codes)) * 100
where (Correct codes) is the number of quality codes that match codes applied by the coder. Similarly, the percentile rank for Codes missing is:
(1 - (Codes missing) / (Correct codes)) * 100
Finally the Quality ranking for the question is computed as the average of the Codes added and Codes missing percentiles.
You can see a detailed report of those responses that were coded differently if you click the icon for the question.
View Codes by Coder ReportNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select View Codes by Coder
175
PrintDoc01 020813
This report shows how many codes have been applied by each coder in all questions of the study. The report is useful when multiple coders are assigned to a study. It allows you to see who has worked on each question. Also, it is useful to troubleshoot a problem code because you can see what codes the coder applied.
Initially, the page shows each question in collapsed form. Double-click a question row to display the codebook. The codebook displays in the first column followed by a column for each coder who worked on this question. The columns contain the number of times a coder used that code. If you click that number, you can see the verbatims with that code. To collapse the codebook view, double-click the question.
A column labeled ???? indicates that some codes were not applied by any coder. The most common reason for this is that the study was restored with some applied codes. These codes are not attributed to any specific coder. (Prior to 01/29/2010, Ascribe™ did not restore the name of the coder who applied a code to a response. After that date, the coder name is restored.)
Respondents ReportNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Reports/Select Respondents
This report lists the respondents for a selected study. The purpose of this page is to select one or more respondents and delete them.
NoteDeleting respondents from this page will remove the respondent from all questions in the study. To remove respondents from individual questions, see Edit Verbatims.
176
Client Access to Data
At the top of the page is a toolbar which offers choices for the display of respondents. The Respondent page can contain a lot of data and require a long time to display. The toolbar options allow you to select what respondents and verbatims are displayed. Here are the options:
Field DescriptionRecords Select a range of records to display. Ascribe™ initially determines
how many respondents to display based on a combination of respondent count and the number of questions. It can vary from study to study. One range of numbers means that all records are displayed. At any time, all respondents in the study can be displayed by selecting the last option in the records box "All Respondents". For large studies with many questions, this option can require significant time to display.
Search Search will find and display a respondent ID or a group of respondent IDs starting with a string of characters. For example, you can search for 10015, and respondent 10015 will be listed. If you are using 5 digit numeric respondent ids and you enter "1001", the list will display 10010 through 10019.
Load List Load List displays a box where you can enter individual respondent IDs or copy and paste a list of respondent IDs from another source such as Word or Excel™. To prepare a list for copying to the Load List, enter the individual respondent IDs on separate lines as follows:10001100051001010034After you enter the respondent IDs, click OK. The respondents and the verbatims display. The text of the Load List button displays in red when items are in the list box.
Data View Data View allows you to select what is displayed in the individual cells. The choices are:
Abbreviated Data - displays the first 15 characters of the response
Full Data - displays the entire text of the response Load File – displays the name of the file from which the data
was loaded Coded Status – displays the coding status of the response
NoteThere are only two ways to get a respondent back after you delete it. One way is to reload the data file. The Load File option gives you the name of that file. The other way is to save the study before you delete respondents and then restore the study. But, remember, you have to save the study before you delete any respondents.Below the toolbar are these columns: a selector column, the respondent ID column, and the question ID columns (one column for each question in the study.)
177
PrintDoc01 020813
The data (response) in each cell initially displays an abbreviated response for purposes of identifying the respondent. Other data display options are available if you select the Data View option on the top toolbar.
To select respondents, you can click the box next to the respondent ID. Or you can use the right-click menu to select and delete respondents:
Option DescriptionSelect All This option selects all of the respondents in the current list.Clear All This option de-selects all of the respondents in the current list.Delete Selected Respondents
This option removes all of the selected respondents from all questions in the study.
178
Client Access to Data
Cost AccountingThe various cost accounting reports detail your usage of Ascribe™ transactions. If you have administrator privilege, you can view these reports to understand how you are using your transactions.
Fee Schedule
179
PrintDoc01 020813
Navigate: Administrator/Select Transactions/Select Fee ScheduleThis page contains two tables: Transactions by Media Type and Licensed Product.
Transactions by Media TypeThe first table shows the number of transactions charged for a response that is coded, or to which a transcription, translation, or notes have been added. The fee varies by the media type of the response. These types are listed in the first column.
Numeric responses are those which contain only the digits 0 to 9, spaces, a period, or the hyphen character; text responses are those which contain any other characters. The other media types (such as image and audio) are for multi-media responses.
The second column of the table lists the number of transactions charged for coding or transcribing the corresponding type of response.
Ascribe™ will apply a charge only one time to a given response. Once a fee has been applied, it will never be applied again for that response.
Licensed Product SurchargesThe second table on the Fee Schedule page shows each of the licensed products currently enabled for your account. A charge may be applied for each of these products. The fee for the licensed products is deducted from your transaction balance at the end of each month. The deduction is calculated as the number of transactions used in the month, multiplied by the surcharge percentage. These deductions will appear on your statement at the end of each month.
Transaction ReportsThe following reports are available for cost accounting if you have administrator privilege: Transactions by Period, Transactions by Study, Transactions by Month, and Transactions by User.
Transactions by PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Transactions/Select Transactions by Period
This report shows transactions used during a specific time period. While the format of this report is very similar to the Transactions by Study report, the contents of the report are quite different. This report shows all transactions for the specified period (and only transactions that fall in that period.) The Transactions by Study report shows all transactions for specific studies, regardless of when the transaction was recorded.
The report shows transactions broken down by the type of the verbatim, with rows for each study. A study will appear in the report only if at least one transaction was recorded for the study in the specified time period. The bottom row of the report shows a total column for all rows.
The report will show columns for each type of response for which a transaction was charged during this period. Here are the categories of transactions:
Column DescriptionStudy ID The study IDStudy Name The study name
180
Client Access to Data
Total Responses and Transactions
The total number of responses for which a transaction charge was applied during the specified period and the total number of transactions charged to this study during the specified period
ACM Responses and Transactions
The number of responses that were coded with ACM and the number of transactions incurred
Text Analytics Responses and Transactions
The number of responses that were saved when using Inspector and the number of transactions incurred
Numeric Responses and Transactions
The number of numeric verbatim responses for which a transaction charge was applied and the number of transactions incurred
Text Responses and Transactions
The number of textual verbatim responses for which a transaction charge was applied and the number of transactions incurred
Image Responses and Transactions
The number of image responses for which a transaction charge was applied and the number of transactions incurred
Audio Responses and Transactions
The number of audio responses for which a transaction charge was applied and the number of transactions incurred
Automatic Translations Requests and Transactions
The number of requests made to be auto translated and the number of transactions incurred
Note
Click the Excel™ icon ( ) to export the data to Excel™.
Transactions by StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Transactions/Select Transactions by Study
The format of this report is similar to the Transactions by Period report. If a study is included in this report, it will show all transactions for that study, regardless of whether the transaction was applied within the selected time period or not.
Filter by Date Range or by Study ID/Name
This report can be filtered by a date range or by study ID and name. (You cannot filter by both the date range and the study ID/name.)
If the Search by study ID/name box is empty, a study is included in the list if the created date of the study is within the date range you enter.
If the Search by study ID/name box has an entry, Ascribe™ ignores the date range and filters by study ID/name.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and a list of studies displays.
181
PrintDoc01 020813
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Note
Click the Excel™ icon ( ) to export the data to Excel™.
Transactions by MonthNavigate: Administrator/Select Transactions/Select Transactions by Month
The format of this report is similar to the Transactions by Period report. The difference is that the transactions are not shown by study. Transactions are reported by year, month and verbatim type. The bottom row of the report shows a total column for all rows.
Note
Click the Excel™ icon ( ) to export the data to Excel™.The columns of the report break out transaction usage by the type of response coded. See ACM Transaction Reporting for more information about how ACM transaction usage is reported.
Transactions by UserNavigate: Administrator/Transactions/Transactions by Study/right-click a study/Transactions by User
Supervisor/Studies/right-click a study/Reports/Transactions by UserThis report shows the number of transactions by user for a study.
Account StatementNavigate: Administrator/Select Transactions/Select Statement
You pay for Ascribe™ usage on a per-transaction basis. This report gives a statement of your account.
Column Example DescriptionDate 1/8/2002 The date of the statement entry, according to the web
server clock.Type Transaction
purchaseThe type of the entry:
Adjustment - an adjustment made to your statement by Language Logic.
Transaction purchase - purchase of transactions credited to your account.
Prior month usage - the number of transactions you used in the month preceding date.
Month to date usage - the number of transactions you have used in the current month to date.
Description Big block! A description of the entry, which may be added by Language Logic.
182
Client Access to Data
Transactions 10,000,000.0 The change in your transaction balance for this statement entry. Positive numbers are increases in your transaction balance; negative numbers are reductions.
Balance 105,784.2 Your current transaction balance as of this entry. The last row of the table gives your current transaction balance as of this report.
Time AccountingTime accounting provides time and cost information about your studies. There are two types of time accounting reports available in Ascribe™: Time by Study and Time by Period.
How Ascribe™ Tracks TimeTime accounting in Ascribe™ is based on entering and leaving certain web pages (tracked pages) on the site. Ascribe™ maintains a clock for each tracked activity. The clock starts when the user enters a tracked page. The clock stops (and restarts for a new activity) when the user enters a different tracked page. The clock also stops when the user navigates to the Home page, or when the user logs off.
When the clock stops for an activity, the time record for that activity is finished, and the start and end times for the activity are stored.
Each time record contains:
The person who performed the activity (based on the logon information) The activity performed (the name of the page) The study worked on (If the activity does not relate to a study, this entry is blank.) The question worked on (If the activity does not relate to a question, this entry is
blank.) The start time of the activity The end time of the activity The number of responses for which codes were applied during the tracked activity
(i.e., the difference between the number of responses coded at the end time and the start time; this will be zero if the activity does not relate to a question.)
The time tracking reports display the time tracking information in various ways, allowing you to look at times by study, question, activity, and associate.
There are several important issues to remember when you are looking at time accounting reports:
The times recorded in these reports always will be less than the total session (logon) time of the people working. When the time accounting clock is stopped (because it was never started, or because the user navigated to the Home page), the time is not recorded in any time tracking record.
Time records are assigned to users by logon ID. This means that if you want to distinguish activities by individuals, each person using Ascribe™ must log on with a unique user name.
Time records are maintained for each browser session. If a person uses two browser sessions (two instances of Internet Explorer, both logged into Ascribe™), time records will be maintained separately for each session. If you want to track activities only and are not interested in time for costing purposes, it is fine for users
183
PrintDoc01 020813
to log on with multiple sessions. However, if you want Ascribe™ time accounting to accurately reflect your project costs for labor hours, you should instruct your staff to use only a single browser session at a time.
Idle time when the clock is running is recorded the same way as non-idle time. For example, a worker takes a break while coding a study and does not stop the clock. The worker then resumes coding later. The break time will be recorded along with active time. To prevent recording idle time, instruct your users to navigate to the Home page or log off during idle periods.
The only exception to the above is when a session times out from inactivity. When a session times out, the time record is finalized with the end time as the last time the user performed any activity.
Session, Logon, and Tracked HoursIn the time accounting reports, you will find three ways time is tracked:
Session hours - A session corresponds to an internet browser session in Ascribe. A session starts when the user logs on, and ends when the user logs off, or the session times out. If the user logs off, the session end time is the time of the logoff. If the session times out, the session end time is the time of the last activity by the user, not the time that the timeout occurred. A session is tied to the user ID of the person who logged on.
Logon hours - It is possible for a given user to have more than one simultaneous session. The user might open two browsers and logon in each of them. Or, two people might logon to Ascribe at the same time using the same user ID. Logon hours report the time a given user is logged on, eliminating any overlapping session hours for the user. For an example, a user opened two browsers and logged on with the same user ID in both, then worked for an hour and logged off in both browsers. The session hours recorded for this user would be 2 (one hour in each browser). The logon hours reported would be 1 (the overlapping time is discarded). Logon hours are a better indication of the total time a user worked in Ascribe, assuming no two users log on with the same user ID. If your users never work in two browsers at the same time, logon hours will be the same as session hours. One final note: Logon hours are computed when the session ends. Logon hours will therefore not contain times for any open sessions.
Tracked hours - As described above, Ascribe keeps track of time spent in certain activities. These are tracked hours. Tracked hours, like session hours, are recorded for each open session. If more than one session is active for the same user, tracked hours will be recorded for each session.
Generally, session hours will be greater than both logon hours and tracked hours.
Count of Responses Coded in Time Tracking RecordsThe count of responses coded in time tracking records gives information about production during a user's session. To interpret this information properly, you need to understand how this value is calculated.
Each code applied is marked with two pieces of information used in time accounting:
The user session in which the code was applied (this also identifies the user) The date and time the code was applied.
This information is used by time accounting to determine the count of responses coded. When the user logs off, each code applied during the session is inspected. For each time slot
184
Client Access to Data
in the time accounting records for that session, the number of responses with codes applied is totaled. This becomes the count of responses coded for that time accounting record.
There are a few implications of this method of counting responses coded:
The sum of responses coded in time accounting for a given question will normally not equal the number of coded responses for that question. There are many reasons for this. For example, a response may have one code applied in one session, and a second code applied in a different session. In this case, the response will be counted twice in the time accounting records. Equally, a response may be coded in one session. In a later session, the response may be uncoded and coded a second time. Again, this response will be counted twice in time accounting.
Counts of responses coded are calculated when the user logs off. Hence time accounting reports will not show response count information for currently open sessions.
If responses are coded and the codes are deleted in the same session, they will not appear in the time accounting reports.
The count of responses coded is intended to give a feel for overall production by a worker during a session. Do not use time accounting records to try to determine the number of currently coded responses.
Use Time Accounting for Job Cost CalculationsYou can configure Ascribe™ to give you job cost based on time accounting records. To do this, enter the hourly rate for each associate under Administrator/Associates. This allows Ascribe™ to calculate cost figures in the various time accounting reports. Some clients prefer to enter a flat rate for all associates to include the entire cost of the project to obtain this estimate.
Time Accounting ReportsTime accounting provides time and cost information about your studies. Only administrators have access to Time Accounting. Ascribe™ has three types of time accounting reports: Time Current (currently open sessions), Time by Study, and Time by Period. Within the Time by Study and Time by Period reports, there are additional options for more detail.
Time CategoriesNavigate: Administrator/Time Accounting/Time Categories
An administrator can create time categories that users can select as they perform different activities on the site. Reporting by time categories is available under the Time by Study reports (Time by Category.)
Create Time CategoriesThe first step is to set up the categories on the Time Categories page. Right-click and select New. Enter the following information in the dialog box:
Field DescriptionID The name of the time category
Description A short explanation of the category
185
PrintDoc01 020813
Active If checked, this category is available for users in the list of time categories on the Studies, Questions, and Studies in Progress pages. If unchecked, this category will not be available to users.
Press OK to save and close.
To edit the time category, right-click and select Edit. The dialog box opens, and you can make changes.
Set a Time CategoryThe time categories drop-down list displays on the Studies, Questions, and Studies in Progress pages underneath the Ascribe™ logo. The default is "no time category."
To set a time category, click "no time category" (or whatever time category is listed) and select the appropriate category from the drop-down list. "No time category" is always in the list, so you have the option not to use any time categories.
Time CurrentNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time Current
This report shows time accounting information for currently open sessions. Time by Period and Time by Study reports (except for the Time Details report) do not show information for currently open sessions. The report has this information:
Field DescriptionACM This column will have a dot if the table entry is for an automated
coding model. The column will be blank if the table entry is for a study.
ID The study or ACM IDStudy Name The study nameQuestion ID The question ID or the field will be blank if the activity is not
associated with a specific question.User Name The user name of the person who performed the activityActivity The tracked activityTracked Minutes The number of minutes spent in the activity
Time by Study Reports
186
Client Access to Data
The Time by Study reports should be used when you want to look at times by job, regardless of when the activity occurred. Use the Time by Study reports when you want to know how much time was spent on a study.
From the initial Time by Study report, you can select other reports to display the time accounting details for the job.
If you want to examine specific periods of time, use the Time by Period reports instead.
The Time by Period and Time by Study reports do not show information for currently open sessions. Use the Time Current report to see information for open sessions.
Time by CategoryNavigate: Administrator/Time Accounting/Time by Study/Right-click a study/Select Time by Category
The Time by Category report displays responses coded by time category. This report is only available if an account uses time categories.
The study ID and name display at the top of the page. The report has these fields:
Field DescriptionCategory The time category the user selected while working on the study.
If no time category was selected while a user was working on the study, the time is listed under the heading "No time category."
Responses Coded
The number of responses coded in tracked activities
Hours The total number of tracked hours for this studyhh:mm:ss
The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The ratio of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The cost of the recorded time, using the hourly rate information for each associate
Time by StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study
This report displays the time accounting information for studies. It shows all time spent on a study, regardless of when the activity occurred. If you right-click a study, you can select Time by Question, Time by Activity, Time by Category (if an account uses time categories), Time by Associate, Time by Associate, Question and Activity, and Time Details for that study. You also have the option to choose which columns to display.
Filter Options
This page shows a filtered list of all studies. Filtering is based on the settings in the filter bar at the top of the page. To change the filter, check the desired boxes in the filter bar, and click the Update button.
187
PrintDoc01 020813
The text filter in the bar allows you to filter studies by study ID or study name. To show only studies whose ID or name starts with certain characters, enter those characters in the Filter box and click the Update button. For example, if you enter " abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or Name start with abc will be shown in the list.
To find studies whose ID or name contains certain characters, put an asterisk as the first character of the filter. For example, if you enter "* abc" in the Filter box, only those studies whose ID or name contains abc will be shown in the study list.
Report Columns
The report has these columns:
Field DescriptionCreated Date The date the study was created
ACM This column will have a dot if the table entry is an ACMID The ID of the study or ACMName The name of the study or ACMStatus The status of the study or ACMThe next columns repeat for assigned work, unassigned work, and total time.
Field DescriptionResponses The number of responses in the studyResponses Coded The number of responses coded in tracked activitiesHours The total number of tracked hours for this studyhh:mm:ss
The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The ratio of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The cost of the recorded time, using the hourly rate information for each associate
Time by Question Within a StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study/Right-click study/Select Time by Question
This report displays the time accounting for the study, organized by question. It has this information:
Field DescriptionQuestion ID The question IDQuestion Label The question labelQuestion Type The question typeDeleted This column will have a dot if the question has been deleted.
188
Client Access to Data
Codebook ID The codebook IDResponses The current number of responses for this questionThe next columns repeat for assigned work, unassigned work, and total work:
Field DescriptionResponses Coded The number of responses coded in tracked activities for this userHours The number of hours spent on this questionhh:mm:ss
The hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The sum of the hourly rate for each associate who worked on the question, multiplied by the number of hours the associate spent on this question.
To choose the columns which are displayed, right-click a user and select Choose Columns.
The study ID and name display above the report. The study ID has a drop-down box with information about the study. You can navigate to the study question from the study ID drop-down box.
Time by Activity Within a StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study/Right-click study/Select Time by Activity
This report displays time accounting for the study, organized by activity. The activity is the first field. The name of the activity generally corresponds to the page location in Ascribe™.
The next columns repeat for assigned work, unassigned work, and total work:
Field DescriptionResponses Coded The number of responses coded in this activityHours The number of hours spent by all users in this activity.hh:mm:ss The hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When
hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The sum of the hourly rate for each associate who worked on the question, multiplied by the number of hours the associate spent on this question.
To choose the columns which are displayed, right-click a user and select Choose Columns.
189
PrintDoc01 020813
The study ID and name display above the report. The study ID has a drop-down box with information about the study. You can navigate to the study question from the study ID drop-down box.
Time by Associate Within a StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study/Right-click study/Select Time by Associate
This report displays time accounting for the study, organized by associate. The user name is the first field. The information below repeats for assigned work, unassigned work, and total work:
Field DescriptionResponses Coded The number of responses coded in this study by the associateHours The number of hours spent on this study by the associatehh:mm:ss The hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When
hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The sum of the hourly rate for each associate who worked on the question, multiplied by the number of hours the associate spent on this question.
To choose the columns which are displayed, right-click a user and select Choose Columns. The study ID and name display above the report. The study ID has a drop-down box with information about the study. You can navigate to the study question from the study ID drop-down box.
Time by Associate, Question, and Activity Within a StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study/Right-click study/Select Time by Associate,
Question, ActivityThis report displays time accounting for the study, organized by associate, then by question, and then by activity. It has this information:
Field DescriptionUser Name The user name of the associateQuestion ID The question ID. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question ID is blank.Question Label The question label. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question label is blank.Activity The name of the activity. Activity names generally correspond to
the page location in Ascribe™.The information below repeats for assigned work, unassigned work, and total work:
Field DescriptionResponses Coded The number of responses coded in this study by the associate
190
Client Access to Data
Hours The number of hours spent on this study by the associatehh:mm:ss The hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When
hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The sum of the hourly rate for each associate who worked on the question, multiplied by the number of hours the associate spent on this question.
To choose the columns which are displayed, right-click a user and select Choose Columns. The study ID and name display above the report. The study ID has a drop-down box with information about the study. You can navigate to the study question from the study ID drop-down box.
Time Details Within a StudyNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Study/Right-click study/Select Time Details
This report displays all time accounting records for this study. This report can be used in Excel™ to create a pivot table to examine the time accounting records in a custom format. It has this information:
Field DescriptionActivity The name of the activity. Activity names generally correspond to
the page location in Ascribe™.User Name The user name of the associateQuestion ID The question ID. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question ID is blank.Label The question label. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question label is blank.Type The question type. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question.Assigned A dot in this columns means that the user was assigned to the
study.Start The time the activity started, based on the server clock and
adjusted to your local time zoneResponses Coded The number of responses coded during this activityHours Tracked The number of tracked hours spent in this activityhh:mm:ss
The hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The cost is calculated as tracked hours multiplied by the rate for this user.
191
PrintDoc01 020813
To choose the columns which are displayed, right-click a user and select Choose Columns.
The study ID and name display above the report. The study ID has a drop-down box with information about the study. You can navigate to the study question from the study ID drop-down box.
Time by Period ReportsThe Time by Period reports should be used when you want to look at certain periods of time. For example, you might want to monitor how your coding staff spent their time last month. Time by Period reports can give you this information.
From the initial Time by Associate report, you can select other reports to display the time accounting details across activities and studies.
You can change the time period if you click the Change button at the top of the screen. A dialog box displays, and you can select the dates. Click OK to see the report for those dates.
For reports that show time by study instead of period, use the Time by Study Reports instead.
The Time by Period and Time by Study reports do not show information for currently open sessions. Use the Time Current report to see information for open sessions.
Time by PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period
This report displays time accounting information for users within the selected time period.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The report has this information:
Column DescriptionUser Name The user name of the associateSession Hours The total session hours for this associate for sessions in the
specified periodhh:mm:ss The session hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When session hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
192
Client Access to Data
Logon Hours The total logon hours for this associate in the specified period.hh:mm:ss The logon hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When logon hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Tracked Hours The total tracked hours for this associate in the specified period.hh:mm:ss The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
(last column has no title)
The tracked hours are also displayed as a percentage of session hours.
This report is similar to the default Time by Associate report, but differs in the way sessions are selected for inclusion. In this report, a session is included if the duration of the session overlaps the specified time period. In addition, if the duration of a session extends beyond the specified time period, the portion of the session outside the specified time period is omitted.
This report is useful to get an accurate picture of session time by user when there are sessions whose duration crosses the midnight boundaries of the selected period, and when the period includes open sessions.
Note that if sessions cross the midnight boundaries of the selected time period, the information presented in this report will differ from that in the Time by Associate report.
Time by Activity Within a PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period/Right-click user/Select Time by Activity
This report displays time accounting information for activities during the specified period. Information for currently open sessions is not contained in the report.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The report has these columns:
Field DescriptionActivity The name of the activity. Activity names generally correspond to
the page location in Ascribe™.
193
PrintDoc01 020813
Tracked Hours The total of tracked hours for this activity by all users during the specified period
hh:mm:ss The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Cost The cost of the tracked hours, computed by multiplying the rate for each associate by the number of tracked hours.
Responses The number of responses coded in this activityResponses Per Hour
The number of responses divided by tracked hours
The report also contains a “Not tracked” item, which lists the difference between session hours and tracked hours for the specified period. This is the user session time that is not captured as tracked time.
Time by Study Within a PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period/Right-click user/Select Time by Study
This report displays time accounting information for studies during the selected period.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The report has these columns:
Column DescriptionStudy ID The study IDStudy Name The study nameTracked Hours The total number of tracked hours for this study during the selected
periodhh:mm:ss The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Cost The cost of the tracked hours, calculated as the associate rate multiplied by the tracked hours
Responses The number of responses coded in the tracked activities
194
Client Access to Data
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by tracked hours
The report also contains a “Not tracked” item, which lists the difference between session hours and tracked hours for the specified period. This is the user session time that is not captured as tracked time.
Time by User and Study Status Within a PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period/Right-click in white space/Select Time by
User and Study StatusCoder/Time by User and Study Status
This report displays time accounting records for a specified period of time. The report displays one row for each user who had tracked activities during the specified period. For each such user, the report displays time accounting information classified by the status of the study at the time the activity was tracked. This report allows you to view how coders spent their time by study status.
Coders have access to this report, but the report will show information only for that coder. Administrators also have access to the report, and it will show information for all users.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The first five columns of the report are:
Field DescriptionUser Name The user name of the associateSession Hours The total number of session hours for this user during the periodhh:mm:ss
The session hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When session hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Logon Hours The total number of logon hours for this user during the periodhh:mm:ss The logon hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When logon hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
The next columns repeat for the total of all study status and for each study status classification:
195
PrintDoc01 020813
Field DescriptionResponses Coded The number of responses coded in tracked activities for this userTracked Hours The number of tracked hours spent for this userhh:mm:ss The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format.
When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
Cost The cost is calculated as tracked hours multiplied by the rate for this user
Like the Time by Associate report, sessions are selected for inclusion in this report if the start time of the session is within the period specified. Open sessions are not included in the report.
NoteTracking of activities by study status was introduced in Ascribe™ version 5.0. Any activities recorded before this release are assigned a study status of "coding in progress.”
Time by Study, User and Activity Within a PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period/Right-click user/Select Time by Study, User,
ActivityThis report displays time accounting for the study, organized by study ID, then by user, and then by activity.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The report has these columns:
Column DescriptionStudy ID The study IDStudy Name The study nameUser Name The user nameActivity The name of the activity. Activity names generally correspond to
196
Client Access to Data
the page location in Ascribe™Tracked Hours The tracked hours for this study and activityhh:mm:ss
The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Cost The cost of the activity, calculated as the tracked hours multiplied by the associate rate
Responses The number of responses coded in the tracked activityResponses Per Hour
The number of responses coded divided by hours
The report also contains a “Not tracked” item, which lists the difference between session hours and tracked hours for the specified period. This is the user session time that is not captured as tracked time.
Time Details Within a PeriodNavigate: Administrator/Select Time Accounting/Select Time by Period/Right-click user/Select Time Details
This report displays all time accounting records for a user. This report can be used in Excel™ to create a pivot table to examine the time accounting records in a custom format.
Select Date Range
There are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Report Columns
The report has these columns:
Column DescriptionActivity The name of the activity. Activity names generally correspond to
the page location in Ascribe™User Name The user name of the associateStudy ID The study IDStudy Name The study nameQuestion ID The question ID. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question ID is blank.Question Label The question label. If blank, this time accounting record is not
associated with a specific question, or the question label is blank.
197
PrintDoc01 020813
Question Type The question type. If blank, this time accounting record is not associated with a specific question.
Start The time the activity started, based on the server clock and adjusted to your local time zone
Tracked Hours The number of hours spent in this activityhh:mm:ss
The tracked hours also display in hours:minutes:seconds format. When tracked hours exceed 24, the number of days also displays. For example, 46.50 hours would display as 1 + 22:30:00, which means 1 day, 22 hours, and 30 minutes.
Responses Coded The number of responses coded during this activity
Production Bands ReportNavigate: Administrator/Production Bands
The Production Bands Report allows users with administrator privilege to run productivity numbers for their account.
Select Date RangeThere are two ways to select dates. You can use the drop-down list next to the Use local time box to select today, this week, this month, this year, last week, last month, or last year. When you select one of these options and click Update, the dates change to reflect your selection, and the report displays.
Another way to select dates is to click the date. A calendar displays. Use the arrows next to the calendar heading to scroll through the months. Or click the heading to see a list of months. Click the heading a second time to see a list of years. Use the arrows to scroll through the months or years.
Rows Represent a Time Accounting SessionEach row in the Production Bands Report represents a time accounting session in Ascribe™ where responses were coded in a particular window (either Review Responses, Phrase Analyzer, the Coder Window, or the Multiple Response Coding Tool). The time accounting session starts when a code is applied, and it stops when the user leaves the window. The responses coded in that session are counted. The characters for each response are counted and divided by the total responses to determine the average character band for the session.
Notes about Auto-Coding and ACM CodingResponses that are auto-coded using the Auto-coder script and Auto Coded on Load are not effectively reported in the production bands report.
Responses that are ACM coded are reported if the suggestions are accepted using the Desktop-ACM Coding Review tool; otherwise they are not effectively reported.
Sometimes, activities that have nothing to do with coding will be reported in the Production Bands Report. The auto-coding script tries to attribute coded responses to the user who ran the script and to the page the user is on while the script is running. If the user submits the auto-coding script and moves to another page, that page will be reported as the activity for the verbatim coded by the script.
Columns in the Production Bands Report
198
Client Access to Data
If you right-click the table, you have the option to choose which columns display. Here are the available columns:
Column DescriptionAccount The name of the Ascribe™ account. (As a default, this column is
not displayed. Right-click the table and select Choose Columns. You can choose which columns will display.)
Year The yearMonth 1 = January
2 = February3 = March4 = April5 = May6 = June7 = July8 = August9 = September10 = October11 = November12 = December
Quarter 1 = January, February, and March2 = April, May, and June3 = July, August, and September4 = October, November, and December
User Name The user who performed the activityBand # The Band # (Number) and Band description columns are used
together to describe the type of responses that were coded. The Band Numbers are 0 to 5. The Band description has the number of characters in brackets like this:[1-12].The character band is determined by how many responses are coded divided by the number of characters. For example, a user codes 80 responses, and the responses have 2,000 characters. 2000 divided by 80 is 25 so the user's work would be reported in Band Number 3. Individual Bands were not tracked Until October 20060 = [0] - This band includes responses from images and voice recordings where the character band can’t be determined; it also includes numeric responses.1 = [1-12] - This band includes responses with one or two words or perhaps a brand list.2 = [13-21] - This band includes responses with two to five words; they are short answers or phrases.3 = [22-64] - This band includes responses that are short paragraphs; it usually includes more than one idea and takes a bit of time to read and distinguish ideas.4 = [65-133] - This band includes responses that are long
199
PrintDoc01 020813
sentences with complicated or repeated ideas.5 = [>133] - This band includes responses that are long sentences with complicated or repeated ideas. A small percentage of responses loaded into Ascribe™ are this size or larger.
Band The Band description column shows the number of characters in brackets. For example, [0], [1-12], etc. See Band # for more information.
Activity Coding activities on these pages are tracked:Coding Page (Coder Window)Review ResponsesPhrase AnalyzerDesktop- Code Multiple ResponsesDesktop - ACM Coding ReviewNote that other pages may be display here; see Notes about Auto-Coding and ACM Coding.
Type The Type column displays the question type (closed, open, other specify, etc.)
Hours The Hours column is the time spent using a coding tool where at least one response was coded. Time accounting in Ascribe™ is based on entering and leaving certain web pages (tracked pages) on the site. Ascribe™ maintains a clock for each tracked activity. The clock starts when the user enters a tracked page. The clock stops (and restarts for a new activity) when the user enters a different tracked page. The clock also stops when the user navigates to the Home page, or when the user logs off. For example, if you are working in the Coding Page for 40 minutes and then you navigate to Review Responses, your tracked timewould stop when you leave the Coding Page. It would restart when you reach Review Responses.
Responses Coded
This column is the sum of all responses coded. It includes text, numeric, and media (images and voice recording.) Numeric responses are those which contain only the digits 0 to 9, spaces, and the hyphen character.
Text Responses Coded
Text responses are those which contain any character other than 0 to 9, spaces, and the hyphen character.*Numeric responses could fall into this category “if” they are coded in the same time accounting session as the text responses.*Text responses were not tracked separately until December 2006
Characters Coded This column is the determined by the number of characters in all text responses coded divided by the sum of characters included in text response count.
Export the Production Bands Report
Click the Excel™ icon ( ) to export the data to Excel™.
200
Ascribe Presentations™Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe™ Presentations
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe™ PresentationsAscribe Presentations are a full featured set of tools for presenting Ascribe™ data in various graphical and tabular formats. These tools are part of Ascribe™ Web and do not require additional installation of any software.
You can generate these graphs with Ascribe Presentations: bar, line, and pie charts, co-occurrence maps, correlation matrices, proportional code font views, multidimensional scalings, clusters, word clouds, and concept clouds.
Also, you can create many types of cross-tabs: single-dimension list of frequencies, crossed frequencies (one or more questions on the side and one or more as banners), filtered cross-tabs, stacked banners, and grids.
The Cross-Tabs module has many options to customize the tables. You can choose font size, sorting, drill downs, percentages, t-tests, etc. The tables can contain "codebook codes" or the actual words extracted from the respondent's original responses. You can also create bar, line, or pie charts at the same time you create the cross-tab.
The cross-tabs and graphs can be exported to Excel®, PowerPoint, or a simple HTML file that can be saved and sent independently from Ascribe™ Presentations.
Base and Professional EditionsAscribe Presentations has two versions: Base Edition and Professional Edition. Your version is dependent on your license agreement. The words "Base Edition" or "Professional Edition" will display on the Ascribe Presentations main page to let you know which version you have. The Base Edition does not allow access to all features of Ascribe Presentations. The chart below explains which features are available in the two editions:
Features Base
Professional
Graphs X X
Bar Charts X X
Line Charts X X
Pie Charts X X
Proportional Code Font Views X X
Co-Occurence Maps X X
Correlation Matrices Across Codes X
Multidimensional Scalings X
Clusters XMultiple Charts X
Cross-Tabs X X
201
Sort Tables X XCrosstab Words (Rather Than Codes) X XHighlight Column Percentage Differences X XShow Ranks X XAbility To Filter Tables X XGraphs Attached To Tables XCo-Occurrence Graphs Across Questions Xt-Tests Across Columns X
Word Clouds & Concept Clouds X XAbility To Sort Words (Alpha/Freq/Random) XDisplay Frequencies And Percentages XAbility To Filter Word/Concept Clouds X
Options XAllow Drill Down XExport To Word/Power Point/Excel XExport To JPEG XExport To HTML XCopy To Clipboard XEmail Results X
Ascribe Presentations Main PageThe Ascribe Presentations main page has a toolbar across the top of the page and a list of presentation tools. To select one of the tools, click one of the image buttons.
The toolbar has the following fields:
Field DescriptionQuestion Selection
Select the type or types of questions for the reports. Options are open, closed, and other specify. You can also select to work with only questions that are completely coded.
Study ID: Study Name
This field has a drop-down box with study information.
Studies This button navigates to the Studies page. The right-click menu also provides navigation to the Studies page or other areas of
202
Ascribe Presentations™
Ascribe™.
Cross-TabsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Cross-Tabs
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Cross-TabsYou can create many types of cross-tabs with this module. You select the questions to be used on the Settings page, which has six tabs of options.
The Settings page has a toolbar with these fields:
Field DescriptionRun This option runs the report and navigates to the Results page.
Click this button after you have selected the questions and various options.
Settings This option navigates from the Results page to the Settings page. (It is grayed out on the Settings page.)
Study ID: Study Name
This field has a drop-down box with study information.
Ascribe Presentations
This button navigates to the Ascribe Presentations main page. The right-click menu also provides navigation to the Ascribe Presentations main page or other areas of Ascribe™.
Questions TabThe Questions Tab has three lists of questions for the Cross-Tab report. In order for a question to be listed on the Questions Tab, the question must have the Cross-Tab task selected on Task Tab of the Edit Question dialog. You must select at least one side question or one grid question in order to generate a cross-tab table.
203
PrintDoc01 020813
Choose from these options:
Option DescriptionSide Questions These questions will display on the side of the table. A cross-tab
table generates for each side question. If you want to select or unselect all the side questions, click the check box next to the Side Questions heading. Options:
- Use the Up and Down buttons to move a selected question higher or lower in the list.
Banner Questions
These questions will display along the top of the table. You can select more than one banner question. Any banner question that contains more than 256 codes will display only the first 256.Options:
- You can filter the list of questions and display only closed-ended questions if you click the check box next to Closed-Ends Only.
- Banners can be stacked over each other with the use of this button. If you select two questions and click the Stack Banners button, a new temporary banner question is created. You can stack up to 3 questions. A stacked question cannot be stacked over another one. It is advised to use only closed-ended questions as the number of codes may grow very quickly.
- Use the Up and Down buttons to move a selected question higher or lower in the list. When you are stacking banner questions, you can use these buttons to define the order in which questions are stacked over each other.
Grids This option compares questions that share the same codebook. The codebook ID (in bold) displays first, followed by the questions which share the codebook. You can select all questions by clicking the box next to the codebook ID or you can select individual questions. Option:
- This option displays all questions that share a codebook, including those in other studies. It enables you to make comparisons across studies.
Crosstab By This drop-down box displays all the closed-ended questions of the current study. When you select a side question and a question here, the Cross-Tab module creates one set of tables for each of the codes of the selected closed-end. (The difference is between using the Crosstab By option and selecting a banner question is that the banner question will have only one table. The Crosstab By option will create as many tables as there are codes in the closed-end.)
Each question has this format:
204
Ascribe Presentations™
Field DescriptionWhen you click this symbol, a drop-down dialog displays codebook information and the list of codes. Use the double arrow button ( or ) to collapse the upper or lower panes of the dialog.Click the check box to select or unselect a question.
Question ID.Question Label
The question ID displays, followed by the question label (if the label is present.) Closed-ended questions have brackets around these fields.
(Responses Coded/Total Responses)
The number of responses coded in the question followed by the total number of responses in the question.
(Percentage) The percentage of responses that have been coded in the question.
Here is an example of a cross-tab with only a side question:
Here is an example of a question where the language question is cross-tabbed by the country question:
Here is an example of a cross-tab grid across shared questions:
Codes TabOn the Codes Tab, you can select options that apply to codes and/or nets.
205
PrintDoc01 020813
Here are the options:
Option DescriptionCodes On The Side
The tables will display codes on the side, rather than words.
Codes As Banners
The tables will display codes in the banners, rather than words.
Display Select to display:Codes and NetsCodes OnlyNets OnlyApplies to Banners - applies the Display settings to banners also.
Show Code Output ID
Select this option to display the code output ID in front of the code.
Responses Count
This option applies to nets only. But default, net counts are unduplicated counts of respondents. Unduplicated means that if a respondent was given more than one code belonging to a net, the respondent will be counted only once in the net total. If you select the Responses Count option, the respondent counts will not be unduplicated.
Codes To Ignore Enter codes that you want to ignore in the side questions. You can enter the code output ID or the code description. Separate multiple entries with semicolons.
Codes Not To Sort
Enter codes that you do not want to be sorted. You can enter the code output ID or the code description. Separate multiple entries
206
Ascribe Presentations™
with semicolons.Code Selection Use the Get Codes button to see a list of questions. Check the box
next to a question to see the list of codes and nets in the question. By default, each code is selected. When you unselect a code or a net, it will not display in the cross-tab table. Underneath each codebook list is a text box where you can merge codes. The codes must be separated by a semicolon. To create multiple groups, type a vertical bar (|) and enter another combination. Here is an example: 1;3|5;6;7|12;13;14
Here's an example of the Get Codes codebook list. In this example, the text box contains three codes to be merged:
Here is the cross-tab using those settings:
Words TabThe Words Tab has options related to the generation of word counts (as opposed to code counts.)
207
PrintDoc01 020813
Here are the options:
Option DescriptionWords On The Side
The tables will display words on the side, rather than codes. Selecting this option will unselect its equivalent in the Codes Tab (either you want tables of codes or words, but not both.)
Words As Banners
The tables will display words in the banners, rather than codes. Selecting this option will unselect its equivalent in the Codes Tab (either you want tables of codes or words, but not both.)
Response Source
Select to display:VerbatimTranslationTranscriptionUse Verbatim if no Translation/Transcription
Min Word Length
Words that are equal to or less than the number entered here will be ignored.
Words To Ignore A default list of words appears in the text box. The list is optional; you can unselect it with the check box. Also, you can change the list to whatever you want (be sure to use semicolons to separate the words.) To restore the default ignore list, click the Default button at the bottom of the Options Tab.
When creating word count tables, it is advised to set the Minimum Frequency field (on the Options Tab) to something meaningful like 10 or 50. Otherwise, you may end up with thousands of words. Your table could be huge and difficult to read.
Here is an example of a word count table, with minimum frequency set to 50:
208
Ascribe Presentations™
Drill Down with WordsIf the Allow Drilldown box is checked on the Options Tab, you can click a word in the list to display the list of responses which contain that word. The default display centers the selected word in the list, so it is easy to see the context in which it appears. If the response before the keyword is longer than 50 characters, the response will be truncated. The truncation is noted with a leading ellipsis (...). You can choose whether the responses are centered or not.
Here is an example with the keyword centered:
Here is an example where the keyword is not centered:
209
PrintDoc01 020813
If you click on any line, you will see the respondent's answers to all questions to the current study.
Here are the options in the word drill down pane:
Option DescriptionResponse List You have the choice to display the responses that contain the
selected word or you can choose word proximities. Click any line in the table to see the respondent's answers to all questions in the current study. You can export the table to HTML or Excel®. Also, you can export all data for these respondents (all of their verbatim in the study) to a text file.
Word Proximities
Creates a table of words that are close to the selected word and will also display them in a circular graph. The graph is displayed underneath the table. You can export the table to HTML or Excel®.
Graph Size Enter whatever size you would like the graph to be.Set As Filter Use this option to set the selected word as filter for the cross-tab.
You have to re-run the cross-tab to see the filtering.Center Keyword Use this check box to toggle on or off the centering of the selected
word.
210
Ascribe Presentations™
In this example of a word proximities table, the word "free" appears next to the word "static" 71 times. The word "the" is next to "static" 35 times and is one word away from "static" 26 times.
Here is an example of the graph that goes with the table:
Graphs TabThe Graphs Tab is where you select the type of graph you want to generate. The left side of the page lets you choose the graphs that are associated with each table. The right side lets you generate summary graphs across questions.
211
PrintDoc01 020813
Here are the options:
Option DescriptionDisplay Below Each Table
None Choose None if you do not want any graphs for the cross-tab.Graph Height Lets you specify the height of the graph.Descriptive Graphs
Bar Charts Generates a bar chart for the cross-tab. One Series Per Banner Point - The bar charts will
display each banner point as a different series. It allows for comparison of data across banners in a graphical way.
Vertical - Displays the bar chart vertically rather than horizontally.
Line Charts Generates a line chart for the cross-tab.Pie Charts Generates a pie chart for the cross-tab, which are most likely to
be used for closed-ended questions.Analytic Graphs Co-Occurrences The purpose of a co-occurrence chart is to look at the frequency
with which codes were applied to the same response. A co-occurrence map contains circles and lines. Circles are codes, and line represent the co-occurrence between two codes. The high the code frequency, the larger the circle. The higher the co-occurrence between two codes, the thicker the line.
Vertical Co- Represents the co-occurrences in a vertical way rather than a
212
Ascribe Presentations™
Occurrences circle.First n Co-Occurrences
Displays the first n co-occurrences in terms of frequency.
Min Co-Occurrence
Co-occurrences below this number will not display.
Hide Codes with No Co-Occurrence
Codes that have no-occurrence with other codes will not display.
Correlation Matrices
Displays the correlation matrix between each pair of codes. The bluer the color, the higher the correlation between two questions. The redder the color, the higher the negative correlation between questions. The whiter the color, the higher the non-existence of any type of correlation.
Include Nets In Analytic Graphs
We advise you not to use nets in co-occurrence graphs and correlation matrices as they contain redundant information. For example, all codes will have high co-occurrences with their parent nets.
First N Codes Enter a number to restrict the number of codes displayed in the analytic graphs.
Cross-Questions Graphs
These graphs help you visualize the relationship between two questions or two sets of codes (or words) coming from two different questions. (Must also select Correlation Matrices, Co-Occurrences, or Vertical Co-Occurrences under Analytic Graphs to use the following options.)
Cross Questions Correlations
Generates a correlation matrix across all the selected numeric questions (questions in which the responses are numbers.) Note that for readability, the highest 10% of positive correlations are surrounded by a red square.
Vertical Co-Occurrences Across Questions
Generates a co-occurrence graph for each pair of side questions selected in the Questions Tab. The following options are useful if you have large tables and want to limit the amount of information exported to a chart:
First n Co-Occurrences - Display the first n co-occurrences in terms of frequency.
Min Co-Occurrence - Co-occurrences below this number will not display.
Hide Codes with No Co-Occurrence - Codes that have no-occurrence with other codes will not display.
Options TabThis tab contains a variety of options for creating cross-tabs.
The options are:
Option DescriptionGeneral Options Sort Tables Provides the ability to sort tables by decreasing order of
213
PrintDoc01 020813
frequency. If the table contains nets, the nets are sorted first and then each code (or subnet) within each net. This option applies only to regular tables, not to grid tables.
t-tests A t-test is a statistical test which can be performed between two column percentages in order to determine if the difference of percentage observed is significant or not. If you check that box, all the banner codes are assigned numbers which display in parentheses underneath the codes. Red numbers display in each cell indicating the columns which are statistically different. Note that you can set the confidence level of the t-test (80%, 90% 95% or 99%). See the example below.
Allow Drilldown Allows you to click any cell in any table or graph and look at all the responses that make up that cell. A separate dialog opens with the responses and allows export to HTML or Excel®. Also, you can export all data for these respondents (all of their verbatim in the study) to a text file. If you click the "Set as Filter" button, it will set the current respondents as a filter for all your tables. Remember to refresh your tables by clicking "Tables" button after the drill down window has closed. Clicking any line of the grid will display the respondent details. If you plan to generate hundreds of tables with large banners, you may not want to allow drill down, as it may render the tables more slowly.
Proportional Font Depth
This is a very powerful feature that lets you see which codes have a higher frequency without looking at the numbers themselves. If checked, the highest frequency codes or nets will appear in black. The lower the frequency, the lighter the font.It may be better to display only codes or only nets here as nets may make all the codes' fonts look light.
Proportional Background Color
This enables you to quickly locate cells that have a high percentage. The higher the percentage, the deeper the background color.
Table Of Content This is a very useful feature if you are generating many tables. It creates a link to each table at the top of the result page. It also creates a "Top" link above each table so you can easily navigate back to the top.
Enable Export To Word
Allows export to Word. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Enable Export To PowerPoint
Allows export to PowerPoint. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Max. Rows Per Slide
Use this option to specify how many lines per table you want per page in exports to Word or PowerPoint.
Split Excel Cells If the user displays absolute values and percentages in each of the
214
Ascribe Presentations™
table cells, it is difficult to manipulate these numbers in Excel. If you select this option, you will see multiple sheets in Excel: a sheet with the absolute values and percentages in the same cell, a sheet with just the absolute values in the cell, and a sheet with just the percentages.
Total These options define what number should appear in the top row of each table. The main purpose of this option is to adapt column percentages.
Total Sample Displays the total sample.Total Coded Displays the number of people who gave at least one answer that
was coded in the current side question.Raw Counts Allows you to define whether or not you want raw counts to appear
in the tables. It may be that you just want percentages.Percentages None Displays no percentages.Column Total Displays percentages based on the total column (first column.)Row Total Displays percentages based on the total row (first row.)Table Total Displays percentages based on the table total.Percentage Decimals
A number between 0 and 2 that lets you choose how many decimals you want to be displayed for percentages.
Highlight Column Percentage Differences
This tool enables you to compare banners column percentages to the total column percentages. Higher percentages are displayed in blue and lower percentages in red.
Minimum Difference Displayed
Enter the minimum percentage necessary to have the differences displayed. The default is 10.
Display Minimum Frequency
This field allows you to display only side codes that are above a certain value.
First N Codes This field allows you to display the top N codes in terms of frequency. A zero in this field means this option is not used. Note that this applies to regular side tables, not to grids.
Applies Only To Banners
Applies First N Codes only to banners.
Alternate Row Color
If checked, table rows will alternate colors between white and light yellow to make them more easily readable.
Show Date If checked, the current date will display in the top left corner of each table. It will also appear at the bottom left of each chart.
Show Logo If checked and a logo has been provided, the account's logo displays on the chart. (Email [email protected] if you would like to provide a logo for your account.)If checked and a logo has not been provided, the Ascribe™ logo
215
PrintDoc01 020813
displays on the chart.If the field is not checked, no logo displays on the chart.
Total Coded Respondents
At the bottom of each table, this option displays the number of respondents have received at least one code.
Total Uncoded Respondents
At the bottom of each table, this option displays the number of respondents that did not receive a code. (The total of uncoded respondents and coded respondents should always equal the sample size.)
Total Coded Responses
Displays at the bottom of each table. This option acts like a global unduplicated net of all the responses that were coded. Underneath that number, you will find the average number of responses coded by respondent.
Show Average for Numeric Questions
If checked, whenever Cross-Tab encounters a numeric question (a question in which the responses are numbers), the average and standard deviation will be displayed for each banner point underneath the table. (The question must be coded in order to generate the deviations.) Note that whenever you check that option, Cross-Tab also generates a summary table of averages at the bottom of the Results page.
Show Ranks Whether or not the tables are sorted, by selecting that option, Cross-Tab will add a number in bold to the left of each code and net giving you its order in terms of frequency.
Text Column Width
Defines the column width of the code text column.
Values Column Width
Defines the column width of the code values column.
Font Size Specifies the font size of the code labels and code values displayed in each table.
Title Specifies the title that will appear in blue and bold at the top of the Results page. By default, it contains the study ID and study name.
Default Resets all of the options to their default values.Save Saves all options.Here is an example of a t-test:
216
Ascribe Presentations™
Filters TabUse the Filters Tab to filter the tables. Click the Get Filters button to display a list of questions.
To select a filter, click the check box next to a question, and then click a code that will act as the filter.
The filter titles will appear on top of each table and underneath the title of each graph. If you use multiple filters, "And" will be displayed as + and "Or" as |.
Note that there are two other ways to filter your set of tables:
By double clicking any cell of your table By clicking the "Set As Filter" button in the drill down table window.
Whatever the way you set the filters, you can remove them by clicking the Remove Filter
button ( ) on the Results page. This button only displays when a filter is set.
Results PageClick the Run button to generate all the tables and/or graphs you have requested. The Results page displays the tables and charts you created. You have several options for exporting them. Whatever export you use, you will be prompted with a dialog box that asks if you want to open or save the file.
If you want to use a cell as a filter, simply double click it.
Here are the options on the Results page:
Option Description
Exports tables to an HTML file. If you have also generated charts, the HTML
217
PrintDoc01 020813
file and the related charts will be placed in a .zip file. You will have to save and unzip the file on your computer. Exports tables to Excel®. Each table will be in a separate worksheet.
Exports tables and charts to Word (only available if Enable Export to Word is selected on the Options Tab.)Exports tables and charts to PowerPoint (only available if Enable Export to PowerPoint is selected on the Options Tab.)
Append
Appends the current results to the previously saved files.
Creates a form so that you can email the results. Fill in the form, select the type of attachments you want to send, and click the Send button. A message displays when the email has been sent. Click Cancel to return to the Results page or Settings to return to the Settings page.Copies a table or chart to the clipboard so you can copy it to another application. To paste bar charts, line charts, or pie charts from the clipboard to Word, first open a Word document and then click the Copy to Clipboard button. In Word, you must select Paste Special rather than Paste. After you select Paste Special, select Device Independent Bitmap from the popup menu that appears, and then click OK. The chart will be copied to Word from the clipboard.
Drill Down Options with CodesIf the Allow Drilldown box is selected on the Options tab, the actual responses are available when you click a cell of a table or part of a graph. When you hover over table cell, the cell changes color to let you know more information is available. When you hover over areas in a graph, a small hand displays to let you know more information is available.
Here is an example of the drill down page for a code in a table:
You can also see all of a respondent's answers to the questions in the study by clicking a verbatim. Here is an example of the respondent drill down page:
218
Ascribe Presentations™
Multi-Media FilesYou can use the drill-down options on a verbatim that points to a multimedia file (image, audio or video.) When you click the file name, the appropriate player will start.
Create Bar, Line, or Pie ChartsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select a chart type
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select a chart typeThe screens for bar, line and pie charts look similar, and the process to create them is similar.
To create a chart, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top of the screen. The number to the right of each question is the number of responses/coded responses it contains, followed by the percent coded. Closed-ended questions are surrounded by square brackets.
The codebook for the selected question displays on the left side of the screen. Select which codes and/or nets you want to graph. You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes and/or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used.
219
PrintDoc01 020813
The Options pane is the right side of the screen. All options are not available for each type of chart. Note that all the settings (except the filters) will remain across Ascribe™ sessions. Here is a list of the options available for each type of chart:
Option Chart DescriptionTitle All The title defaults to “X Chart,” where X equals the type
of chart. It is followed by the question ID and question label. You can change the title.
Width All
Set the width of the chart in pixels or have the width automatically set with the default of zero. With the auto size option, the width will depend on the number of codes/nets used.
Height BarLine
Sets the height of the chart in pixels.
Orientation Bar
Usually bar charts are displayed horizontally, but you may change it to vertical. Note that you can not display the average on vertically-oriented bar charts. Line charts must be horizontal.
Display Frequencies
All If checked, the frequency of each code/net displays on top of each bar and in the chart labels.
Display Code Output ID
All If checked, the code output ID of each code/net displays in the chart labels. (For pie charts, the code description displays when you hover over a pie piece. Click on a pie piece to see the drill down window, which has the output code ID.)
Show Date All If checked, the date the chart was created displays on the chart.
Show Logo All If checked and a logo has been provided, the account's logo displays on the chart. (Email [email protected] if you would like to provide a logo for your account.)If checked and a logo has not been provided, the Ascribe™ logo displays on the chart.If the field is not checked, no logo displays on the chart.
Minimum Frequency
All This field allows you to display only codes or nets that are above a certain value. For example, a minimum frequency of 10 means to display only those codes or nets with a count of 10 or above. This field overrides the selection of codes or nets made on the codebook side of the screen. A zero in this field means display all codes or nets selected on the codebook side.
First N Codes or Nets
All This field allows you to display the top N codes/nets in terms of frequency. This field overrides the minimum frequency and the selection on the codebook side of the screen. A zero in this field means this option is not used.
Net Level Bar This option is used when you are charting nets. It allows
220
Ascribe Presentations™
Lineyou to limit the nets to a specific level. For example, it may not make sense to compare nets across all levels as level 2 nets will always have lower counts than level 1 nets. A zero in this field means this option is not used.
Codes to Ignore
BarLine
You can enter either code text or code output IDs that you want to ignore in the charts. For example, you may want to ignore no answer codes. You can enter several text or values, but they must be separated by a semicolon. Example: Nothing; N.A.;98;99
Display Average
BarLine
For horizontal charts, this option adds a line across all the bars which displays the average. It will also display its value.
Sort Codes by Frequency
Bar This option displays the bars in decreasing order of frequency. Note that if nets are being charted, the subnets and codes will be sorted within each parent net.
3D Bar If checked, the bars display in three dimensions.% All This option displays the figures on the top of each bar
in percentages rather than in absolute figures.Percentage Decimals
All The accepted values are 0, 1, or 2. If you enter any other number, the field will default to 1.
Graph By BarLine
This field has a drop-down list of closed-ended questions. You can choose one in order to compare codes or nets across all the values of that closed-end. The chart will display a series of bars or lines for each code of the selected question.
Stacked Bars Bar If you selected a question in the “Graph by” list, this field displays the bars as stacked on top of each other instead of next to each other.
Filters BarLine
You can filter the data by closed-ended questions. If you check this box, a pane displays with closed-ended questions and their codes. From that pane, you can select any combination of the codes as a filter by using the And or the Or buttons. The code(s) used as filter(s) will display underneath the chart title in the chart.
Click the OK button to generate a chart. The chart displays, and you can save or export it. You can return to the Ascribe Presentations main page by clicking the Ascribe Presentations button.
Here is an example of the Options pane for a bar chart:
221
PrintDoc01 020813
Here is an example of a filter pane (in this case we are filtering on Spanish):
Bar Chart ExamplesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Bar Charts
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Bar ChartsBar charts are usually used to compare frequencies across codes and or nets. This section contains examples of common bar charts.
Here is a simple unsorted bar chart with the average:
222
Ascribe Presentations™
Note that code texts display a maximum of 30 characters. To display the full text, hover above any of the bars, and a tool tip with it displays.
When you create a chart with codes and nets, nets are represented with diagonal lines. When bar charts contain nets or codes of different levels, each level gets its own color. Here is an example:
Line Chart ExamplesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Line Charts
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Line ChartsLine charts are used to display the evolution of data across time. Also, they can be a replacement for bar charts when displaying series data. An example of series data would be how codes differ from one country to another.
Here is an example of a basic line chart:
223
PrintDoc01 020813
Here is the same example across three countries:
Pie Chart ExampleNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Pie Charts
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Pie ChartsPie charts are used to compare proportions. For example, you can compare proportions of codes between each other or nets between each other. You can also compare sample sizes (country, gender, region, etc…)
Here is an example of a simple pie chart:
224
Ascribe Presentations™
Co-Occurrence MapsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Co-Occurence Maps
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Co-Occurrence MapsA co-occurrence map displays how frequently codes and/or nets were applied. It also displays which codes and/or nets were applied together the most frequently.
The co-occurrence map uses circles and lines to show these frequencies. The circles represent codes and/or nets, and the code/net descriptions display above the circles. The more the code was used, the larger the circle will be.
The lines between the circles represent how often the two codes or nets were both applied to responses. The thickness of the lines represents the number of responses that have both codes or nets applied. The higher the co-occurrence between two codes/nets, the thicker the line will be.
Here is a simple example:
225
PrintDoc01 020813
The co-occurrence screen is similar to the other chart screens, but has different options. To create a co-occurrence chart, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top.
You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes and/or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used. (The + check box is used to create maps across questions.)
The last step is to set the options on right side of the screen.
Here are the options for a co-occurrence map:
Option DescriptionTitle The title defaults to “Co-Occurrence Map,” followed by the question ID
and question label. You can change the title.Graph Size Sets the diameter of the circle in pixels.Margin Size Sets the margin around the map in pixels. The margins are the main
containers for the code and net labels. When you change the margin size, only the side margins are affected.
Largest Circle Size Sets the size of the largest circle (the one with the highest frequency.) All other circles’ sizes will be proportional to the largest one.
226
Ascribe Presentations™
Code Font Size Sets the font size for the code and net labels.Cooc Font Size Sets the font size for the numbers on the lines.Largest Line Width Sets the width of the largest line (the one with the highest co-
occurrence.) All other lines’ sizes will be proportional to the largest line.
Rescale Line Widths Increases the thickness of the lines. For example, we have co-occurrences ranging between 50 and 70. In this example, the thinnest co-occurrence line will be 5/7 of the largest one. The rescale line widths option tells the map to define 50 as 1 and 70 as 70.
Display Frequencies If checked, the frequency of each code/net displays on top of each circle and in the map labels.
Max Characters per Code
Enter the maximum number of characters you want to display for each code.
Display Code Output ID
If checked, the code output ID of each code/net displays in the map labels.
Show Date If checked, the date the chart was created displays on the chart.Show Logo If checked and a logo has been provided, the account's logo displays
on the chart. (Email [email protected] if you would like to provide a logo for your account.)If checked and a logo has not been provided, the Ascribe™ logo displays on the chart.If the field is not checked, no logo displays on the chart.
Minimum Frequency
This field allows you to display only codes or nets that are above a certain value. For example, a minimum frequency of 10 means to display only those codes or nets with a count of 10 or above. This field overrides the selection of codes or nets made on the codebook side of the screen. A zero in this field means display all codes or nets selected on the codebook side.
Minimum Co-Occurrence
This field allows you to display only codes or nets that have co-occurrences above a certain value. A zero in this field means display all codes or nets selected on the codebook side.
First N Codes or Nets
This field allows you to display the top N codes/nets in terms of frequency. This field overrides the minimum frequency and the selection on the codebook side of the screen. A zero in this field means this option is not used.
First N Co-Occurrences
Use this option to only display co-occurrences. It does not display the codes’ relative importance to each other. This option calculates all of the co-occurrences and displays the first N ones, where N equals a number that you enter.
Hide Codes/Nets with No Co-Occurrence
This option displays only those codes/nets that have co-occurrence with other codes/nets.
Net Level This option is used when you are charting nets. It allows you to limit the nets to a specific level. For example, it may not make sense to compare nets across all levels as level 2 nets will always have lower counts than level 1 nets. A zero in this field means this option is not
227
PrintDoc01 020813
used.Codes to Ignore You can enter either code text or code output IDs that you want to
ignore in the charts. For example, you may want to ignore no answer codes. You can enter several text or values, but they must be separated by a semicolon. Example: Nothing; N.A.;98;99
Sort Codes by Frequency
This option displays the codes in decreasing order of frequency. Note that if nets are being charted, the subnets and codes will be sorted within each parent net.
Colors Set the colors of the circles and lines. When you click one of the color buttons, a color screen displays. Click any color, and it displays next to the OK button. Click OK to confirm or Cancel to ignore.
Filters You can filter the data by closed-ended questions. If you check this box, a pane displays with closed-ended questions and their codes. From that pane, you can select any combination of the codes as a filter by using the And or the Or buttons. The code(s) used as filter(s) will display underneath the chart title in the chart.
Click the OK button to generate the chart. The chart displays, and you can save or export it. You can return to the Ascribe Presentations main page by clicking the Ascribe Presentations button.
Here is the Option pane for the co-occurrence screen:
228
Ascribe Presentations™
Here is the color screen:
Correlation MatricesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Correlation Matrices
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Correlation MatricesCorrelation matrices allow you to look at the strength and direction of a relationship between two variables (codes and/or nets in our case.) While co-occurrence maps provide a simple count of variables, correlation matrices examine the positive, neutral, or negative relationship between the variables. The mathematical formula for correlation is applied, and a number between -1 and +1 is displayed. A 1 means the variables are totally correlated, 0 means no correlation at all, and -1 means inversely correlated.
A positive correlation (1 or greater than .04) between two codes means that, in general, when one code is applied, the other code is also applied. For example, there is likely to be a positive correlation between these two questions: "Did it rain today?" and "Did you take your umbrella?"
A negative correlation (-1 or close to -1) between two codes means that, in general, when one code is applied, the other code is not applied. For example, there is likely to be a negative correlation between these two questions: "Do you smoke?" and "Do you run marathons?"
No correlation (0 or close to 0) between two codes means that there is no relationship between the codes. One code cannot predict the outcome of the other, and they are considered statistically independent. For example, the questions "Do you like Mozart?" and "Do you run marathons?" have nothing to do with each other.
To create the matrices, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top.
You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes and/or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
229
PrintDoc01 020813
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used. (The + check box is used to create maps across questions.)
The last step is to set the options on right side of the screen.
The Options pane has many of the same fields as the Co-Occurrence Option Pane, with one addition. The field Display Correlation gives the user the option to display the actual correlation number on each square.
The colors in the matrices indicate the correlation. White means uncorrelated or that the correlation = 0. The darker the blue, the more the variables are correlated. The darker the red, the more the variables are inversely correlated.
As with the other charts, you can hover above any square, and a tool tip displays the code text. Also, you can click a square and see the responses or respondents involved.
Here is the Options pane for correlation matrices:
Here is an example of a correlation matrix with the correlation numbers on each square:
230
Ascribe Presentations™
Co-Occurrence Maps and Correlation Matrices Across QuestionsNavigate: Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Graphs/Select Co-Occurrence
To create a co-occurrence map or a correlation matrix between codes across questions, click the + check box located on the top of the screen:
Next, select a question. Every time you select a question, that question’s codes are added to the check list below the question box. In this example, the country and gender questions are selected:
231
PrintDoc01 020813
The next step is to select the set of codes. Here is an example of where the three country codes and the two gender codes were selected:
Proportional Code Font ViewsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Proportional Code Font Views
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Proportional Code Fonts View Proportional code font charts enable the user to display a codebook by adjusting the font size and/or the font color depth based on each code's frequency. To create a chart, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top. You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes and/or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
232
Ascribe Presentations™
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used. The last step is to set the options on right side of the screen.
Many of the options are the same as other charts. Here are the options unique to Proportional Code Font Charts:
Status DescriptionMin Font Size and Max Font Size
The min font size will be applied to the code/net with the smallest frequency. The max font size will be applied to the code/net with the largest frequency. All other codes/nets will have a font size somewhere in between based on its frequency.If you do not want to use proportional font sizes (and only use the color depth), just give the same value to both the min and the max font sizes.
Display First N Characters
Use this field to shorten long code descriptions. If the field is 0, the entire code/net description text displays; otherwise, the first N characters display.
Adjust Font Density
If checked, the codes/nets with the largest frequency display in black. The smaller the frequency, the more they display towards the light gray color.
In this example, only the font size is proportional to the frequency (and the list is sorted):
In this example, only the font density is proportional to the frequency:
In this example, both the font density and size are proportional to the frequency:
233
PrintDoc01 020813
As with the other charts, drill down information is available when you click any code. A window displays with all the responses/respondents where that code has been applied.
Multidimensional ScalingsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Multidimensional Scalings
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Multidimensional ScalingsMultidimensional Scaling (MDS) are a way to graphically represent a correlation matrix in a two-dimensional space. It enables the user to quickly spot which codes/nets are similar or dissimilar. Similar objects (those with a positive correlation) are represented by points that are close to each other. Dissimilar objects (those with a negative correlation) are represented by points that are far apart.
To create a map, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top. You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes and/or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used.
The + check box is used to create maps across questions. To create a map across questions, click the + check box located on the top of the screen. Next, select a question. Every time you select a question, that question’s codes are added to the check list below the question box.
The last step is to set the options on right side of the screen.
Here is the Options pane:
234
Ascribe Presentations™
Most of the options are the same as other charts. The only unique option is Display Legends. If many codes/nets are mapped, their text may overlap on the map. Display Legends puts the code output IDs on the map, and the code descriptions in a column to the right of the map. If you do not select Display Legends, the code descriptions display with the code output IDs on the map.
In this example, Display Legends has been selected:
In this example, Display Legends has not been selected:
235
PrintDoc01 020813
ClustersNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Clusters
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select ClustersCluster analysis is a branch of statistics called "multivariate statistics," which means multiple variables are examined simultaneously. Multivariate statistics is often called 'exploratory data analysis' as its main purpose is to explore the data. When doing exploratory data analysis, sometimes we find it useful and sometimes not.
In Ascribe™, we are applying cluster analysis to codes. More often, it is done on respondents. When done on respondents, cluster analysis tries to create groups of respondents that are similar by trying to maximize the similarities within a group while maximizing the dissimilarities across groups. "Similar" means that they tend to respond likely to several responses (usually metric responses such as a scale from 1 to 5.)
However, here we are trying to create groups of codes that are similar. "Similar" in this case means that they have a high correlation coefficient. The correlation coefficient is a number between -1 and +1. Anything around 0 means that there is no correlation, and anything close to 1 means that two codes are highly correlated. So, the data used to create the clusters of codes is the correlation matrix between codes (all the possible pairs of codes' correlations.)
The algorithm used to assign a code to a cluster is very simple:
Take n codes that are highly uncorrelated at random to create n initial clusters. (You select the number of codes and number of clusters in the Options pane on the right side of the screen.)
Parse all the other codes and assign them to the cluster to which their average correlation is the highest with all the members of that cluster.
Here is an example of a cluster chart:
236
Ascribe Presentations™
In the example, the Cluster 1 has 2 codes (n=2), and an average correlation of 0.58 (r=0.58). It means that the average correlation between each pair of codes within that cluster is 0.58.
In Cluster 2, the average correlation between each pair of codes is 0.56. The codes within this cluster are slightly less correlated than the codes in Cluster 1.
The Correlation Across Clusters indicates the average correlation between each code ACROSS clusters.
Because clustering is exploratory data analysis, you may need to run the cluster report more than once to get the most useful results. For example, if you create three clusters, and the average correlations are close to zero, you might run the report again with only two clusters. You may find it useful to create a correlation matrix for your data first to see if there are strong correlations. A cluster chart may not be helpful for all data if there are not strong correlations.
When you create a cluster report, use either codes or nets. If you only use nets, make sure that the nets are at the same level. For example, compare nets to nets, sub-nets to sub-nets, etc.
To create a cluster report, first select a question from the drop-down box at the top. You can either use the check boxes to the left of each code and net or you can select all the codes or all the nets from the two check boxes located above the codebook:
If you want to select just the codes of a certain net, uncheck All Codes and All Nets and click the check box for Select Siblings. Then, click the check box next to a code you wish to display. All siblings of that code will be selected automatically. You can only select one set of siblings at a time.
The Sort Codes by Frequency option lets you display the list of codes in order from most used to least used.
The last step is to set the options on right side of the screen.
Multiple Charts
237
PrintDoc01 020813
Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Multiple ChartsClient/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Multiple Charts
You can create one graph for several questions at one time through the Multiple Charts option. The Multiple Charts window is similar to the other chart screens, but has some different options.
In the drop-down box, select the chart type. Then, click the box next to the questions you want to chart. (Closed-ended questions are displayed between square brackets.)
In the Options pane on the right side, select options for the chart. Most options are the same as those found on the other chart screens, but there are some differences. (See Create a Bar, Line, or Pie Chart, Co-Occurrence Maps, Correlation Matrices, Proportional Code Font Views, and Multidimensional Scalings for more information about the options.)
For multiple charts, you do not have access to the list of codes for each question. Therefore, in the Options pane, you need to select whether you want to chart codes and nets, codes only or nets only. Also, you have the option to generate 1 chart per net.
The Filters option provides a way to create multiple charts with the Loop Filters option. Click the Filters check box, and another section displays with filtering options. Select one or more filtering questions and the desired codes and select Loop Filters. One chart will be generated for each code.
See Save and Export Charts for export options and Drill Down Tools for drill down options.
Word CloudsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Word Clouds
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Word CloudsThe Word Clouds feature generates tables of words arranged in a special way so that words with the largest frequencies appear in larger font.
The Settings page has a toolbar with these fields:
Field DescriptionRun This option creates the word cloud and navigates to the
Results page. Click this button after you have selected the questions and various options.
Settings This option navigates from the Results page to the Settings page. (It is grayed out on the Settings page.)
Study ID: Study Name
This field has a drop-down box with study information.
Ascribe Presentations
This button navigates to the Ascribe Presentations main page. The right-click menu also provides navigation to the Ascribe Presentations main page or other areas of Ascribe™.
238
Ascribe Presentations™
Questions TabThe Questions Tab contains a list of study questions. You must select at least one question in order to generate a word cloud. The Word Cloud module will generate one word cloud for each question checked here.
Choose from these options:
Option DescriptionQuestions Select as many questions as you would like. If you want to select
or unselect all side questions, click the check box next to the Questions heading. Options:
- Use the Up and Down buttons to move a selected question higher or lower in the list.
Word Clouds By This drop-down box displays all the closed-ended questions of the current study. By selecting a question there, you are asking to generate one word cloud filtered by each of the codes of the selected closed-end.
Each question has this format:
Field DescriptionWhen you click this symbol, a drop-down dialog displays codebook information and the list of codes. Use the double arrow button ( or ) to collapse the upper or lower panes of the dialog.Click the check box to select or unselect a question.
Question ID.Question Label
The question ID displays, followed by the question label (if the label is present.) Closed-ended questions have brackets around these fields.
(Number) The number of items in a codebook.(Percentage) The percentage of responses that have been coded in the
question.
Words TabYou can select word-related options on this tab.
239
PrintDoc01 020813
Here are the options:
Option DescriptionResponse Source
Select to display:VerbatimTranslationTranscriptionUse Verbatim if no Translation/Transcription
Words To Link You can link two or more words that are found next to each other in the data. Separate the set of linked words with a semicolon. For example: new york; fort worth; long beach When you link words, the individual words may display when they are used in a different context. For example, if you link new york, any other instances of the word new not used next to the word york will display separately.
Words To Combine
You can combine instances of similar words into the count of one word. All words will be represented by the first word in the set. Separate the set of combined words with a semicolon. For example: frizz frizzy frizziness; great wonderful The drill down in the word cloud will replace the combined words with the first word in the set.
Min Word Length
Words that are equal to or less than the number entered here will be ignored.
Words To Ignore A default list of words appears in the text box. The list is optional; you can unselect it with the check box. Also, you can change the list to whatever you want (be sure to use semicolons to separate the words.) To restore the default ignore list, click the Default button at the bottom of the Options Tab.
Options TabThis tab contains a variety of options for creating word clouds.
The options are:
Option DescriptionGeneral Options
HTML View You have the choice to generate an HTML view or a JPEG view or both. The words can be sorted alphabetically or by frequency or you can choose no sorting (randomly.)
JPEG View For the JPEG view, there are options to sort the words by frequency or to just have them in a cluster. The words can display with no shape, in a rectangle, or in a capsule. You can change the graph width if you wish. Also, you can change the graph's background color, the items' background color, and the items' color.
240
Ascribe Presentations™
Allow Drilldown
Allows you to click word and look at all the responses with that word. A separate dialog opens with the responses and allows export to HTML or Excel®. Also, you can export all data for these respondents (all of their verbatim in the study) to a text file. If you click the "Set as Filter" button, it will set the current respondents as a filter for all your tables. Remember to refresh your tables by clicking "Tables" button after the drill down window has closed.
Enable Export To Word
Allows export to Word. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Enable Export To PowerPoint
Allows export to PowerPoint. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Display First N Words This field allows you to display the top N words in terms of frequency.
A zero in this field means this option is not used.Minimum Frequency
This field allows you to display only words that are above a certain value.
Use To Scale Items
Use the Minimum Frequency field to display the words in a more proportional way.
Show Date If checked, the current date will display at the top of each word cloud.
Show Logo If checked and a logo has been provided, the account's logo displays on the chart. (Email [email protected] if you would like to provide a logo for your account.)If checked and a logo has not been provided, the Ascribe™ logo displays on the chart.If the field is not checked, no logo displays on the chart.
Title Specifies the title that will appear in blue and bold at the top of the Results page. By default, it contains the study ID and study name.
Frequencies If checked, the number of times a word occurs in the data will display next to the word.
Percentages If checked, the percentage of times a word occurs in the data will display next to the word.
Percentage Decimals
The accepted values are 0, 1, or 2. If you enter any other number, the field will default to 1.
Allow Find & Replace
If checked, the Find and Replace option displays on the Results Page. It is allowed for HTML views only.
Default Resets all options to their default values.Save Saves all options.
Filters Tab
241
PrintDoc01 020813
Use the Filters Tab to filter the word clouds. Click the Get Filters button to display a list of questions.
To select a filter, click the check box next to a question, and then click a code that will act as the filter. Note that there are two other ways to filter your set of tables:
By double clicking any word in the word cloud By clicking the "Set As Filter" button in the drill down table window.
The filter titles will appear on top of each word cloud underneath the title. If you use multiple filters, "And" will be displayed as + and "Or" as |.
You can remove the filters by clicking the Remove Filter button ( ) on the Results page. This button only displays when a filter is set.
Results PageClick the Run button to generate the word clouds you have requested. The Results page displays the word clouds you created. You have several options for exporting them. Whatever export you use, you will be prompted with a dialog box that asks if you want to open or save the file. Here are some features of word clouds:
If the Allow Drilldown box is selected on the Options tab, the actual responses are available when you click a word in the cloud.
If you want to use a word as a filter, simply double click it. You can ignore a word in the cloud if you ctrl-click it. The cloud will be rebuilt without
that word. This feature can be useful if there are extraneous words like "nothing" in the word cloud.
Here are the options on the Results page:
Option Description
242
Ascribe Presentations™
Exports tables to an HTML file.
Exports tables and charts to Word (only available if Enable Export to Word is selected on the Options Tab.)Exports tables and charts to PowerPoint (only available if Enable Export to PowerPoint is selected on the Options Tab.)
Append Appends the current results to the previously saved files.Creates a form so that you can email the results. Fill in the form, select the type of attachments you want to send, and click the Send button. A message displays when the email has been sent. Click Cancel to return to the Results page or Settings to return to the Settings page.Copies a word cloud to the clipboard so you can copy it to another application.
Find & Replace
If selected on the Options tab, the Find and Replace text boxes are available for HTML views. If you enter a search string in the Find box and no search string in the Replace box, all occurrences of the search string in the cloud will be highlighted. If you enter a search string in the Find box and a replacement string in the Replace box, the find string will be replaced. To remove the highlight from the word cloud, clear the Find box and click the Find button.
Color-Coded WordsThe colors in the word cloud indicate its frequency. You can also hover over a word to see its frequency. Here is a guide to the colors:
Color DescriptionRed The frequency of the word is in the top 80%. Blue The frequency of the word is in the 60-80% range.Green
The frequency of the word is in the 40-60% range.
Black The frequency of the word is in the 20-40% range.Gray The frequency of the word is below 20%.
Here is an example of a word cloud:
243
PrintDoc01 020813
Drill Down OptionsThe Allow Drilldown box must be selected on the Options Tab in order to see more information. The drill down option for word clouds has the same features as the drill down option for cross-tabs with words. Just click a word in the cloud to see all of the responses that contain that word. For more information, see Drill Down with Words.
Concept CloudsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Concept Clouds
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Concept CloudsThe Concept Clouds takes a codebook and displays it in a word cloud based on the frequency of each code. Any codebook can be used, including concept questions generated with Ascribe Inspector.
The Settings page has a toolbar with these fields:
Field DescriptionRun This option creates the concept cloud and navigates to the
Results page. Click this button after you have selected the questions and various options.
Settings This option navigates from the Results page to the Settings page. (It is grayed out on the Settings page.)
Study ID: Study Name
This field has a drop-down box with study information.
Ascribe Presentations
This button navigates to the Ascribe Presentations main page. The right-click menu also provides navigation to the Ascribe Presentations main page or other areas of Ascribe™.
Questions Tab
244
Ascribe Presentations™
The Questions Tab contains a list of study questions. You must select at least one question in order to generate a concept cloud. The Concept Cloud module will generate one concept cloud for each question checked here.
Choose from these options:
Option DescriptionQuestions Select as many questions as you would like. If you want to select
or unselect all side questions, click the check box next to the Questions heading. Options:
- Use the Up and Down buttons to move a selected question higher or lower in the list.
Concept Clouds By
This drop-down box displays all the closed-ended questions of the current study. By selecting a question there, you are asking to generate one concept cloud filtered by each of the codes of the selected closed-end.
Each question has this format:
Field DescriptionWhen you click this symbol, a drop-down dialog displays codebook information and the list of codes. Use the double arrow button ( or ) to collapse the upper or lower panes of the dialog.Click the check box to select or unselect a question.
Question ID.Question Label
The question ID displays, followed by the question label (if the label is present.) Closed-ended questions have brackets around these fields.
(Number) The number of items in a codebook.(Percentage) The percentage of responses that have been coded in the
question.
Options TabThis tab contains a variety of options for creating concept clouds.
The options are:
Option DescriptionGeneral Options Allow Drilldown Allows you to click a code and look at all the responses that
received the code. A separate dialog opens with the responses and allows export to HTML or Excel®.
HTML View You have the choice to generate an HTML view or a JPEG view or both.
JPEG View For the JPEG view, there are options to sort the words by frequency or to just have them in a cluster. The words can display
245
PrintDoc01 020813
with no shape, in a rectangle, or in a capsule. You can change the graph width if you wish. Also, you can change the graph's background color, the items' background color, and the items' color.
Enable Export To Word
Allows export to Word. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Enable Export To PowerPoint
Allows export to PowerPoint. If enabled, this icon displays at the top of the Results page:
Codes/Concepts To Ignore
You have the option to enter codes to ignore in the concept cloud. Click the check box and enter the code description of any codes you wish to ignore. Be sure to use semicolons to separate the codes.
Display First N Concepts This field allows you to display the top N concepts in terms of
frequency. A zero in this field means this option is not used.Minimum Frequency
This field allows you to display only codes that occur above a certain value.
Use To Scale Items
Use the Minimum Frequency field to display the codes in a more proportional way.
Max Characters Per Concept
A concept or code description may display up to 50 characters. You can select any number up to 50.
Show Date If checked, the current date will display at the top of each concept cloud.
Show Logo If checked and a logo has been provided, the account's logo displays on the chart. (Email [email protected] if you would like to provide a logo for your account.)If checked and a logo has not been provided, the Ascribe™ logo displays on the chart.If the field is not checked, no logo displays on the chart.
Title Specifies the title that will appear in blue and bold at the top of the Results page. By default, it contains the study ID and study name.
Frequencies If checked, the number of times a code occurs in the data will display next to the code.
Percentages If checked, the percentage of times a code occurs in the data will display next to the code.
Percentage Decimals
The accepted values are 0, 1, or 2. If you enter any other number, the field will default to 1.
Default Resets all options to their default values.Save Saves all options.
Filters Tab
246
Ascribe Presentations™
Use the Filters Tab to filter the concept clouds. Click the Get Filters button to display a list of questions.
The filter titles will appear on top of each concept cloud underneath the title. If you use multiple filters, "And" will be displayed as + and "Or" as |.
You can remove the filters by clicking the Remove Filter button ( ) on the Results page. This button only displays when a filter is set.
Results PageClick the Run button to generate the concept clouds you have requested. The Results page displays the concept clouds you created. You have several options for exporting them. Whatever export you use, you will be prompted with a dialog box that asks if you want to open or save the file. If the Allow Drilldown box is selected on the Options tab, the actual responses are available when you click a code in the cloud.
Here are the options on the Results page:
Option Description
Exports tables to an HTML file.
Exports tables and charts to Word (only available if Enable Export to Word is selected on the Options Tab.)Exports tables and charts to PowerPoint (only available if Enable Export to PowerPoint is selected on the Options Tab.)
Append
Appends the current results to the previously saved files.
Creates a form so that you can email the results. Fill in the form, select the type of attachments you want to send, and click the Send button. A message displays when the email has been sent. Click Cancel to return to the Results page or Settings to return to the Settings page.
Color-Coded WordsThe colors in the word cloud indicate its frequency. You can also hover over a word to see its frequency. Here is a guide to the colors:
Color DescriptionRed The frequency of the word is in the top 80%. Blue The frequency of the word is in the 60-80% range.Green
The frequency of the word is in the 40-60% range.
Black The frequency of the word is in the 20-40% range.Gray The frequency of the word is below 20%.
Drill Down Options
247
PrintDoc01 020813
The Allow Drilldown box must be selected on the Options Tab in order to see more information. Click a code in the cloud to see all of the responses that received that code. In that table of responses, click the Code Applied field to see all of a respondent's answers in the study.
Cross-Tab (Legacy)Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Cross-tab (legacy)
Client/Studies/Right-click a study/Select Ascribe Presentations/Select Cross-tab (legacy)Ascribe™ provides an easy-to-use cross-tabulated report for simple analysis of the study results. The report is primarily intended for account executives and clients, but is also useful for the tabulation person.
The Cross-Tab Report creates cross-tabs from the collected data. You may cross-tab closed against closed, open against open, and any combination of the two.
NoteThis is a generalized cross-tab, and you may cross-tab any question by any other question.The resulting cross-tab has some special characteristics:
Drill Down. You may click any cell and see all of the underlying data, both open and close ended, that make up that cell. You may sort the display by any of the columns, and you may export the data to Excel™ if you click the Excel™ icon.
Filtering. Click any row, column, cell or any combination of rows, columns and cells, and you will define the respondents for your next cross-tab. As an example, let’s say you want to run a report for just those respondents who are "Top Two Box." Just highlight the Definitely Would, and Probably Would Buy columns, press the filter button and then run your next cross-tab. It is like a cross-tab within a cross-tab.
Convert to Excel™. Click the Excel™ icon to copy your cross-tab to Excel™.To create the report, click the question menu. The first question you choose will be in the row, the next question will be in the column. All subsequent questions will form additional dimensions in the rows.
248
Ascribe Presentations™
Select Cross-Tab QuestionsTo start your analysis, select a question from the drop-down list. Questions are listed by the Question ID and Question label and also display the question type and the count of coded responses.
A question will appear in the list if it satisfies both these requirements:
The Cross-tab check box is set in the Tasks Tab of the question At least one response to the question is coded.
The question you select will appear in a table with two columns. The codes are listed in the first column, and the second is reserved for the counts.
You can select additional questions as well. After the first question, additional questions are listed in columns. Questions with large codebooks are not good candidates for display in the columns. These take a long time to display.
Tip:You should normally select the question with the largest codebook first. It takes longer to display codebooks in columns than in rows.
Fill the Cross-Tab Table with DataOnce you have displayed one or more questions, you can fill the table with data by clicking the Fill button. The format of the data depends on your selection in the second drop-down list. The default is Count.
Format DescriptionCount Displays the count of responses with codes applied that match
the row and column headers.
249
PrintDoc01 020813
For nets, the counts are unduplicated totals of all child codes. This means that if a given response had more than one sub-code applied, it will appear only once in the net total (not once for each code applied). This means that the net counts can be less than the total of the counts for the sub-codes.The count at the upper left corner of the table is the table total. This is the unduplicated number of responses, which is the number of unique respondents to the selected questions.
Percent of Table Total This is the Count value divided by the table total, displayed as a percentage and rounded down.
Percent of Column Total This is the Count value divided by the column total, displayed as a percentage and rounded down. The column total is the count of unique respondents for the code or net in the column header. This will always total 100% across the column headers.
Percent of Row Total This is the Count value divided by the row total, displayed as a percentage and rounded down. The row total is the count of unique respondents for the code or net in the row header. This will always total 100% across the row headers.
Count and Percent of Table Total
Displays both the Count value and the Percent of table total in each cell.
Count and Percent of Column Total
Displays both the Count value and the Percent of column total in each cell.
Count and Percent of Row Total
Displays both the Count value and the Percent of row total in each cell.
Expand and Collapse RowsYou can show or hide rows in the table by clicking the + and - icons next to each row. Collapsed rows are also hidden when you print the page. If you export to Excel™, all rows are exported regardless of whether they are hidden.
Drill Down to View ResponsesTo view the responses for a cell, click on the text in the cell. You must click on the text, not on the blank part of the cell. The drill down view shows you the responses for the selected cell, and the codes applied. All questions in the study are displayed in the drill down view.
If a cell contains more than about 1,000 responses, the drill down view may not show all responses.
The drill down view appears in a popup window. At the top of the window are selection boxes for what to display in the window.
Filter the Cross-Tab ViewYou can filter the view by selecting codes or cells in the table.
To filter by a code, click the text of the code. This selects the entire row or column for the filter.
To filter by a cell, click in the cell anywhere outside of the text displayed. This selects only the cell.
250
Ascribe Presentations™
You can select as many rows, columns, and cells as you like for your filter. Note that the description at the top of the table changes to describe the filter. Selections in a single filter are OR'ed together.
To apply the filter, click the Filter button. The table disappears, but the filter description remains. Now construct another cross-tab. When you fill this cross-tab, it will contain only those responses that meet the filter condition.
You can filter repeatedly. Each filter is added to any previous filters. Successive filters are AND'ed together.
Note that if you select both a net and a sub-code of the net as a filter, only the net filter applies.
Save and Export ChartsWhen you generate a chart, the chart displays on a new page. Use the buttons below the chart title to copy, save, and export the chart.
Buttons DescriptionSettings Button Use this button to return to the previous page (the settings page.) Do
not use the back button on the browser.
Copy to Clipboard
Use this button to copy the chart to the clipboard. You can save the file or open it with your default picture file viewer when you click the
button. This action opens a file download dialog. To paste bar charts, line charts, or pie charts from the clipboard to Word, first open a Word document and then click the Copy to Clipboard button. In Word, you must select Paste Special rather than Paste. After you select Paste Special, select Device Independent Bitmap from the popup menu that appears, and then click OK. The chart will be copied to Word from the clipboard.
251
PrintDoc01 020813
Copy to Word or PowerPoint
Use this button to add the chart to Word or PowerPoint. (This button directly copies the chart to Word or Powerpoint, without using the clipboard.)
When you click the button, a progress circle ( ) displays for a few seconds, and then the Word and PowerPoint icons are enabled. If you click either one, a dialog box displays, and you can save or view the file in the appropriate format. Here is an example of the file in PowerPoint:
Note:
If you go back to settings, generate another chart, and click the button again, the newly generated chart will be APPENDED to the existing Word and PowerPoint documents. If you want to create a new Word document or PowerPoint presentation, click the button. Make sure you save the files first.
When you use the batch charts option, you generate multiple graphs. You can export all of the graphs or select individual ones with the clipboard button and check box. Each individual chart has a clipboard button and check box, like this:
Drill Down Tools
252
Ascribe Presentations™
Ascribe Presentations display summary information about codes and nets. You can see detailed information about the codes with the drill down tools. The drill down tools are available for each type of chart.
After you generate a chart, hover above a bar, a pie slice, a line, or a circle or number in a co-occurrence chart. A tool tip displays, and the cursor changes to a pointer or hand like this:
Click the left mouse button to display the drill down window and show the details of all the responses and respondents coded in the current area.
Here is an example of the drill down window:
Underneath the Drill Down Results title, the code text displays in blue and the frequency in red.
When you click a number on a co-occurrence line, the drill down results screen displays two codes applied columns. Here is an example:
253
PrintDoc01 020813
254
Ascribe Inspector™Ascribe Inspector™ allows for automatic exploration of unstructured data for sentiment analysis and concept identification. Here are some highlights:
Use coded or uncoded data Generate sentiment analysis with drill-down capabilities Search data for words or phrases Identify concepts, people, and products Create a codebooks and apply codes Generate charts through Inspector or Ascribe Presentations Use Review Responses to further explore data.
How to use Inspector1. Have inspector privilege .2. Understand inspection ownership .3. Create an inspection for a study question or create an inspection from scratch.4. Add variables for filtering if necessary. 5. Load data to an inspection as necessary .6. Use the Inspection page to run analysis and see results.
Inspector PrivilegeNavigate: Administrator/Associates/Right-click associate/Select Edit
In order to use Inspector, your account must have an Inspector license. Please contact [email protected] if you have questions about the license. Next, the associate must have inspector privilege. An administrator of the account can assign inspector privilege by going to the Associates page. Right-click the associate, and select Edit. A dialog opens, and the administrator can select the inspector privilege.
If an associate only has inspector privilege and no other privilege, the associate will have limited access to Ascribe. The associate will have access to the General menu options, Inspector, Ascribe Presentations, Accelerator (if licensed), and Illustrator (if licensed.)
Inspection OwnershipSome rules about inspection ownership:
An inspection has an owner, which defaults to the user who created the inspection. A user with administrator privilege can change the owner of an inspection to any user
who has inspector privilege. An inspection can be deleted, opened, or modified only by the owner. Only the owner can create an illustration from an inspection. When viewing the Inspections page, users see only those inspections that they own.
Administrators can see all inspections in the list.Inspector/Inspections PageThe Inspector/Inspections page lists all inspections owned by you. (If you have administrator privilege, all inspections on the account display.)
255
Inspections Page LayoutThe Inspections page has these columns:
Column DescriptionCreated The date the inspection was created.Inspection ID Unique identifier for the inspection.Description Optional information about the inspection.
Owner This column only displays if you have administrator privilege. It lists the owner of the inspection.
Study SourceIf an inspection was created from a study question, the study name and question are listed. If the inspection was created from scratch, the word None displays.
Comments The number of comments/responses in the inspection.
You can filter the list of inspections by using the filter text box in the gray bar at the top of the page. Enter a character string in the box and press Enter to only display inspection IDs that begin with those characters. Enter an * before the characters to display inspection IDs that contain those characters.
To remove the filter, delete the characters and press Enter.
Inspections Page Right-Click MenuThe Inspections page has a number of options for working with inspections. Right-click an inspection to see these options:
Option DescriptionOpen Opens to the inspection's General Information page.New Inspection Creates an inspection from scratch.
Properties Opens the inspection's property dialog where changes can be made.
Delete Deletes the inspection.Variables Opens the inspection's Variables page.Ascribe Presentations
Navigates to Ascribe Presentations, where you can create data visualizations of the inspection.
Load Data Opens the Load Data dialog where you can start the loading process.
Scripted Output
Navigates to the Scripted Output page where you can create reports about the inspection. (Must have supervisor privilege.)
Illustrator Navigates to Ascribe Illustrator, which is another data visualization tool. You must have an Illustrator license and
256
Data Management
privilege to use the product.
Choose ColumnsOpens a dialog where you can choose what columns to display. Note that the Owner column only displays if you have administrator privilege.
Create an Inspection from a Study QuestionNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions
Note that you must have supervisor privilege to create an inspection from a study question. If you only have inspector privilege, see Create an Inspection from Scratch.
To create an inspection from a study question, navigate to the Questions page. Right-click the question and select Inspector/Add New Inspection. The following dialog displays:
Here are the fields:
Field DescriptionID Required, unique identifier for the inspection.
Description Optional information about the inspection or question used to create the inspection.
OwnerThe field defaults to the user ID who is creating the inspection. Administrators can change the owner through the drop-down list. If the user is not an administrator, the field is grayed out, and the owner cannot be changed.
Filters You can copy coded closed-ended or other specify questions to the inspection to be used for filtering. Click a question and then click the forward arrow button to move the question to the Selection Questions section. You can select multiple questions by using Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift
257
PrintDoc01 020813
and then click the forward arrow button. NOTE: If you want to use any questions for filtering, you must include them when creating the inspection. There is no way to copy them to the inspection later; you would have to re-create the inspection.
Selected Questions
These questions are copied to the inspection and can be used for filtering the inspection results. If you wish to remove a questions, click the question and then click the back arrow button.
OK Click OK to create the inspection.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the Questions page without creating the inspection.
After you create an inspection, the dialog closes, and the Questions page displays. To view the inspection that you created, right-click the question again and select Inspector/View. This action navigates to the Inspections page.
When you create an inspection from a question, you are creating a new data set which is independent of the question. When you work with the inspection, you are not changing the data in the original question.
You may make any number of inspections from the same question.
Create an Inspection from ScratchNavigate: Inspector/Inspections
To add an inspection from scratch, navigate to Inspector. The Inspections page displays. Right-click anywhere on the page and select Add new inspection. After you enter the information in the Inspection Creation dialog, the next step is to load data to the inspection.
The Inspection Creation dialog displays with these fields:
Field DescriptionID Required, unique identifier for the inspection.
Data Variable ID
The Data Variable ID is for the main set of comments or data that you want to load and analyze. The default ID is Comments. Leave the default if your data has no question ID or column label. If you have a dataset which has a question ID or column label, change the Data Variable ID to that ID. For example, if you are loading data with the question ID of Q10_01, change the Data Variable ID to Q10_01. If you have filter data to load, add those IDs on the Variables page.
258
Data Management
Description Optional information about the inspection.OK Click OK to create the inspection.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the Inspections page without creating the inspection.
Load Data to an InspectionNavigate: Inspector/Inspections
Data can be loaded from standard Ascribe load file types (such as Excel) as well as from single-column text files and two-column tab delimited files. A single-column file would contain only the comments to be analyzed. A two-column file would contain the respondent IDs in the first column and the comments in the second column.
If you are loading data which has filter variables/questions, add the IDs of the filter variables on the Variables page for the inspection.
To load data, right-click the inspection and select Load Data. The Load Data dialog opens with these fields:
Field DescriptionEnter The Name Of The Data File
Use the Browse button to find the file on your computer.
OKClick OK to start the load process. A message will indicate the job has been submitted. If you want to see the progress of the job, navigate to the Jobs page (after you close the dialog, right-click and select General/Jobs.)
Close Close the dialog after you submit the file to be loaded.After you load data with filter variables/questions, return to the Variables page to label the data in the variable.
Inspection PageNavigate: Inspector/Inspections/Right-click inspection/Select Open
The Inspection page has this layout:
Inspection: Inspection ID
Menu Toolbar
Results Area
259
PrintDoc01 020813
The house icon ( ) navigates to the Ascribe home page. After the icon is the inspection ID. Below is the toolbar, and the options will vary according to which menu item has been selected.
The Inspection page opens with the General Information page displayed. You can navigate to other areas through the menu on the left. The menu has these options:
Option DescriptionInspections Navigate to the Inspector/Inspections page.
Ascribe Illustrator
Navigates to Ascribe Illustrator, which is a data visualization tool. You must have an Illustrator license and privilege to use the product.
Help Opens the help information for this page.
General Information
The General Information section acts an overview of what has been done with the inspection. You can see how many comments were loaded and when and what analysis has been done on the inspection.
Search Look for certain words, exact phrases, and words near each other. You can also create a codebook from search results and apply codes to search results.
Curate Edit the data.
Sentiment Ratings
Sentiment analysis evaluates the emotion associated with the responses or comments. The Ratings option analyzes the data for sentiment on a five-point scale. For each rating, you can view the sentiment extracts (words that contain sentiment) and the full comments as well as a pie chart of the results. You can save the results as a separate question, with the comments coded according to the sentiment rating.
Sentiment Topics
View the topics (the ideas in the comments) which are described by the sentiment extracts. You can view the average rating for each topic, the comments associated with the topics, and a "heat map" of the topics. You can save the results as a separate question, with the comments coded by topic.
Concepts Analyze the data for concepts or ideas without exploring sentiment.
Entities Analyze the data for names of people, products, and organizations.
Accelerator Create an accelerator or automated coding model from an inspection and use it to code new data.
Set Filters Allows you to view sentiment results and concepts through
260
Data Management
variable filters.
General Information SectionThe General Information section provides an overview of what has been done with the inspection. You can see how many comments are in the inspection, what kind of analysis has been performed and when, and what kind of jobs have been run against the inspection. You can also reset the text analysis processors from this screen.
The General Information section has this layout:
Field DescriptionInspection Information
Comment Context Inspection description.Comments Loaded Number of comments in the inspection.Load History
Load Date Date that comments were loaded.Comments Added Number of comments loaded (by date).Processing Status
Processor List of text analytic processors for sentiment, concepts, and entities.
Comments
Number of comments analyzed by the processor. If you add or remove comments, the number in this column displays as red to indicate some change has been made after analysis.
Last Processed Date that the comments were analyzed.
Status
After you submit comments to be analyzed, you can check the status of the job from the area. You can use the refresh icon to update the status. The status indicates if analysis was successful, failed, or is still running.
Process On Load Allows for automatic analysis of comments after they are loaded to the inspection.
Reset Inspectors To Defaults Button Resets all processors and removes any analysis results.
Inspection Job Status
Job TypeIndicates what type of jobs have been run for the inspection, like scripted output or data loads to the inspection.
Date Indicates when the job was run.
261
PrintDoc01 020813
File InfoIndicates TA Support when a text analysis job was run or the name of the data file when a data load was processed.
StatusIndicates whether a job was successful, failed, or is still running. You can use the refresh icon to update the status.
Reset ProcessorsThere are multiple ways to reset processors for inspections. The General Information page provides two ways. The third way is to change the type of processor used in sentiment or concept analysis.
To reset an individual processor on the General Information page, right-click the processor and select Reset Inspector processing. A dialog opens with these options:
Option DescriptionReset Processing Results
Choose this option if you just want to re-analyze the current comments.
Reset Processing Results And Responses
Choose this option if you have made changes to the current comments and want to re-analyze the comments. For example, if you used the curate option after you analyzed the data, you may want to re-analyze the data to pick up those changes.
To reset all of the processors, use the Reset Inspectors to Defaults button, found at the bottom of the Processing Status section of the screen. All processors will be reset.
262
Data Management
SearchThe Search text box offers flexibility in finding words or phrases in the comments. You can enter search criteria in the text box or in the Advanced Search Options dialog. Either enter Here are the options for the Search text box:
Option Description
Search CriteriaUse the Search text box to look for certain words, exact phrases, and words near each other. You can also apply codes to the search results using Code this search.
Recent Searches
The Recent Searches option displays the search criteria you entered in the text box in case you want to use them again. The list is cleared when you leave Text Analytics.
Advanced Search Options
The Advanced Search Options dialog allows you to enter search criteria without entering Boolean or other operators.
Search Options
The Search Options dialog has options to change the highlight color in the search results, and options for using the NEAR operator.
Code This Search
On first use, this option copies all of the responses to a new question/variable. You can view the new variable on the Variables page. The variable ID will be TextSearch. With every use, it creates a code for the search criteria and applies that code to the appropriate responses.
Prior Coded Searches
This option displays the search pattern and code description used to code search results.
Search CriteriaThere are a variety of ways to find words or phrases in the comments. Below are some suggestions:
Option Description
Find One WordEnter the word, and press Enter or the arrow ( ). Comments that contain the word will display, and the word will be highlighted in the results.
Find An Exact Phrase
Enter the phrase with double quotes (") surrounding the beginning and ending words, and press Enter or the arrow ( ). Comments that contain that phrase will display, and the phrase will be highlighted in the results.
For example, you could enter "good service" in the text box to display comments that contain that phrase.
If you enter multiple words without using the quotes, the search will look for either word and not as an exact phrase. (It's as though you entered OR between the words. See
263
PrintDoc01 020813
Find Multiple Words for more information.)
Find Multiple Words With Boolean Operators
To find more than one word, use Boolean operators such as AND and OR. The AND and OR must be in all capital letters. After you enter the criteria in the text box, press Enter or the arrow ( ).
For example, if you enter server AND service in the text box, the search results display responses that have both words.
If you enter server OR service, the search results display responses that contain either word.
If you enter multiple words without using a Boolean operator or quotes, the search assumes that it is an OR search. For example, if you enter good service server, the search will look for good OR service OR server.
You can enter various combinations with the Boolean operators. For example, if you enter "good service" OR server, the search will display responses that have either the phrase good service or the word server.
You can also search for multiple phrases. For example, you can enter "good service" AND "good server".
Find Multiple Terms Using Parentheses
You can use parentheses to group terms for a search. For example, if you enter (soft OR gentle) AND strong, the search will find responses with either the words soft OR gentle and the word strong.
You can also use phrases with parentheses. For example, ("gentle to nose" or "gentle on nose") AND thick.
Advanced Search OptionsThe Advanced Search Options dialog allows you to enter search criteria without entering Boolean or other operators. The text box will display the search criteria with the operators automatically inserted between the words. You can use the Advanced Search Options dialog to change your search criteria, or you can manually change/edit the criteria in the text box.
Here are the options:
Option Description
Any Of These Words
When you enter words in this field, the search automatically inserts the Boolean operator OR. You can enter a series of words with just a space between them. The text box will display the search criteria with the OR inserted between the words, and the search results will display responses with any of the words.
264
Data Management
Each Of These Words
When you enter words in this field, the search automatically inserts the Boolean operator AND. You can enter a series of words with just a space between them, and the search results will display responses that contain all of the words.
This Exact Phrase
When you enter a phrase in this field, the search automatically inserts the double quotes around the phrase. (Do not add the double quotes yourself as this will lead to incorrect results.) The search results will display responses that contain the phrase.
The Word [ ] Within [ ] Words Of [ ]
This option finds words that are within a certain range of each other. The search automatically inserts double quotes around the words and adds a tilde (~) and the range number after the words.For example, if you entered chocolate within 3 words of flavors, the text box would display "chocolate flavors"~3. The results would display responses such as these: The flavors are not only chocolate, but taste good.The chocolate and coffee combo flavors.Probably the chocolate flavors.Notice that the entered order of the words is not respected unless you have Keep Order for NEAR Search selected in the Search Options dialog. If you have the Keep Order option selected, then this comment would not be found since flavors came before chocolate in the response: The flavors are not only chocolate, but taste good.
Search OptionsThe Search Options dialog has options to change the highlight color in the search results, and options for using the NEAR operator. Here are the options:
Option Description
Highlight Color Click this box to change the color of the search results highlighting.
'NEAR' Search To use the NEAR operator, enter the search criteria in the
265
PrintDoc01 020813
Options text box like this: word NEAR wordFor example, chocolate NEAR flavor
NEAR Distance
The distance field defines the maximum number of words that can separate two search words. For example, if you enter rich NEAR smooth and the distance field is 5, then only responses with 5 or less words separating rich and smooth will display.
Keep Order For 'NEAR' Search
If this box is checked, then the entered order of the search words will be respected. For example, if you enter chocolate NEAR flavor and have this box checked, only responses where the word chocolate comes before flavor will display; keep in mind that the distance field determines how many words can separate chocolate and flavor. If this box is not checked, then the order of the words does not matter. Also, this field affects the search type "The word [ ] within [ ] words of [ ]" found on the Advanced Search Options page. If the Keep Order box is checked, the order of the words is respected (just like the NEAR search.)
Code This SearchThis option allows you to use the search results to create a codebook and apply a code to search results. You must do a search first in order to use this option.
The first time you select the option, all of the responses in the inspection are copied to a new question/variable. The new variable ID will be TextSearch and can be viewed on the Variables page.
When you select the option, the Code Label dialog displays. Enter the code description in the code label box. The search term is automatically placed in the long help field of the code properties. Here is an example of the Code Label dialog where the search term was the word static, and the code description is Eliminates/controls static:
266
Data Management
Press OK to apply the code to search results.
You can use Review Responses to view or change the coding and the codebook. (Navigate to Review Responses from the TextSearch variable on the Variables page.) Here is what the codebook looks like in Review Responses; you can also see that the code was applied to the responses:
Here is the code properties dialog for the new code:
267
PrintDoc01 020813
You can continue to search and code the responses using the Code this search option. The codes are added to the codebook for the search question/variable. You can keep track of the search terms you've used to create codes with Prior Coded Searches.
Prior Coded SearchesThis option displays the search terms used to code search results. You can check the dialog to see what search terms have been used to code responses. A dialog displays with the following information:
Field Description
Description The term entered in the code label field when the code was created.
Search Pattern The term that was used to get the search results.
Here is an example of the Coded Searches dialog box:
268
Data Management
CurateThe Curate options are used to edit or "clean" the responses. For example, you could remove extraneous characters or misspellings in the responses. You can also delete entire responses or respondents.
When you click Curate, the following screen displays.
The Curate screen has a toolbar with these buttons: Options, Search and Replace, Update All, and Remove. The responses display in the Comments column, and changed responses display in the Edited Comment column. In addition, the screen has a right-click menu.
You can sort the Comments in alphanumeric order by clicking the Comments column heading.
Right-Click MenuIf you right-click the responses in the Comments column or the Edited Value column, the following menu options are available:
269
PrintDoc01 020813
Option DescriptionSelect All Click this option to select all comments.Clear All Click this option to clear all comments.Undo Selected Changes Click this option to clear selected comments.
Submit Selected Changes
Saves the changes to selected responses; the responses are cleared from the Edited Value column, and the updated responses display in the Comments column.
Edit Individual ResponseYou can edit an individual response by double-clicking it in the Comments column and making changes to the response. When you press Enter, the changes display in the Edited Value column. To save the changes, click Update All or right-click the comment and select Submit Selected Changes.
Options for CurateThe curate option allows you to select how many items to display per page or to disable paging. If you use paging while you curate data, save your changes before you move to the next page.
Option DescriptionItems To Display Per Page
Defaults to 1000; however, you can edit this field. Enter 0 if you do not want any paging.
Search and ReplaceThe Search and Replace option allows you to edit the responses. You have the option to find certain text before replacing the verbiage or you can find and replace at the same time. The changed responses display in the Edited Value column.
When you select Search and Replace, the following dialog displays.
270
Data Management
Here are the options:
Option Description
Search Expression:
Enter the text you want to find or use the drop-down list of recently used text. To just find the text in the responses, click OK. To find and replace at the same time, click the Replace With check box and enter replacement text. You can use standard regular expressions in the searches. For example, if you enter the word as, the search results will contain all words with those characters (has, was, taste, etc.) To find only the word as, use the regular expression \bas\b. (Note that standard regular expressions are different than the "regular expressions" used in other places in Ascribe™. You can search for a phrase without enclosing it in quotes. For example, you could enter a phrase like friendly service.
Replace With:
Click the check box to enable the Replace With text box. Enter the replacement text or use the drop-down list of recently used text. To replace text with blanks, click the check box and do not enter anything in Replace With text box.
Look In:You have the option to search either Original List (all of the responses) or Current List (just responses that were last displayed.)
Use PagingIf you using paging, you are only searching/replacing the data on a page. Update the page before you move to the next page. If you do not use paging, all of the data will be searched/replaced.
271
PrintDoc01 020813
Here is an example of the screen after a search and replace action. The Comments column has the original responses with the "search" criteria highlighted. The Edited Value column displays the edited responses with the replacement text highlighted. The edited action is not saved until you click Update All.
Update AllWhen you click Update All, the responses in the Edited Value column are saved. The responses are cleared from the Edited Value column, and the changed responses display in the Comments column. Here's what the screen looks like after the comments have been updated:
You can continue working with this list or use the Search and Replace option to work with all responses.
RemoveThe Remove option allows you to delete a response from this question or to delete a respondent's responses to all questions in the study.
To remove a response, click the response, and it will be highlighted. Click the Remove button. Select the option to remove response only for this question only or delete entire
272
Data Management
respondent. (If you choose to delete the entire respondent, all of the respondent's comments are deleted for all questions in this study.) Click OK.
To remove more than one respondent at a time, you can use the Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift keys to select multiple responses and then click Remove.
Sentiment Ratings The Sentiment option extracts and evaluates the "feeling" associated with the response. The system looks at the entire phrase and tries to find words indicating sentiment. Here are examples of responses with sentiment: "I didn't like the price," "The cost is too high," "The service was wonderful." The system would not find sentiment in a response that only said "price" or "cost" or "service." Only responses with distinct sentiment are included in the analysis results.
The Sentiment option is divided into two areas: Ratings and Topics.
The Ratings page displays the rating scale, the responses, and the counts associated with rating.
If sentiment is found in a response, it is evaluated on a five-point rating scale. The rating scale is: strong positive (+2), positive (+1), neutral (0), negative (-1), and strong negative (-2). Note that a neutral sentiment does not mean the absence of sentiment. A response like "it was okay" is considered to have neutral sentiment.
The toolbar for the Ratings page has the following options:
Option Description
Options
Choose Standard English Sentiment Processor or Modified English Sentiment Processor.The Modified English Sentiment Processor uses the Problems extractor in addition to the Sentiment extractor. The Problems extractor finds responses that have negative connotations such as "moldy" or "dirty"; however, these words may not have been in a phrase with negative sentiment. For example, "I hate the moldy shower" is a response with negative sentiment. "The shower was moldy" does not contain negative sentiment and would not be found by the Standard English Sentiment Processor.The Modified English Sentiment Processor will find more negative ratings than the Standard Processor and may skew your chart view to the negative. Minor problems will be in the negative rating, and major problems will be in the strong negative rating. Changing processors will discard the results - If you change processors after you run an analysis, the results of the first analysis will be lost.
AnalyzeThe first time you select Sentiment for a question, you have to select Analyze to start the extraction and evaluation process.
273
PrintDoc01 020813
List View Displays list of responses and ratings.Chart View Displays a pie chart of the rating information.
Save to Ascribe™
This option creates a variable on the Variables page called Sentiment Rating. It also copies the responses from the inspection and labels the responses by sentiment rating. The labels are strong positive, strong negative, negative, neutral, and positive. Responses without sentiment are not given labels. If a response has more than one sentiment associated with it, the response will receive more than one label. Note that all responses in the data are saved whether they are labeled or not. You are charged transactions for all of the responses, not just the ones that are labeled. An inspection has to be saved in order to be used for scripted outputs, Ascribe Presentations, or Ascribe Illustrator.
When you select Analyze, a dialog box displays with these options:
Option Description
Wait For Completion
If you choose this option, you cannot do any other activities while the analysis is processing. A notice displays when the submitted job starts and completes. The results display when the process is finished. The dialog box also has an option to change the default timeout limit of 3 minutes.
Submit Job And Continue
This option submits the analysis as a background job and allows you to perform other tasks while the job completes. You can view the job on the Jobs page; it is listed a scripted output with the file name of TA Support. You can also view the status on the General Information page.
List View for RatingsThe system examines the responses for sentiment and assigns a rating to it. The List View displays after the analysis is finished and has these columns:
Column Description
Rating The rating scale is strong positive, positive, neutral, negative, and strong negative.
MentionsThe number of responses that were found to have the corresponding sentiment. Click this number to display the comments on the right side of the screen. The sentiment word(s) will be highlighted in the responses.
Extracts The number of sentiment items or extracts found in the
274
Data Management
responses. Sentiment items are words or phrases that indicate mood or feeling. Click this number to see the extracts on the right side of the screen.
In the example below, there are 25 mentions that contain strong positive sentiment items. To see the comments, click the Mentions field. The comments display in dialog, and the sentiment items are highlighted in the comment:
To display the sentiment extracts (words or phrases that contain sentiment), click the Extracts field. In this example, 8 sentiment extracts were found to be strong positive. After clicking the Extracts field, the sentiment extracts display on the right side of the screen.
You can view the comments which contain the sentiment extracts by clicking the Comments field. The comments display in a dialog box, and the extracts are highlighted in the comments. Note that the number of mentions of an extract may be greater than the number of comments because an extract may be mentioned twice in a comment.
275
PrintDoc01 020813
Chart View for RatingsTo see a pie chart based on the Ratings, click Chart View. If you hover over a pie piece, the count and percentage for that sentiment display. Click a piece of the pie to view the sentiment extracts. Click the Comments field to see the responses for that topic. You can sort the Sentiment column by alphanumeric order if you click the column heading. You can sort the Comments column from highest to lowest (and vice versa) if you click that column heading.
Here is an example where the Strong Positive pie piece was clicked, and the Comments field for "great" was clicked to display the responses:
276
Data Management
You can also click one of the sentiment labels at the top of the chart (strong positive, positive, neutral, negative, or strong negative) to see the topics associated with the sentiments. Click the Comments field to see the responses that contain the sentiment item. You can sort the Topic column by alphanumeric order if you click the column heading. You can sort the Comments column from highest to lowest (and vice versa) if you click that column heading.
Here is an example where the Positive sentiment label was clicked, and the Comments field for "price" was clicked:
Sentiment Topics Sentiment analysis has two parts: the sentiment items, which are words that indicate "feeling" or "emotion", and the topics, which are the part of the response that the sentiment
277
PrintDoc01 020813
describes. Generally speaking, the topics are usually (but not always) the nouns associated with the sentiment.
The toolbar for the Topics page has the following options:
Option Description
Options
Choose Standard English Sentiment Processor or Modified English Sentiment Processor.The Modified English Sentiment Processor uses the Problems extractor in addition to the Sentiment extractor. The Problems extractor finds responses that have negative connotations such as "moldy" or "dirty"; however, these words may not have been in a phrase with negative sentiment. For example, "I hate the moldy shower" is a response with negative sentiment. "The shower was moldy" does not contain negative sentiment and would not be found by the Standard English Sentiment Processor.The Modified English Sentiment Processor will find more negative ratings than the Standard Processor and may skew your chart view to the negative. Minor problems will be in the negative rating, and major problems will be in the strong negative rating. Changing processors will discard the results - If you change processors after you run an analysis, the results of the first analysis will be lost.
AnalyzeThe first time you select Sentiment for a question, you have to select Analyze to start the extraction and evaluation process. Note that if you select Analyze for Ratings, you do not have to run it again for Topics.
Group Opens a dialog box and offers options for combining topics.
ExportExports file to Excel (creates an XML file which can be opened in Excel.) This option is grayed out until you save the results to Ascribe™.
List View Displays list of topics and average ratings.
Chart View Displays a "heat map" of the topics; it shows how positive or negative the topics are.
Minimum Mentions
Allows you to change the display according to the number of mentions of a topic. Minimum mentions defaults to 2. The arrows on the box allows you to increase or decrease the number of mentions. This field does not affect grouping; in other words, all extracts are used when creating groups. Note: If you are thinking of saving the inspection to Ascribe, change the minimum mentions to 1 to see
278
Data Management
everything that would be labeled.
Save to Ascribe™
This option creates a variable on the Variables page called Sentiment. It also copies the responses from the inspection and labels the responses by topics. Note that all responses in the data are saved whether they are labeled or not. You are charged transactions for all of the responses, not just the ones that are labeled. An inspection has to be saved in order to be used for scripted outputs, Ascribe Presentations, or Ascribe Illustrator.
When you select Analyze, a dialog box displays with these options:
Option Description
Wait For Completion
If you choose this option, you cannot do any other activities while the analysis is processing. A notice displays when the submitted job starts and completes. The results display when the process is finished. The dialog box also has an option to change the default timeout limit of 3 minutes.
Submit Job And Continue
This option submits the analysis as a background job and allows you to perform other tasks while the job completes. You can view the job on the Jobs page; it is listed a scripted output with the file name of TA Support. You can also view the status on the General Information page.
List View for TopicsThe system examines the responses for sentiment and assigns a rating to it. The List View for Topics displays after the analysis is finished and has these columns:
Column DescriptionTopics (uuu/ttt)
The topic in the response that sentiment described. The system finds similar words and combines them into a single topic. For example, the topic "hair" could include topic phrases such as "my hair," "your hair," and "hair in picture." The numbers in parentheses stand for the number of unique respondents (uuu), followed by the total number of response mentions (ttt). In other words, if you save the extract as a question, the first number indicates how many respondents would be coded. The second number indicates how many codes would be applied. You can sort the Topic column by alphanumeric order if
279
PrintDoc01 020813
you click the column heading.
Comments
The number of comments which contain the corresponding topic. Click the number in the Average Rating column to display the comments. You can sort the Comments column from highest to lowest (and vice versa) if you click the column heading.
Average Rating
Each topic and sentiment combination is given a score: strong positive is +2, positive is +1, neutral is 0, negative is -1, and strong negative is -2. The scores for each combination are added and divided by the number of combinations to get an average rating for that topic. For example, there are three topic/sentiment combinations for topic "movie." Two of the combinations were "I love the movie," which gets a strong positive score. One combination was "I hate the movie," which gets a strong negative score. The formula would be (2 + 2 + -2)/3 = .667, which would be a positive average rating. The background color of this column reflects the category of the average rating:
Bright green = strong positive (an average rating of 1.01 to 2.00)
Dark green = positive (0.01 to 1.00) Gray = neutral (0.00) Orange = negative (-0.01 to -1.00) Red = strong negative (-1.01 to -2.00)
You can sort the Average Rating column from highest to lowest (and vice versa) if you click the column heading.
In the example below, the topic "price" was found to have sentiment in 14 comments. To view the comments, click the Average Rating field, and a dialog displays.
280
Data Management
If a topic is grouped, the comments display on the right side of the screen as shown below. Note that you can change the Group name by double-clicking the name and entering a new name. You can remove extracts by right-clicking them and selecting Remove selected items from group.
You can copy individual responses if you right-click the comment and select Copy selected items. To copy multiple items, use the Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift keys to select multiple comments and then right-click and select Copy selected items.
If you right-click the topics in the Topic column, the following options are available:
281
PrintDoc01 020813
Option Description
Group SimilarClick any topic to search and combine other topics that have the same characters. A dialog opens and allows you to enter a group name. The group name defaults to the topic with the highest number of mentions.
Group Selected Items
Click a topic you want to combine with another topic. Ctrl/click any other topics. Right-click and select Combine selected items. A dialog opens. Enter the topic label in the text box, and click OK to combine the topics. The rating average for the combined topic will be updated and will be based on the scores of the combined topics. If you combine topics with an item that has already been grouped, the single topic or topics will automatically receive the group label. You do not receive the dialog where you can enter a different label name. If you combine two groups of topics, you do have the opportunity to create a new label name or choose one of the existing group names. You may also use the Group option to combine topics.
Remove Selected Items
If you would like to remove a topic, right-click it and select Remove selected items. If you want to remove multiple items, you can use the Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift keys to select multiple topics before using the right-click menu. Also, you can right-click a topic, select Remove selected items, and then select Remove topics with mentions fewer than X. Enter the appropriate number, and topics with less than that number of mentions will no longer display.
Un-group Selected Items
This option allows you to take topics that were grouped and return them to their original state.
Chart View for TopicsTo see a "heat map" of the topics, click Chart View. The "heat map" displays the topics in one of four quadrants. The vertical axis represents positive to negative ratings, and its color goes from dark green to dark red. The horizontal axis represents weak to strong feeling, and its color goes from yellow to blue.
Here is an example of a Topics chart:
282
Data Management
The quadrants have the following ratings:
Upper right is strong positive Upper left is positive Lower left is negative Lower right is strong negative
If a topic is listed in the middle, it is neutral.
The color of the topic also indicates its rating:
Bright green = strong positive (an average rating of 1.01 to 2.00) Dark green = positive (0.01 to 1.00) Gray = neutral (0.00) Orange = negative (-0.01 to -1.00) Red = strong negative (-1.01 to -2.00)
The font size indicates the number of mentions - the larger the font, the higher the number of mentions.
You can change some display features of the chart through the Options button on the Chart toolbar.
To view the responses associated with a topic, double-click a topic in the chart.
Chart Options
283
PrintDoc01 020813
Click Options to change the appearance of the chart. Here are the options:
Option DescriptionChart Background Color
Click the color selection box to change the background color of the chart.
Item Shape And Item Shape Attributes
Use this option if you would like the words on the chart to appear in a shape. The default is none (which means the word displays without a shape around it.) Shape options are capsule, oval, and rectangle.If you choose an item shape, you can choose the item background color and whether the color should be solid or gradient (goes from light to dark.)
Item Font Attributes Choose the font and font sizes for the chart.
Maximum Label Length
The maximum label length defaults to 20 characters. You can increase the maximum length. Note that if you increase the maximum too much, the label may become larger than the screen width.
The Minimum Mentions text box also allows you to change the chart display. The field refers to the number of mentions of the word in the responses. The arrows on the box allows you to increase or decrease the number of mentions. Note that if there are a large number of items on the chart, all of the lowest mention items may not display. The chart tries to display the items with the most mentions first and tries to determine placement without overlaying too many items.
GroupThe Group option is another way to combine topics. Note that the Group dialog is the same for both Sentiment Topics and for Concepts (with the exception of the Average Rating column.) When you click Group, a dialog opens with these fields:
Fields DescriptionGrouping Expression
Enter standard regular expressions to search for topics (or concepts) with this criteria.
Group Button Once you enter a grouping expression, click the Group button to start the search.
Group Label Enter the name for this group of topics (or concepts.)
Concepts This column lists all of the topics (or concepts) that met the search criteria.
Average Rating
For Topics, the average rating value displays and can be sorted in ascending or descending order. (This column does not display for Concepts.)
Mentions This column lists the number of responses in each topic (or concept.)
Remove Left-click a topic (or concept) that you want to remove
284
Data Management
from the list, and click Remove. That topic (or concept) will not be combined with the other topics (or concepts.) If you want to remove multiple items, you can use the Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift keys to select multiple topics (or concepts) before you click Remove.
OK Click OK to combine the topics (or concepts.)
ExportThe Export option creates an XML file which can be opened with Excel. This option is only available once the topics have been saved to Ascribe. When you click Export, the Save As dialog box for your computer opens. Enter a name for the file. To view the file, browse to the location where you saved the file. The file has this format:
Field DescriptionSentiment The type of sentiment found in the comment.Expression The extracted word or phrase which shows sentiment. Topic The noun or topic described by the sentiment.
Topic GroupIf the comment was included in a group of comments, the grouped label displays here. If the comment was not grouped, the topic group will be the same as the topic.
Value The rating associated with the sentiment.Comment ID The ID associated with the comment or response.
285
PrintDoc01 020813
Extract The phrase or words that the sentiment describesComment The full comment or response.Here is a screen shot of an exported file:
Adding and Analyzing Additional Data for SentimentIf you analyze data for sentiment and then add additional data, you should analyze the question again. When you select Analyze a second time, only the new data will be analyzed. The system will try to fit the new data into any groups that have been established, based on an exact match of extracts.
If you want the entire dataset to be analyzed, then use the right-click menu option on the General Information screen to reset processing results and responses and then analyze the data again.
ConceptsThe Concepts option examines the responses for related words or ideas. It does not examine the responses for sentiment.
The toolbar for the Concepts page has the following options:
Option Description
Options
Choose Standard Concept Processor or Modified Concept Processor.The Modified Concept Processor may find more concepts. It examines the sentence structure for nouns and modifiers separated by "being" words. For example, "the dog is brown" may be found as a concept for "brown dog." It will also look for gerunds (the -ing form of a verb that functions as a noun.) Changing processors will discard the results - If you change processors after you run an analysis, the results of the first analysis will be lost.
Analyze The first time you select Concepts, you have to select
286
Data Management
Analyze to start the process.
Group
Opens a dialog box and offers options for combining concepts. See Group in the Sentiment Topics section for more information. The Group dialog is the same for both Concepts and Sentiment Topics (with the exception of the Average Rating column.)
List View Displays list of concepts.Chart View Displays a word cloud of the concepts.
Minimum Mentions
Allows you to change the display according to the number of mentions of a topic. Minimum mentions defaults to 2. The arrows on the box allows you to increase or decrease the number of mentions. Note: If you are thinking of saving the inspection to Ascribe, change the minimum mentions to 1 to see everything that would be labeled.
Save to Ascribe™
This option creates a variable on the Variables page called Concepts. It also copies the responses from the inspection and labels the responses by concept. Note that all responses in the data are saved whether they are labeled or not. You are charged transactions for all of the responses, not just the ones that are labeled.An inspection has to be saved in order to be used for scripted outputs, Ascribe Presentations, or Ascribe Illustrator.
To start the process, click the Analyze button. When you select Analyze, a dialog box displays with these options:
Option Description
Wait For Completion
You cannot do any other activities while the analysis is processing. The results will automatically display when the process is finished.
Submit As A Job
This option submits the analysis as a background job and allows you to perform other tasks while the job completes. You can view the job on the Jobs page; it is listed a scripted output with the file name of TA Support. You can also view the status on the General Information page.
List View for ConceptsThe List View for Concepts will display these columns:
Column DescriptionConcepts (uuu/ttt)
The set of words or ideas that appear in the responses. The numbers in parentheses stand for the number of unique respondents (uuu), followed by the total number of response mentions (ttt). In other words, if you save the extract as a question, the first number indicates how
287
PrintDoc01 020813
many respondents would be coded. The second number indicates how many codes would be applied. You can sort the Concepts column by alphanumeric order if you click the column heading.
Comments
The number of comments which contain the corresponding concept. Click this number to display the comments. If the concept is not grouped, the comments display in a dialog. If the concept is grouped, information displays in the Group and Extract columns on the right side of the screen. The Group column lists the group name. (You can change the Group name by double-clicking the name and entering a new name.) The Extract column lists the extracts that are included in the group. To remove an extract from the grouped concept, right-click an extract and select Remove selected items from group. You can view the combined comments by clicking the Comments field next to the Extract. You can sort the Comments column from highest to lowest (and vice versa) if you click the column heading.
If you right-click a concept in the Concepts column, the following options are available:
288
Data Management
Option Description
Group SimilarClick any concept to search and combine other concepts that have the same characters. A dialog opens and allows you to enter a group name. The group name defaults to the concept with the highest number of mentions.
Group Selected Items
Click a concept you want to combine with another concept. Ctrl/click any other concepts. Right-click and select Combine selected items. A dialog opens. Enter the label in the text box, and click OK to combine the concepts. If you combine concepts with an item that has already been grouped, the single concept or concepts will automatically receive the group label. You do not receive the dialog where you can enter a different label name. If you combine two groups of concepts, you do have the opportunity to create a new label name or choose one of the existing group names. You may also use the Group option to combine concepts.
Remove Selected Items
If you would like to remove a concept, right-click it and select Remove selected items. If you want to remove multiple items, you can use the Ctrl/Click or Ctrl/Shift keys to select multiple concepts before using the right-click menu. Also, you can right-click a concept, select Remove selected items, and then select Remove topics with mentions fewer than X. Enter the appropriate number, and concepts with less than that number of mentions will no longer display.
Un-group Selected Items
This option allows you to take concepts that were grouped and return them to their original state.
Chart View for Concepts The Chart option for Concepts displays a word cloud. The font size indicates the number of mentions - the larger the font, the higher the number of mentions. Here is an example of a chart created from a Concept List:
289
PrintDoc01 020813
The word cloud has the same options as the Topics Chart. The Minimum Mentions text box also allows you to change the chart display. The field refers to the number of mentions of the word in the responses. The arrows on the box allows you to increase or decrease the number of mentions. Note that if there are a large number of items on the chart, all of the lowest mention items may not display. The chart tries to display the items with the most mentions first and tries to determine placement without overlaying items.
To view the responses associated with a concept, double-click a concept in the word cloud.
Adding and Analyzing Additional Data for ConceptsIf you analyze data for concepts and then add additional data, you should analyze again. Only the new data will be analyzed. The system will try to fit the new data into any groups that have been established, based on an exact match of extracts.
If you want the entire dataset to be analyzed, then use the right-click menu option on the General Information screen to reset processing results and responses and then analyze the data again.
EntitiesThis option analyzes the data for names of people, products, and organizations.
The toolbar for the Entities page has the following options:
Option DescriptionOptions Entities processing options are under development.
Analyze The first time you select Entities for a question, you have to select Analyze to start the process.
List View Displays list of concepts.Chart View No chart view is available at this time.
290
Data Management
When you select Analyze, a dialog box displays with these options:
Option Description
Wait For Completion
If you choose this option, you cannot do any other activities while the analysis is processing. A notice displays when the submitted job starts and completes. The results display when the process is finished. The dialog box also has an option to change the default timeout limit of 3 minutes.
Submit Job And Continue
This option submits the analysis as a background job and allows you to perform other tasks while the job completes. You can view the job on the Jobs page; it is listed a scripted output with the file name of TA Support.
List View for EntitiesWhen the analysis is complete, the List View displays. The list has these columns:
Column Description
Entity
The categories are: People - names of people (brands may also display here)Products - names of productsOrganizations - names of companiesOther Mentions - proper nouns
CommentsThe number of comments that correspond to the category. Click this number to display the comments on the right side of the screen.
Mentions
A "mention" is the specific word or phrase found in the response that was identified as a person, product, organization, or as a proper noun. The number of mentions is listed for each category. Click the number to display the specific words or phrases on the right side of the screen.
Here is an example of the Entities page after clicking the number of mentions for Organizations:
291
PrintDoc01 020813
AcceleratorYou can create an accelerator (automated coding model) from an inspection which has been saved to Ascribe. Click the Accelerator menu item, which displays the Accelerator page for the inspection. Here are the options on that page:
Option DescriptionCreate Allows you to create an accelerator from an inspection.Train Starts the training job for the accelerator.Edit Opens an editor for the training examples.Analyze
Create an Accelerator from an InspectionClick the Create button from the top menu. A dialog opens with these options:
Option Description
Accelerator ID Unique identifier for the accelerator; it defaults to ACM_inspection name.
Use Saved Sentiment Topics As Training Examples
Creates the accelerator from the saved Sentiment Topics.
Use Saved Concepts As Training Examples Creates the accelerator from the saved Concepts.
Use Existing Accelerator
Allows you to use an existing accelerator as training examples.
Train After Creation Automatically starts the training job after the accelerator is created.
292
Data Management
Edit Accelerator Training ExamplesThe training example editor in Inspector allows for very simple editing of examples. The top part of the screen has these fields:
Field Description
Accelerator ID Unique identifier for the accelerator; it defaults to ACM_inspection name.
Description Optional description of the accelerator.Approved The accelerator defaults to approved.
Account Access Designates this codelist as an account codebook. See Account Codebooks for more information.
293
PrintDoc01 020813
The second part of the screen displays the category (topic or concept) and the number of comments for that category. Click the number in the comments field to display the comments.
The category section has these right-click options:
Option Description
Insert Examples Opens a dialog where you can enter more training examples. Click OK to add the examples.
Delete All Examples Permanently removes all examples from the category.
The comment section has these right-click options:
Option Description
Copy Selected Items Copies selected items to clipboard so you can use them as new examples.
Edit Example Opens a dialog where you can change the example text.
Delete Selected Examples
Permanently removes the selected examples from the category.
To return to the Accelerator page, click the Close button at the top of the page. After making any changes to the examples, you will need to train the accelerator before using it to code other responses.
294
Data Management
Set FiltersYou can filter the results of sentiment and concept analysis by filter variables. Filtering only works for sentiment and concepts - not for Search, Curate, or Entities.
The Set Filters dialog allows you to select and remove filter variables. The Filter Bar displays on the Inspection page when a filter is set. It allows you to see what filters are set.
Click the Set Filters button to open the Set Filters dialog. This dialog displays:
The top left pane of the dialog displays a list of available variables. Click the variable you wish to use as a filter, and then click the Add button to move the variable to the top right pane.
Once the variable is in the top right pane, click the variable again, and the options of the filter variable display in bottom pane.
295
PrintDoc01 020813
By default, the options are all selected. You can select and unselect the options from this screen. Click OK to save and close the dialog.
You can work with more than one variable filter at a time.
If you want to remove a filter question, click the appropriate question in the top right pane, and click Remove.
To remove all filter questions, click Remove All.
Once you select a question in the Set Filters dialog and exit that dialog, a yellow bar displays next to the sentiment or concept results pane. The initial view shows what filter has been selected. The screen looks like this:
To close the filter bar, click the yellow icon and then the black icon.
296
Data Management
Note that if you decide not to use a filter question, you need to remove it using the Set Filters dialog.
Filtering Within a Filter VariableWhen you select options within a filter variable, the logic is based on "or." You are selecting one option or another or some combination of the options. For example, you can select to see responses from France or England or Germany. Alternatively, you can select to see only responses from France or only responses from England or only responses from Germany. You can also select some combination of the countries.
Filtering With Multiple Filter VariablesWhen using multiple variables for filtering, the logic within the variable is still based on "or". But, the logic for selecting between the variables is based on "and".
In the example below, two filters are used. The system sees the logic as 'show respondents who are females AND who live in the Southeast OR Southwest region.'
When you have multiple filter questions, you have to have at least one code selected in each question or no responses will be returned.
Save to Ascribe or Export to Excel While Filtering When you save concepts or topics to Ascribe while filtering, all of the data in the inspection will be copied to a new variable, but only the filtered data will be labeled. The counts at the top of the Topics or Concepts columns reflect what will be labeled. In the example below, 1442 responses will be labeled using 4744 labels.
297
PrintDoc01 020813
When you export topics to Excel while filtering, all of the data in the inspection will be copied to Excel.
Variables PageNavigate: Inspector/Inspections/Right-click an inspection/Select Variables
The Variables page contains additional data associated with an inspection. The additional data may be:
Filter variables copied from a study question
Filter variables loaded directly to an inspection
Sentiment rating, topics, or concepts that were saved to Ascribe.
Page LayoutThe Variables page has two sections. The left side contains the list of variables associated with the inspection and has these fields:
Field Description
ID
The ID can indicate the ID of a filter variable copied to an inspection or loaded to an inspection.It can also indicate inspection results saved to Ascribe. For example, Sentiment is the topic list, Sentiment Rating is the rating summary, and Concepts is the concept list. These variables only display if those results have been saved to Ascribe.
Description The description is usually the same as the ID.Comments The number of comments or responses in a variable.
Labeled The number of comments or responses which received a label.
298
Data Management
The right-side is the Data Labels section. It allows you to add, delete, and apply labels. To work with a variable or display its data labels, click anywhere on the variable on the left side of the screen. If a variable has labeled responses, the information displays on the right side of the screen with these fields:
Field Description
ValueThe number associated with the label; it is use for reporting purposes (such as scripted outputs, Ascribe Presentations, or Ascribe Illustrator.)
Label The description of a filter variable or the description of how a response was categorized in text analysis.
Comments The number of comments or responses in a variable.
Labeled The number of comments or responses which received a label.
Add a New VariableIf you add the variables directly to the inspection via the Load Data option, you must first create the variable labels on the Variables page.
Right-click anywhere on the left section and select Add new variable. The dialog opens with these fields:
Field Description
IDThe identifier of the column in the dataset that contains the filter variables. For example, if your dataset contains a column with country information and is labeled Country, you need to add a variable with the ID of Country.
Label The label can be the same as the ID.OK Click OK to create the variable.Cancel Click Cancel to exit the dialog without creating the variable.
Label the Data in a VariableAfter you have loaded the variable data, you should label the data so you can use it for filtering.
To label the data, click the variable on left section. Then click the Apply Label button. Ascribe will create and apply the labels to the appropriate data. The labels display on the right side of the screen. Refresh the screen to see how many were labeled (see column on left side of screen.)
Insert or Remove LabelsThe Data Labels section (right side of page) has options for changing the labels. Use the Insert button to add labels to the list. Use the Remove button to delete labels from the list.
Create an Account Codebook
299
PrintDoc01 020813
You can designate a list of data labels as an account codebook. Account codebooks can be used again in other studies or in creating coding models. Click the check box next to Account Codebook (on right section of the page) to set the designation. For more information, see Account Codebooks.
Navigate to Review ResponsesYou may edit the list of data labels in a variable using Review Responses. Note that if you do not have supervisor privilege, you will not have full access to all functionality in Review Responses. You will be able to remove and add labels from responses.
To navigate to Review Responses, right-click a variable on the left side of the page and choose Review Responses.
Remove a VariableTo remove a variable, right-click the variable in the left section of the page. Select Remove variable.
Variable PropertiesTo change the ID or label of a variable, right-click the variable in the left section of the page. Select Properties. The dialog opens, and you can make changes there.
Return to Inspector/InspectionsRight-click anywhere on the page and select Inspector. This action navigates to the Inspector/Inspections page.
Data ManagementThis chapter details how to manage study data, from start to finish within Ascribe™.
How to Load DataThere are number of ways to load data:
From an Excel® file From a tab delimited file From a CfMC SURVENT generated . lst file From an XML file in the Ascribe™ format From a "mapped ASCII" file that you define From custom developed interfaces that typically deliver data in "real time."
Each has different formatting requirements, and each is recognized by Ascribe™ by the file name extension. When you load the data, the system will load only "new" data. This means that you may load cumulative data sets and be assured that only those records that are new will be loaded.
NoteThe respondent number/question ID combination must be unique to be loaded.
Load Tab Delimited DataThree-column tab delimited data is the "native format" for Ascribe™. When Ascribe™ encounters a file with a . txt extension, it assumes that the file is in this format: question ID,
300
Data Management
respondent ID, and verbatim/closed ended data. If a fourth column is present, Ascribe™ assumes it is transcription data. Each field is delimited by a tab character. (If this format is inconvenient, or you have a file with a different delimiter, you can define your own file format. See Define Your Own Load File Types for more information.)
To load a tab delimited file, prepare a file of data that contains question ID, respondent ID, and verbatim or closed ended data in a tab delimited text file. (Transcription data can follow the verbatim.) At Language Logic, we use Excel™ to prepare the file.
Here are the steps to prepare the file:
Read the file into Excel™ (you may have to use the text to columns feature). Delete any header rows and irrelevant columns. Check that you have the question ID in the first column, the respondent ID in the
second, and the verbatim text or closed-ended data in the third column. Save the file as a tab delimited text file; use Save As from the Excel™ File menu. Name the file studyname_date.txt. If you use this naming format, the person who
loads the data into the study will have an easier time finding it. We recommend that you include the date in the filename for identification purposes and to make support more efficient. Tab delimited files will look like this:
The next step is to load the data to the study. Data loads in the order it is in the file. So if you sort the data before you load, it will load in that sorted order. For more information, see Load Data to a Study.
Load Excel® FilesAscribe™ loads Microsoft Excel® files in their native, Excel® format. To load an Excel® file, you will need to have it in this format.
The column containing the respondent number must have the word " RespondentID", " ResponseID", "RID", " CaseID" or " SessionID" as the first cell in the column.
NoteYou can also specify the column header using a "Load File Type". It is advised to do this only if the files you will be loading consistently use the column header you wish to specify. See "Define Your Own Load File Types" for further information.Each of the questions that you are loading must have their question ID in the top row (the first cell), with the data for that question in the rows beneath those questions.
A few comments:
301
PrintDoc01 020813
You may "customize" your Excel® format by defining a "Load File Type". If you have multiple spreadsheets in an Excel® workbook, only the first one
alphabetically will load. The rest will be ignored. Language Logic has created an Excel® add-in called "llutilities2.xla". This add-in
places a "Language Logic Tools" option in the Excel® toolbar. "Language Logic Tools" provides the user with a number of tools to help the user troubleshoot an Excel® file before loading it into Ascribe™. Usually, we recommend users convert Excel® files to a three-column tab delimited text files to avoid a few problems Excel® files can cause when loading. (See Excel ® Add-In for further information.)
Load File Types Navigate: Administrator/Load File Types
Ascribe™ processes files based upon the file extension. The "extension" in a file name is the set of characters following the last period. For example, if a file is named " abc.xls" then " xls" is referred to as the extension.
The Load File Types page allows you to describe how a particular file will be interpreted for loading data. This page shows load file types established for the account. The list contains the following columns:
Column Example DescriptionFile Extension DTX File extension used to match the incoming load file with
the correct Load File TypeName standard DTX Brief description of the Load File Type
Description This is the standard DTX file format.
User description of the file type
Type Mapped ASCII The format of the data in the file
Ascribe™ can load data and study information from the following file types. In addition, Ascribe™ can define file types that are specific to your situation (see Define Your Own Load File Types.)
Extension File Contents File SourceAscribe™ Load Type Comments
CXML Question, Codebook, and Setup
Confirmit v14 Custom Proprietary format for Confirmit question and codebook setup
HRD Question, Codebook, and Setup
CfMC Custom Proprietary format for CfMC question and codebook setup
MDD Question, Codebook, and Setup
Dimensions Custom Dimensions setup file
302
Data Management
ORD Question, Codebook, and Setup
CfMC Custom Same as HRD with parser modified for ORC use of _c
QDI Question, Codebook, and Setup
Quancept
Custom Proprietary format for Quancept question and codebook setup
Setup.xlsSetup.xlsx
Question, Codebook, and Setup
Language Logic Excel™ Add-In
Excel™ Horizontal
Excel™file formatted with the Language Logic question template. It creates or changes Ascribe™ question information.
SSS Question, Codebook, and Setup
Triple-S Custom Triple-S XML representation of study metadata
SAV Question, Codebook, Setup, or Response Data
SPSS Custom SPSS sav file
VBS Question, Codebook, Setup, or Response Data
Verbastat Custom Verbastat project file
XML Question, Codebook, Setup, or Response Data
Various Custom Ascribe™ XML representation of study metadata; XML file with associated XLST file
CSV Response Data
Various Custom This format is an ASCII representation of an Excel™ spreadsheet with the columns delimited by with a comma. Processing rules are the same as Excel™.
CTXT Response Data
Confirmit v14 Custom Confirmit tabbed delimited text file. If looped questions exist, there may be multiple files.
DAU Response Data
mrInterview Custom Proprietary format for mrInterview
303
PrintDoc01 020813
dataDDF.ZIP Response
DataDimensions Custom The zip file contains
both the MDD & DDF files. The DDF file must have the MDD file with it.
DRS Response Data
Quancept Custom Proprietary format for Quancept data
DRU Response Data
Quancept after dedup
Custom Same as DRS
DTX Response Data
Quancept Mapped ASCII Quancept data file with this default field mapping:Respondent ID (position 1 for 6)Questions ID (position 13 for 8)Response (position 30 to end of row )
LST Response Data
CfMC Custom Proprietary CfMC data file format
OST Response Data
CfMc Custom Proprietary CfMC data file format
TEX Response Data
Quancept after dedup
Mapped ASCII Same as DTX
TXT Response Data
Various Delimited This format is the default data load file type for Ascribe™. It has three fields per row delimited by a tab. The fields are question ID, response ID, and response.
XLS Response Data
Various Excel™ Horizontal
Standard Excel™ horizontal format with one column for respondent ID and other columns for responses to questions. Question ID is identified by the first cell in each column (after the respondent ID column.)
XLSX Response Data
Various Excel™ Horizontal
Standard Excel™ horizontal format
304
Data Management
with one column for respondent ID and other columns for responses to questions. Question ID is identified by the first cell in each column (after the respondent ID column.)
Define Your Own Load File TypesNavigate: Administrator/Select Load File Types/Right-click/Select Add New File Load Type
A user with administrative privileges can define load file types for an account. You define the file type once and give it a unique extension. Every time the Ascribe™ loader recognizes the extension, the defined rules will be applied to the file. You can add, edit, or delete load file types from the Load File Type Properties screen.
The Load File Type Properties screen has these fields:
Field DescriptionFile Extension The file extension characters are the last characters following a '.' in
the file name. For example a file named "study1.dtx" has an extension of dtx. A file named studi1.itr.dtx has an extension of itr.dtx. DO NOT INCLUDE THE LEADING '.' FOR THIS PROPERTY.
File Type Here are the options: Mapped ASCII Single -The file contains one row of data
per respondent per question. Key fields are in known positions within the row. Use Field Definitions properties to specify positions.
Mapped ASCII Multi -The file contains one row of data per respondent. Each row contains data for multiple questions. The start position and length of the data field is set on the Data Tab from Edit the Question. A question must be established to represent the respondent field, and its question ID should be entered as described in the Field Definitions section.
Delimited -The file contains one row per respondent per question. Key fields are delimited by a special character. Use Field Delimiter property to specify delimiting character.
Excel™ Horizontal -File is an Excel™ spreadsheet. The first row contains the question ID for data or the respondent ID caption for the column containing the respondent ID.
Excel™ Vertical - File is an Excel™ spreadsheet containing a column for each of the key fields. Use the Field Definitions properties to specify field/column order.
CSV - The file contains data in a comma separated value file. This format is the same as that produced by Excel™.
305
PrintDoc01 020813
Each column of data is separated by a comma. Columns that contain commas are enclosed in double quotes ("). Double quotes within a column are represented by a preceding double quote (" becomes "").
Custom - The file contains data in a format other than row/record based. Data files of this type are processed entirely by the script designated below.
Default - The file will be processed according to the default format based upon a known file extension. Any script established below will be processed against the standard three column data file produced by this default processing. For a list of the current known file type and extensions, see Load File Types.
Name The name of the load file typeFile Purpose Ascribe™ will process files for the purpose of loading responses into
our database (DATA) or for the purpose of adding studies, questions and codebooks (SETUP).
Description The description of the load file typeStudy ID Delimiter (in Filename)
This is the single character which will be used to identify the study ID portion of a file name when submitting data for loading to our FTP site. This option is only used when files are submitted to the FTP site for loading. Files submitted interactively will already have the study identified. The study ID must be the first portion of the file name and will end when the delimiting character specified here has been reached.
Field Delimiter The character used to separate the fields for a delimited file type. It is typically a tab character or comma.
Field Definitions The use of these fields varies based upon the file type.Mapped ASCII Single
Name is used for information purposes only. Column represents the starting position in the record (first
position is 1). Enter a zero to specify an unused field. Width is the length of the field in characters (NOT THE END
POSITION). Use 0 to specify variable length to end of line.Mapped ASCII Multi (only the RID field is used)
Name must agree with the question ID for the question representing the respondent ID.
Column represents the starting position in the record (first position is 1). Enter a zero to specify an unused field.
Width is the length of the field in characters (NOT THE END POSITION). Use 0 to specify variable length to end of line.
Delimited Name is used for information purposes only. Column represents the column ordinal number in the
record (first position is 1). Enter a zero to specify an unused field.
Width is unused for this file type.Excel™ Horizontal
306
Data Management
Name is used to specify the row 1 caption identifying the respondent ID column and the iteration column (All other columns are assumed to be question IDs.)
Column is unused for this file type. Width is unused for this file type.
Excel™ Vertical Name is used for information purposes only. Column represents the column ordinal number in the
spreadsheet (first column is 1). Enter a zero to specify an unused field.
Width is unused for this file type.CSV - Same as Excel™ Horizontal.Custom - Unused for this format.Default - Unused for this format. Values are all known based upon the default processing for a given file extension.
Preprocessor Script for initial processing of files received. An example of such processing might include extraction of image snippets from a set of TIF files. These scripts are created by Language Logic or by client personnel and submitted to Language Logic. Available scripts are included in the drop-down list.
Script Script provides additional custom processing after predefined processing from File Type has been completed. These scripts are created by Language Logic or client personnel and submitted to Language Logic. Available scripts are included in the drop-down list.
Post Load Script to be used to provide additional custom processing after responses have been loaded into the Ascribe™ database. Typically, these are used to modify some aspect of the response information such as the translation field, based upon other database values. These scripts are created by Language Logic or by client personnel and submitted to Language Logic. Available scripts are included in the drop-down list.
Options Add Questions - Selecting this option will cause Ascribe™ to automatically create any question IDs found in a data file of this load file type that do not exist in the study. This option is only in effect when files are submitted for loading via our FTP site. Interactive loads (files input in Ascribe™) will use the options selected at load time.
Auto-code closed end questions - When this option is selected, Ascribe™ will attempt to "code" responses being loaded by matching the data value to a code value in the codebook for the question. Only numeric responses from question types of closed ended or other specify will have this "auto code" process attempted. This option is only in effect when files are submitted for loading via our FTP site. Interactive loads (files input in Ascribe™) will use the options selected at load time.
Auto-code text responses - When this option is selected, Ascribe™ will attempt to "code" responses being loaded by matching them to previously coded responses coded with the same (shared) codebook. This option is only in effect
307
PrintDoc01 020813
when files are submitted for loading via our FTP site. Interactive loads (files input in Ascribe™) will use the options selected at load time.
Append Iteration to Question ID - This option is used to indicate that the iteration number will be appended to the question ID to create a new question ID. For example, Q1 iteration 1 will remain Q1 as question ID. Q1 iteration 2 will become Q1_2 as the question ID.
Strip leading zeros from respondent ID - By default, Ascribe™ will not remove any characters or otherwise modify a respondent ID when it is loaded. For example, the respondent ID "001" will appear as "001". Use this option if you wish the respondent ID to have leading zeros removed. So, in the example, the respondent ID would load as "1".
You can perform any of the following tasks to manage your load file types:
Add a load file type: right-click and select Add New Load File Type. Complete the information on the Load File Type Properties page.
Modify a load file type: right-click and select Edit. Complete the information on the Load File Type Properties page.
Delete a load file type: right-click and select Delete.
Load Study Setup Information
308
Data Management
Navigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Load Responses / Process FileAscribe™ loads study information from various data collection systems: Quancept (an SPSS/ MR product), Survent (a CfMC product), Dimensions (an SPSS/ MR product), and Confirmit (a Firm product). Ascribe™ also reads XML study files (Ascribe™ XML.) The study information consists of:
Question ID Question text Data locations Closed-end response categories and pre-lists for other specify question types Shared codebooks for iterated questions.
To load either .HRD (Survent), .QDI, MDD or other setup file:
1. From the Load Response/Process File page, click the Browse button and navigate to the file location of the setup file you want to load.
2. Leave the defaults and press the OK button.
Load Data to a StudyNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Load Responses / Process File
Once you navigate to the Load Responses/Process File page, enter the name of the file which contains the data into the field labeled 'Enter the name of the data file.' Either enter the path and file name of the file to be loaded or use the Browse button to browse your file system (just like Excel™ or Word).
Load file types are determined by their extension (the characters after the last '.' in the file name.) For more information, see Load File Types.
When you load data, you have some options. These options always override the load file type properties. The options are:
Option DescriptionLoad Data for Existing Questions
This option loads data to questions that already exist in the study. It is useful to load cumulative data files that contain questions which will not be used in Ascribe™. Data for questions
309
PrintDoc01 020813
that have not been defined will be ignored.Pause Load to Prompt for Missing Questions
The loader will ask the user which questions should be created and/or loaded if the questions do not already exist in Ascribe™.
Create Missing Questions Automatically
Ascribe™ will create questions whenever data is encountered for questions that have not been previously defined in the study. When you use this option, Ascribe™ ‘guesses’ the question type since you have not defined it yet. You can change the question type on the General Tab of the Edit Question screen.
Auto-Code Closed and O/S Questions
While it loads data, Ascribe™ will automatically code responses to closed-ended and other specify questions which have numeric values.
Auto-Code Text Responses
Ascribe™ will automatically code text responses as they are loaded. See Auto-Code Text Responses on Load for more information.
After you select the options, press the OK button to load the data. The Load Details screen displays. It describes the results of your load. For more information, see Load Details.
View and Delete Loaded DataNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Reports/Select Loads
310
Data Management
The Loads screen displays information about data loads for a study. A given load will often result in multiple rows because there is one row for each question that was loaded.
Load information is not included in a saved study. If you restore a study, the restored study will have no entries on the Loads page.
Here are the fields on the Loads page:
Field DescriptionLoad Date The date and time the file was loaded. This time is based on the web
server clock.User Name The user name of the person who loaded the file.
File Name The name of the file that was loaded.Records Processed/Still Loaded
The number on the left represents the responses originally loaded. The right side number is a count of those which remain loaded (have not been deleted.)
Question Type The type of question that was loaded.Question ID The question ID of the question that was loaded.Question Label The label of the question that was loaded.You can delete a load from a question if you right-click the question and select Delete. You must be an administrator or supervisor to delete data. When you delete loaded data, you will delete only the data that was loaded for that question, for that date and time. All of the other data remains.
If you want to delete an entire load, navigate to Jobs, right-click a job, select Loads, right-click a load, and select Delete. This action deletes all of the data from that load.
Loads by DateNavigate: Supervisor/Loads
The Loads by Date table shows the result of a specific file load attempt. There is one row for each load attempt for the date ranged specified. The default view is to show load activity for the past seven days. To view a different date range, select date choices from the drop-down boxes and click the OK button.
The displayed list includes the following columns:
Study ID The study ID.Load Date Date and time of the load.Load File Name of the file loaded.Responses Loaded
Number of records loaded in total or the word "Error" if an error occurred.
Comment This column is blank for successful loads or contains the error description if the load was unsuccessful.
311
PrintDoc01 020813
To view details of the loaded file, right-click a table entry and select Load Details. The Load Details page will display.
To delete a load, right-click a table entry and select Delete. This action will delete all responses in all questions which were loaded from the file on the date and time indicated.
Load DetailsNavigate: Supervisor/Loads/Right-click a load/Select Load Details
Jobs/Right-click a job/Right-click a load/Select Load Details
The Load Details screen displays the result of a load on a question by question basis.
To delete responses from a question, right-click the question and select Delete. This action deletes all responses for the selected question which were loaded from the file on the date and time indicated.
The Load Details screen has these fields:
Option DescriptionQuestion ID When you load data to an existing study, the question ID of the
new load must match exactly the question ID of the existing study. The match is case insensitive.
Question Label The question label.Responses Processed
The number of responses that have been processed from the load file.
Responses Loaded The number of responses added to the study from this load.Blank Responses (Ignored)
Responses are ignored if they contain no data.
Loaded Previously Responses are skipped if they are already loaded. Responses are skipped if you try to load a question ID/respondent ID that has been loaded previously.
Responses Combined
If there are responses from the same respondent to the same question, these responses are combined into a single response. The responses are separated by the ‘|’ character.
Auto-Coded in Load The number of responses that were auto-coded during this load.Coded The number of responses coded in this load.
Loads by Job
312
Data Management
Navigate: Jobs/Right-click a job/Select LoadsThis table displays each of the loads performed by the job. In many cases, there will be only one load per job, as is normal when a single file is submitted for the job. If the file submitted for the job is a zip file, there can be many loads performed by a single job.
Here are the fields on this screen:
Field DescriptionStudy ID The ID of the study to which the responses were loaded.Load Date The date and time the load was performed.
Load File The name of the file loaded.Responses Loaded
If the load was successful, this entry shows the name of responses loaded. If unsuccessful, this entry displays an error message.
Comment This entry may show additional information about the load.To see more information about the load, right-click the load and select Load Details.
To delete a load, right-click a load and select Delete. This action will delete all responses in all questions which were loaded from the file on the date and time indicated.
Load Voice RecordingsNo additional software or hardware is required on the part of the user to transcribe and code the voice recordings loaded into Ascribe™. Any file that can be played by Windows Media Player can be loaded into Ascribe™.
First, you'll find it valuable to have the FTP (file transfer protocol) process in place for your account. Voice recording files are large, and you may have difficulty loading them through the Ascribe™ interface. After confirming that you have the FTP process in place, we’ll need to set up a load file type for your needs.
Zip files will have a name corresponding to the study ID and the load file type. For example: 12345.wav.zip. This tells Ascribe™ which study the file is to be loaded to and the type of data files that are to be loaded. The recordings inside the zip file should be named similar to RID.QID.wav. Language Logic can customize or tailor this component, but the important thing to remember is we need the two important bits of information, Respondent ID and Question ID. An example: 10001_Q2.wav or 10002_Q2.wav.
See Translate/Transcribe Verbatims to learn how to transcribe and code voice recorded verbatims.
Load Image FilesWhen you load image files, Ascribe™ requires the file to be named in this format: RID_QID.TIF. Here are two examples:
00001_q23.tif 42008_gender.tif
Next, create a compressed archive of the TIF files to be loaded to Ascribe™. Name the archive with this format: StudyID.TIF.ZIP. Here is an example:
376029.TIF.ZIP
313
PrintDoc01 020813
Create the study in Ascribe™ so that the study ID matches the study ID of the load file (i.e., 376029.) Load the compressed archive using the FTP loader.
Auto FTP SetupUsers can load data files automatically via an FTP site setup to receive files from a secure location. To set up the FTP site, Language Logic Support needs the IP address from the sending computer. The IP address can be one static address or a range depending on your setup. For security purposes, Language Logic will only accept data files from known IP addresses. We can define a single IP address, a list of addresses, or range(s). Once we set up the FTP site, you will send the files to:
media.languagelogic.net/<account>, where <account> is your Ascribe™ account ID.
A username is required for the site. The default username for existing accounts will be the prefix ftp- added to the FTP folder name. The FTP folder name is also the name of the Ascribe™ account.
A password is optional and may be specified by the account administrator; it can be any text.
Here is an example of an FTP username & folder, using training-2 as the Ascribe™ account name:
Username: ftp-training-2
Password: Optional (meaning it is not required)
FTP folder: training-2
This folder is a write-only folder. Once your file lands here, it is immediately sent to the site for loading.
To successfully transfer files and load them into a project in Ascribe™, you must follow the file naming standards. In order to load a data file into a project/study, the file name must contain the Ascribe™ study ID as the first portion of the file name. The study ID is delimited by a client defined character and may be followed by any additional file details. By default the defined delimiter is a period "."; however, this can be changed by an account administrator on the "Account Options" page in Ascribe™ or for specific file types, in the load file type editor (see Load File Types.)
An example file name might be proj123.12-31-05.txt where proj123 is the Ascribe™ study ID, 12-31-05 is general file info not used by Ascribe™, and . txt is the load file type.
Auto-Apply CodesNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Auto-Apply Codes
The auto-code function is used to automatically code closed-ended questions and the closed-ended portions of other specify questions. This is also helpful in coding brand lists and the open ended portions of "other" and "specify" type questions.
You may instruct Ascribe™ to automatically code the responses or you may add new codes to the codebook and have them automatically applied to the responses.
314
Data Management
There’s a special code to use for other specify questions that will concentrate all of the verbatims in a single code.
Auto-Code Closed-Ended QuestionsNavigate: Supervisor/Studies/Right-click study/Select Questions/Right-click question/Select Auto-Apply Codes
Closed-ended questions have a pre-defined response list. For example, you may have a likes rating scale from 1 to 5. Ascribe™ views the response list just like any other codebook. To auto-code a closed-ended question, set up the codebook/response list first. Make sure that the input code values match the responses’ values that were generated in the interview.
Once the codebook is ready, right-click the question, and select Auto-Apply Codes. On the next screen, press the Auto-Apply Codes button. Ascribe™ will match the responses to the input code values. The Auto-Apply Codes screen has these fields:
Field DescriptionResponse The data values found in the responses.Respondents The count of respondents whose response matched the input
value of the question’s codebook.Matched Code The code description.Codes Currently Applied
The number of codes currently applied. Zeroes mean that no codes are applied.
If one or more data values do not match a codebook entry, the Matched Code column contains the phrase "Enter New Code.” You can add codes on this screen. Move the cursor into the Matched Code column and type the text for the new code. Do this for as many codes as necessary. Click the Add Codes button to add the newly-entered codes to the codebook and automatically apply the codes.
After you click the Auto-Apply Codes button, the screen displays the updated information to confirm the coding.
315
PrintDoc01 020813
Auto-Code Other Specify QuestionsOther specify questions are really hybrid closed-ended and open-ended questions, with the pre-list representing the closed-ended responses and the other representing the verbatims. Typically there is a labor-intensive step in the tabulation process to merge the closed-ended, pre-list data with the coded verbatim data. Merging the data back together is made difficult by the fact the codes in the pre-list and the codes generated from coding are the same. Ascribe™ loads closed-ended and open-ended data into an other specify question. The closed-ended data is automatically coded, the open-ended coded as normal, and the resulting data set requires no merge step.
When data is loaded, Ascribe™ concatenates all of the data for a single respondent in a single load file together, so that you’ll see a record that looks like this.
10122:1|3|Grand Union brand |Super G - Giant Food's brand name.
In this case respondent 10122 chose 1 and 3 from the pre-list (1= Dixie; 3= Solo), and then had two others. The | symbol is the response separator. If it is encountered in the incoming response text, Ascribe™ converts it to a /.
Auto-code will code the 1 and 3 automatically as Dixie and Solo. The two other responses can be separated into a special code.
The auto-code function organizes your responses by the unique strings found in them and then provides a way for you to code them. With other specify questions, there is a special function that allows you to load the closed-ended responses as pre-coded open ends, and then consolidate all of the open ends in a special code. Here is how it works:
Typically an other specify will have a "pre-list" that represents the closed-ended portion of the question. In the following example, the pre-list consists of:Dixie = 1Hefty = 2Solo = 3 Chinet = 4Store Brand = 5
The pre-list data is loaded as the response code numbers (i.e. 1 = Dixie.) The codebook that you build for this question will consist of the pre-list, and the other
codes that you build when you examine the responses. In the pre-list, the input code value must match the incoming data (i.e., in the Dixie code, the input value must be 1.)
Build a "special" code with the | as its input value. All of the open ends will be concentrated in this code.
Execute Auto-Apply code, and you’ll see a screen like this:
316
Data Management
You can enter a new code for responses that do not match the pre-list codes. When you press the Add Codes button, you will code everything that has text in the Enter new code area.
After you’ve pressed the Add Codes button or the Apply Codes button, you’ll see a screen that looks like this.
The green numbers mean that there are uncoded responses in this group of responses. Black numbers mean that there are no uncoded responses. Next, you can use Review Responses to code the verbatim portion of the other specify question.
Auto-Code Text Responses on LoadThis feature allows the user to elect for Ascribe™ to attempt to auto-code textual responses after loading. This function works very similar to the "Code Duplicates" option in the Coder Interface, but it looks for exact textual matches across shared codebooks. This function also works similar to Phrase Analyzer, but it compares the data across studies with shared codebooks. In essence, it allows the user to code a unique response one time, and after that, the loader compares and automatically codes the responses after they are loaded.
It is helpful for a few scenarios:
Code across shared codebooks within a study Code across shared codebooks between two or more studies Code incremental loads of data
Some considerations:
317
PrintDoc01 020813
"See previous response" comments – if you refer to the previous response to code this type of answer, then you might want to leave them for coding after your last load.
Positive/Negative/Neutral Nets -- Auto-coding textual responses does not work well for codebooks that have positive, negative and neutral nets. If the code applied depends on a previous question, then auto-coding textual responses should not be used. For example, you have a believability question that refers back to rating question. The response "price" could be positive, negative or neutral depending on the closed-end rating question.
The data coded by the load coder will not be attributed to a user; instead, it will be attributed to "loader." This allows the user to distinguish between responses coded by a person and responses coded by Ascribe™.
Use the Load CoderSet yo